For vehicles with Caterpillar/ZF Astronic drive train only

RE

PA

IR IN

ST

RU

CT

ION

RE

PA

IR IN

ST

RU

CT

ION

For vehicles with Caterpillar/ZF Astronicdrive train only

Read the repair instruction in Section 6 beforeinstalling the transmission to the engine.

For vehicles with Caterpillar/ZF Astronicdrive train only

Read the repair instruction in Section 6 beforeinstalling the transmission to the engine.

RE

PA

IR IN

ST

RU

CT

ION

RE

PA

IR IN

ST

RU

CT

ION

OG

BF

RO

FO

GB

FR

OF

DATE 11/99

DATE 11/99

C2045

C2045

Congratulations. You are operating one of the world's best linehaul coaches. As you learn more about thefeatures of this fine coach, you will agree that VAN HOOL has Qualities That Make The Difference.

You will find that some of these differences will require familiarization. So please spend some timereviewing this Guidebook to acquaint yourself with the operation of your VAN HOOL coach. It willbe time well spent, for you and your passengers.

WELCOME TO THE VAN HOOLCOMMUTER COACH

T05118

Congratulations. You are operating one of the world's best linehaul coaches. As you learn more about thefeatures of this fine coach, you will agree that VAN HOOL has Qualities That Make The Difference.

You will find that some of these differences will require familiarization. So please spend some timereviewing this Guidebook to acquaint yourself with the operation of your VAN HOOL coach. It willbe time well spent, for you and your passengers.

WELCOME TO THE VAN HOOLCOMMUTER COACH

T05118

OG

BF

RO

FO

GB

FR

OF

C2045DATE 11/99

DATE 11/99C2045

FEDERAL AND STATE LAWS GOVERNING TRAFFIC SPEED LIMITS MUST BE OBEYED AT ALLTIMES. HOWEVER, FOR SAFETY REASONS, THE MAXIMUM INDICATED SPEED LIMIT OF THE

VAN HOOL COACHES IS RATED AT 72 MPH (120 KM/H).

FEDERAL AND STATE LAWS GOVERNING TRAFFIC SPEED LIMITS MUST BE OBEYED AT ALLTIMES. HOWEVER, FOR SAFETY REASONS, THE MAXIMUM INDICATED SPEED LIMIT OF THE

VAN HOOL COACHES IS RATED AT 72 MPH (120 KM/H).

TA

BL

E O

F C

ON

TE

NT

ST

AB

LE

OF

CO

NT

EN

TS

OG

BT

OC

FO

GB

TO

CF

C2045

C2045

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION

GENERAL INFORMATION (safety instructions, identification,assistance, dimensions and data, exterior compartments) ................................ 1

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS (driver's compartment and controls,driving instructions, emergency conditions) ....................................................... 2

ACCESSORIES (climate control, combustion heater, lavatory,wheelchair lift) ......................................................................................................... 3

MAINTENANCE ................................................................................................. 4

APPENDICES (lubricants and fluids, conversion factors,electrical system) .................................................................................................... 5

UPDATES AND ADDITIONS ......................................................................... 6

INDEX .................................................................................................................. 7

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION

GENERAL INFORMATION (safety instructions, identification,assistance, dimensions and data, exterior compartments) ................................ 1

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS (driver's compartment and controls,driving instructions, emergency conditions) ....................................................... 2

ACCESSORIES (climate control, combustion heater, lavatory,wheelchair lift) ......................................................................................................... 3

MAINTENANCE ................................................................................................. 4

APPENDICES (lubricants and fluids, conversion factors,electrical system) .................................................................................................... 5

UPDATES AND ADDITIONS ......................................................................... 6

INDEX .................................................................................................................. 7

TA

BL

E O

F C

ON

TE

NT

ST

AB

LE

OF

CO

NT

EN

TS

OG

BT

OC

FO

GB

TO

CF

C2045

C2045

GE

NE

RA

L I

NF

OR

MA

TIO

NG

EN

ER

AL

IN

FO

RM

AT

ION

Upd

ate

B_O

GB

01A

GU

pdat

e B

_OG

B01

AG

SECTION 1 PAGE 1DATE 10/2004


C2045

C2045

GENERAL INFORMATION

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

Recommendations to avoid injury or damage to health ........................................................ page 3Recommendations to avoid damage to the vehicle .............................................................. page 5Recommendations for the protection of the environment ..................................................... page 6

IDENTIFICATION

Vehicle identification plate .................................................................................................... page 7Vehicle identification number ................................................................................................ page 8Engine identification plate ..................................................................................................... page 8Wheel warning plate .............................................................................................................. page 9

CAUTIONS, NOTES AND COMMENTS ................................................................................. page 10

ASSISTANCE .......................................................................................................................... page 11

DIMENSIONS AND DATA ........................................................................................................ page 12

EXTERIOR COMPARTMENTS ................................................................................................ page 15

GENERAL INFORMATION

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

Recommendations to avoid injury or damage to health .......................................................... page 3Recommendations to avoid damage to the vehicle ................................................................ page 5Recommendations for the protection of the environment ........................................................ page 6

IDENTIFICATION

Vehicle identification plate ..................................................................................................... page 7Vehicle identification number ................................................................................................. page 8Engine identification plate ..................................................................................................... page 8Wheel warning plate .............................................................................................................. page 9

CAUTIONS, NOTES AND COMMENTS ................................................................................. page 10

ASSISTANCE .......................................................................................................................... page 11

DIMENSIONS AND DATA ........................................................................................................ page 12

EXTERIOR COMPARTMENTS ................................................................................................ page 15

GE

NE

RA

L IN

FO

RM

AT

ION

Update B

_OG

B01A

GU

pdate B_O

GB

01AG

GE

NE

RA

L IN

FO

RM

AT

ION

PAGE 2 DATE 10/2004 SECTION 1

DATE 10/2004PAGE 2 SECTION 1

C2045

C2045

GE

NE

RA

L I

NF

OR

MA

TIO

NG

EN

ER

AL

IN

FO

RM

AT

ION

Upd

ate

B_O

GB

01A

GU

pdat

e B

_OG

B01

AG



C2045

C2045

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

In order to avoid damage to equipment andprevent personal injury, it is very important toensure that the operator of the vehicle is fullytrained and that he/she understands clearly everyvehicle operation outlined in this manual.

In order to assist you to avoid accidents anddamage, we have gathered a series of generalinstructions below, applicable to the operation ofcommercial vehicles. In addition, you will find inthe various sections of the manual, specificprecautions related to the operations described.Read them carefully both in the interest of yourown safety and that of the vehicle.

The VAN HOOL Company cannot be heldresponsible for conforming with these safetyinstructions within your company. It can forecastneither ANY situation nor ANY error liable tocause accidents, damage or health problems.

RECOMMENDATIONS TO AVOIDINJURY OR DAMAGE TO HEALTH

• Familiarize yourself with the location and theaction of each of the controls before drivingthe coach for the first time.

• Before operating the coach be sure you knowwhere to find the fire extinguishers and how touse them.

• Before starting the engine, always ensure thatthe parking brake is properly set and that thetransmission is in neutral.

• DO NOT allow either the engine or thecombustion heater to operate in a confinedarea without exhaust gas extractionequipment.

• In order to reduce risk of fire, stop the engineand cut off the heating (combustion heater)before filling with diesel fuel.

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

In order to avoid damage to equipment andprevent personal injury, it is very important toensure that the operator of the vehicle is fullytrained and that he/she understands clearly everyvehicle operation outlined in this manual.

In order to assist you to avoid accidents anddamage, we have gathered a series of generalinstructions below, applicable to the operation ofcommercial vehicles. In addition, you will find inthe various sections of the manual, specificprecautions related to the operations described.Read them carefully both in the interest of yourown safety and that of the vehicle.

The VAN HOOL Company cannot be heldresponsible for conforming with these safetyinstructions within your company. It can forecastneither ANY situation nor ANY error liable tocause accidents, damage or health problems.

RECOMMENDATIONS TO AVOIDINJURY OR DAMAGE TO HEALTH

• Familiarize yourself with the location and theaction of each of the controls before drivingthe coach for the first time.

• Before operating the coach be sure you knowwhere to find the fire extinguishers and how touse them.

• Before starting the engine, always ensure thatthe parking brake is properly set and that thetransmission is in neutral.

• DO NOT allow either the engine or thecombustion heater to operate in a confinedarea without exhaust gas extractionequipment.

• In order to reduce risk of fire, stop the engineand cut off the heating (combustion heater)before filling with diesel fuel.

GE

NE

RA

L IN

FO

RM

AT

ION

Update B

_OG

B01A

GU

pdate B_O

GB

01AG

GE

NE

RA

L IN

FO

RM

AT

ION



C2045

C2045

• Before commencing any operation, be sure tohave read and fully understood the relevantinstructions.

• Before doing any work in the enginecompartment, set the start override switch inthe engine compartment to the cut-off positionin order to prevent the engine from beingstarted from the driver's position. Put a "DONOT START" placard on the steering wheel.

• Basically, all servicing operations should becarried out with the engine stopped. If,however, it becomes necessary to carry outcertain engine checks with the engine running,keep well away from any rotating parts.

!!! CAUTION !!!

THE FLICKERING LIGHT OF FLUORESCENTTUBES SOMETIMES CREATES AN OPTICAL

ILLUSION THAT A ROTATING FAN MAYAPPEAR STATIONARY.

• To avoid burns, DO NOT touch a hot engine,transmission or retarder with bare hands.

• Never open the cooling or heating systemswhile the coolant is still hot. If, however, thesituation forces you to do so anyway, firstallow the pressure to be relieved from thesurge tank as explained in the Sections"Driving Instructions" and "MaintenanceProcedures".

• Neither tighten nor loosen fuel, coolant, air oroil line couplings while under pressure. DONOT check a pressurized system for leakswith your hands. Before disconnecting oropening any component that is part of asystem utilizing pressure, bleed the pressurecarefully from the system after having takenevery necessary precaution.

• Keep in mind that vehicle body groundclearance can suddenly decrease by over 3inches when the suspension air bellows aredepressurized (whether intentionally orinadvertently).

• To reduce the risk of incendive short circuits,when disconnecting batteries alwaysdisconnect the ground cable first. Whenreconnecting the batteries, first connect thepositive cable.

• Before commencing any operation, be sure tohave read and fully understood the relevantinstructions.

• Before doing any work in the enginecompartment, set the start override switch inthe engine compartment to the cut-off positionin order to prevent the engine from beingstarted from the driver's position. Put a "DONOT START" placard on the steering wheel.

• Basically, all servicing operations should becarried out with the engine stopped. If,however, it becomes necessary to carry outcertain engine checks with the engine running,keep well away from any rotating parts.

!!! CAUTION !!!

THE FLICKERING LIGHT OF FLUORESCENTTUBES SOMETIMES CREATES AN OPTICAL

ILLUSION THAT A ROTATING FAN MAYAPPEAR STATIONARY.

• To avoid burns, DO NOT touch a hot engine,transmission or retarder with bare hands.

• Never open the cooling or heating systemswhile the coolant is still hot. If, however, thesituation forces you to do so anyway, firstallow the pressure to be relieved from thesurge tank as explained in the Sections"Driving Instructions" and "MaintenanceProcedures".

• Neither tighten nor loosen fuel, coolant, air oroil line couplings while under pressure. DONOT check a pressurized system for leakswith your hands. Before disconnecting oropening any component that is part of asystem utilizing pressure, bleed the pressurecarefully from the system after having takenevery necessary precaution.

• Keep in mind that vehicle body groundclearance can suddenly decrease by over 3inches when the suspension air bellows aredepressurized (whether intentionally orinadvertently).

• To reduce the risk of incendive short circuits,when disconnecting batteries alwaysdisconnect the ground cable first. Whenreconnecting the batteries, first connect thepositive cable.

GE

NE

RA

L I

NF

OR

MA

TIO

NG

EN

ER

AL

IN

FO

RM

AT

ION

Upd

ate

B_O

GB

01A

GU

pdat

e B

_OG

B01

AG



C2045

C2045

• The batteries contain a corrosive solution ofsulfuric acid. The gases given off by a batteryare highly explosive.

• Use only tools maintained in good condition.Worn-out wrenches, for example, mayinadvertently slip off and provoke injury.

• Before lifting the vehicle with a jack, apply theparking brake and chock the wheelsremaining on the ground.

• Only use jacks in good condition, of adequatelifting capacity and of the appropriate type.

• Never get beneath a vehicle supported only byjacks or hoists; always fit additional supportingblocks or stands first.

• The gas struts on the lift-up type coach bodydoors contain gas under high pressure. Neverpierce or attempt to open these units. Do notheat.

• Children younger than 10 years should alwaystake place on a seat with a seatback in frontof it.

RECOMMENDATIONS TO AVOIDDAMAGE TO THE VEHICLE

• Take care that each problem be remedied assoon as possible in order to avoid anyaggravation.

• Adhere to the tightening torquesrecommended in the "MaintenanceProcedures" Section of this manual.

• Always turn off the battery master switchbefore undertaking any work on the vehicle'selectrical system.

• Never disconnect any electronic control orregulation modules (engine control box,transmission control box, speed limiter, etc.) ifthe battery master switch is "on".

• Where a vehicle has an encapsulated engine:after each maintenance or repair operation,check for the presence of any flammableliquids or materials at the base of the engineencapsulation (Diesel fuel spilled whenbleeding the fuel system, for example).

• The batteries contain a corrosive solution ofsulfuric acid. The gases given off by a batteryare highly explosive.

• Use only tools maintained in good condition.Worn-out wrenches, for example, mayinadvertently slip off and provoke injury.

• Before lifting the vehicle with a jack, apply theparking brake and chock the wheelsremaining on the ground.

• Only use jacks in good condition, of adequatelifting capacity and of the appropriate type.

• Never get beneath a vehicle supported only byjacks or hoists; always fit additional supportingblocks or stands first.

• The gas struts on the lift-up type coach bodydoors contain gas under high pressure. Neverpierce or attempt to open these units. Do notheat.

• Children younger than 10 years should alwaystake place on a seat with a seatback in frontof it.

RECOMMENDATIONS TO AVOIDDAMAGE TO THE VEHICLE

• Take care that each problem be remedied assoon as possible in order to avoid anyaggravation.

• Adhere to the tightening torquesrecommended in the "MaintenanceProcedures" Section of this manual.

• Always turn off the battery master switchbefore undertaking any work on the vehicle'selectrical system.

• Never disconnect any electronic control orregulation modules (engine control box,transmission control box, speed limiter, etc.) ifthe battery master switch is "on".

• Where a vehicle has an encapsulated engine:after each maintenance or repair operation,check for the presence of any flammableliquids or materials at the base of the engineencapsulation (Diesel fuel spilled whenbleeding the fuel system, for example).

GE

NE

RA

L IN

FO

RM

AT

ION

Update B

_OG

B01A

GU

pdate B_O

GB

01AG

GE

NE

RA

L IN

FO

RM

AT

ION



C2045

C2045

• When necessary to raise the vehicle chassisby means of jacks, these should be locatedsolely under the chassis lifting points indicatedunder the heading "Emergency Conditions" inthe "Operating Instructions" Section

• Never add cold coolant to an overheatedengine.

• The use of portable phones and transmittingequipment inside the vehicle could disruptnormal operation of the electronical equipmentand thus jeopardize the vehicle's reliability. Inorder not to endanger your vehicle's reliability,only use portable phones and transmittingequipment inside the vehicle if they areconnected to an exterior antenna.

RECOMMENDATIONS FOR THEPROTECTION OF THE ENVIRONMENT

Avoid contaminating the natural environment withtoxic or polluting substances. Lube oil, anti-freeze, hydraulic fluids, refrigerants, batteryelectrolyte, used oil and fuel filter elements, lead-acid batteries as well as asbestos containingwaste must be disposed of according to local,State and Federal guidelines. Information on therules currently in force should be obtained fromthe appropriate environmental authorities(E.P.A.).

DO NOT let the coach engine idle forunnecessarily long periods. During idling, exhaustemission levels are much higher.

• When necessary to raise the vehicle chassisby means of jacks, these should be locatedsolely under the chassis lifting points indicatedunder the heading "Emergency Conditions" inthe "Operating Instructions" Section

• Never add cold coolant to an overheatedengine.

• The use of portable phones and transmittingequipment inside the vehicle could disruptnormal operation of the electronical equipmentand thus jeopardize the vehicle's reliability. Inorder not to endanger your vehicle's reliability,only use portable phones and transmittingequipment inside the vehicle if they areconnected to an exterior antenna.

RECOMMENDATIONS FOR THEPROTECTION OF THE ENVIRONMENT

Avoid contaminating the natural environment withtoxic or polluting substances. Lube oil, anti-freeze, hydraulic fluids, refrigerants, batteryelectrolyte, used oil and fuel filter elements, lead-acid batteries as well as asbestos containingwaste must be disposed of according to local,State and Federal guidelines. Information on therules currently in force should be obtained fromthe appropriate environmental authorities(E.P.A.).

DO NOT let the coach engine idle forunnecessarily long periods. During idling, exhaustemission levels are much higher.

GE

NE

RA

L I

NF

OR

MA

TIO

NG

EN

ER

AL

IN

FO

RM

AT

ION

Upd

ate

B_O

GB

01A

GU

pdat

e B

_OG

B01

AG



C2045

C2045

F04710

T03731

IDENTIFICATION

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION PLATE

The vehicle identification plate is located in thestepwell of the entrance door.

The plate contains the following information:

A: Front axleB: Drive axleC: Tag axleD: Gross vehicle weight ratingE: Month/year of constructionF: Gross axle weight ratingG: Tire sizeH: Rim sizeI: Cold inflation pressureJ: Production numberK: Vehicle identification number

IDENTIFICATION

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION PLATE

The vehicle identification plate is located in thestepwell of the entrance door.

The plate contains the following information:

A: Front axleB: Drive axleC: Tag axleD: Gross vehicle weight ratingE: Month/year of constructionF: Gross axle weight ratingG: Tire sizeH: Rim sizeI: Cold inflation pressureJ: Production numberK: Vehicle identification number

T03731

F04710

GE

NE

RA

L IN

FO

RM

AT

ION

Update B

_OG

B01A

GU

pdate B_O

GB

01AG

GE

NE

RA

L IN

FO

RM

AT

ION



C2045

C2045

T05185

T03328

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

The vehicle identification number is stamped onthe right-hand chassis side member, behind theR.H front wheel.

ENGINE IDENTIFICATION

Detroit Diesel

The engine serial number and model number arelaser etched on the fuel filter side of the cylinderblock just below the intake manifold and above thecast-in Detroit Diesel logo.

Cummins

The engine dataplate is located on the fuel filterside of the engine, on the rocker housing.

XXXXXXXXXXX

DETROIT DIESEL

T03002

CUMMINS

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

The vehicle identification number is stamped onthe right-hand chassis side member, behind theR.H front wheel.

ENGINE IDENTIFICATION

Detroit Diesel

The engine serial number and model number arelaser etched on the fuel filter side of the cylinderblock just below the intake manifold and above thecast-in Detroit Diesel logo.

Cummins

The engine dataplate is located on the fuel filterside of the engine, on the rocker housing.

T05185

T03328

XXXXXXXXXXX

DETROIT DIESEL

T03002

CUMMINS

GE

NE

RA

L I

NF

OR

MA

TIO

NG

EN

ER

AL

IN

FO

RM

AT

ION

Upd

ate

B_O

GB

01A

GU

pdat

e B

_OG

B01

AG



C2045

C2045

Caterpillar

The serial number plate is located at the fuel filterside of the cylinder block near the rear of theengine.

Caterpillar

The serial number plate is located at the fuel filterside of the cylinder block near the rear of theengine.

WHEEL WARNING PLATE

Current vehicles are fitted with 22.5" x 9.00"wheels instead of 22.5" x 8.25" wheels. Vehicleswith 9.00" wheels have a "9 inch wheels"warning plate next to the vehicle identificationplate. .

!!! CAUTION !!!

NEVER FIT 8.25" WHEELS ON VEHICLESORIGINALLY FITTED WITH 9.00" WHEELS

OR 9.00" WHEELS ON VEHICLESORIGINALLY FITTED WITH 8.25" WHEELS.

WHEEL WARNING PLATE

Current vehicles are fitted with 22.5" x 9.00"wheels instead of 22.5" x 8.25" wheels. Vehicleswith 9.00" wheels have a "9 inch wheels"warning plate next to the vehicle identificationplate. .

!!! CAUTION !!!

NEVER FIT 8.25" WHEELS ON VEHICLESORIGINALLY FITTED WITH 9.00" WHEELS

OR 9.00" WHEELS ON VEHICLESORIGINALLY FITTED WITH 8.25" WHEELS.

CATERPILLAR

CATERPILLAR

GE

NE

RA

L IN

FO

RM

AT

ION

Update B

_OG

B01A

GU

pdate B_O

GB

01AG

GE

NE

RA

L IN

FO

RM

AT

ION



C2045

C2045

CAUTIONS, NOTES AND COMMENTS

Three types of headings are used in this manual to attract your attention. It is the driver's responsibilityto become familiar with the cautions and notes in the guide.

!!! CAUTION !!!

CONCERNS MATTERS THAT MAY ENDANGER LIVES OR DAMAGE PROPERTY.

NOTE

Indicates useful tips or other advice that should be remembered.

Comments are printed in italics to draw attention to important data or information.

CAUTIONS, NOTES AND COMMENTS

Three types of headings are used in this manual to attract your attention. It is the driver's responsibilityto become familiar with the cautions and notes in the guide.

!!! CAUTION !!!

CONCERNS MATTERS THAT MAY ENDANGER LIVES OR DAMAGE PROPERTY.

NOTE

Indicates useful tips or other advice that should be remembered.

Comments are printed in italics to draw attention to important data or information.

GE

NE

RA

L I

NF

OR

MA

TIO

NG

EN

ER

AL

IN

FO

RM

AT

ION

Upd

ate

B_O

GB

01A

GU

pdat

e B

_OG

B01

AG



C2045

C2045

IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE, CALL YOUR NEARESTAUTHORIZED VAN HOOL SERVICE CENTER

CALIFORNIA

FLORIDA

MINNESOTA

NEW JERSEY

TEXAS

13261 Garden Grove Blvd., (800) 322-2877 (714) 663-9826Garden Grove, CA 92843 (714) 740-8888

17469 West Colonial Drive, (800) 222-2871 (407) 905-7010Building A, (407) 656-7977Winter Garden, FL 34787

1506 30th Street NW, (800) 222-2875 (507) 334-8311Faribault, MN 55021 (507) 334-1871

1494 Federal Street, (800) 222-2873 (609) 966-0055Camden, NJ 08105 (609) 966-1500

1702 S. Great Southwest Pkwy, (972) 206-1110 (972) 602-7333Grand Prairie, TX 75051

Phone no. Fax no.LOCATION

REGIONAL SERVICE CENTERS

IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE, CALL YOUR NEARESTAUTHORIZED VAN HOOL SERVICE CENTER

CALIFORNIA

FLORIDA

MINNESOTA

NEW JERSEY

TEXAS

13261 Garden Grove Blvd., (800) 322-2877 (714) 663-9826Garden Grove, CA 92843 (714) 740-8888

17469 West Colonial Drive, (800) 222-2871 (407) 905-7010Building A, (407) 656-7977Winter Garden, FL 34787

1506 30th Street NW, (800) 222-2875 (507) 334-8311Faribault, MN 55021 (507) 334-1871

1494 Federal Street, (800) 222-2873 (609) 966-0055Camden, NJ 08105 (609) 966-1500

1702 S. Great Southwest Pkwy, (972) 206-1110 (972) 602-7333Grand Prairie, TX 75051

Phone no. Fax no.LOCATION

REGIONAL SERVICE CENTERS

GE

NE

RA

L IN

FO

RM

AT

ION

Update B

_OG

B01A

GU

pdate B_O

GB

01AG

GE

NE

RA

L IN

FO

RM

AT

ION



C2045

C2045

DIMENSIONS AND DATA

DIMENSIONS

VEHICLE LENGTH ........................................................................................................................... 45'

VEHICLE WIDTH .......................................................................................................................... 102"

VEHICLE HEIGHT ......................................................................................................................... 138"

WHEELBASE ..............................................................................................................................25' 4"

INTERIOR HEIGHT .......................................................................................................................... 75"

FRONT OVERHANG ....................................................................................................................... 77"

REAR OVERHANG ....................................................................................................................... 115"

STEP HEIGHT ................................................................................................................................ 49"

DIMENSIONS AND DATA

DIMENSIONS

VEHICLE LENGTH ........................................................................................................................... 45'

VEHICLE WIDTH .......................................................................................................................... 102"

VEHICLE HEIGHT ......................................................................................................................... 138"

WHEELBASE ..............................................................................................................................25' 4"

INTERIOR HEIGHT .......................................................................................................................... 75"

FRONT OVERHANG ....................................................................................................................... 77"

REAR OVERHANG ....................................................................................................................... 115"

STEP HEIGHT ................................................................................................................................ 49"

GE

NE

RA

L I

NF

OR

MA

TIO

NG

EN

ER

AL

IN

FO

RM

AT

ION

Upd

ate

B_O

GB

01A

GU

pdat

e B

_OG

B01

AG



C2045

C2045

DATA

ENGINE ........................................................................................... Detroit Diesel Series 60 DDEC IVDetroit Diesel Series 60 DDEC V

Cummins ISM 01Cummins ISM 02

Caterpillar C13

TRANSMISSION ........................................................................................................ Allison WT B500ZF Astronic

AXLES

Front and tag axle ............................................................................................................. Van HoolDrive axle ................................................................................................................................ Dana

BRAKES

Front and tag axle ...................................................................................... ArvinMeritor disc brakesDrive axle .......................................................................... Dana S-cam or ArvinMeritor disc brakes

POWER STEERING ........................................................................................................................ ZF

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM: 24-volt negative ground electrical system (except head lamps, clearance lamps,identification lamps and side marker lamps which are 12-volt)

DATA

ENGINE ........................................................................................... Detroit Diesel Series 60 DDEC IVDetroit Diesel Series 60 DDEC V

Cummins ISM 01Cummins ISM 02

Caterpillar C13

TRANSMISSION ........................................................................................................ Allison WT B500ZF Astronic

AXLES

Front and tag axle ............................................................................................................. Van HoolDrive axle ................................................................................................................................ Dana

BRAKES

Front and tag axle ...................................................................................... ArvinMeritor disc brakesDrive axle .......................................................................... Dana S-cam or ArvinMeritor disc brakes

POWER STEERING ........................................................................................................................ ZF

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM: 24-volt negative ground electrical system (except head lamps, clearance lamps,identification lamps and side marker lamps which are 12-volt)

GE

NE

RA

L IN

FO

RM

AT

ION

Update B

_OG

B01A

GU

pdate B_O

GB

01AG

GE

NE

RA

L IN

FO

RM

AT

ION



C2045

C2045

T05120

T05120

GE

NE

RA

L I

NF

OR

MA

TIO

NG

EN

ER

AL

IN

FO

RM

AT

ION

Upd

ate

B_O

GB

01A

GU

pdat

e B

_OG

B01

AG



C2045

C2045

EXTERIOR COMPARTMENTS

1. Access to windshield washer tank anddriver's compartment HVAC unit

2. Left-hand fuel filler lid

3. Luggage compartment (access to mainjunction box)

4. Luggage compartment


6. AC condenser compartment

7. Combustion heater compartment

8. Access to cooling radiator, charge-aircooler, air cleaner, batteries, batteryjunction box and mechanical batteryisolating switch (current vehicles only)

9. Coolant filler lid

10. Engine compartment rear door

11. Access to power steering reservoir andwaste holding tank


13. Luggage compartment (access to HVACjunction box, ISM/DDEC/CAT junction boxand pressure switch box)




17. Right-hand fuel filler lid

18. Entrance door

19. Spare wheel and tire compartment

20. Air system emergency fill

EXTERIOR COMPARTMENTS

1. Access to windshield washer tank anddriver's compartment HVAC unit

2. Left-hand fuel filler lid




6. AC condenser compartment

7. Combustion heater compartment

8. Access to cooling radiator, charge-aircooler, air cleaner, batteries, batteryjunction box and mechanical batteryisolating switch (current vehicles only)

9. Coolant filler lid

10. Engine compartment rear door

11. Access to power steering reservoir andwaste holding tank


13. Luggage compartment (access to HVACjunction box, ISM/DDEC/CAT junction boxand pressure switch box)




17. Right-hand fuel filler lid

18. Entrance door

19. Spare wheel and tire compartment

20. Air system emergency fill

GE

NE

RA

L IN

FO

RM

AT

ION

Update B

_OG

B01A

GU

pdate B_O

GB

01AG

GE

NE

RA

L IN

FO

RM

AT

ION



C2045

C2045

OP

ER

AT

ING

IN

ST

RU

CT

ION

SO

PE

RA

TIN

G I

NS

TR

UC

TIO

NS

Upd

ate

B_O

GB

02A

PU

pdat

e B

_OG

B02

AP

SECTION 2 PAGE 2A-1DATE 10/2004

SECTION 2 PAGE 2A-1DATE 10/2004C2045

C2045

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

DRIVER'S COMPARTMENT AND CONTROLS

DRIVER'S SEAT .................................................................................................................. page 2A-9

To adjust driver's seat ....................................................................................................... page 2A-9

SEAT BELTS ...................................................................................................................... page 2A-11

EXTERIOR REAR-VIEW MIRRORS .................................................................................... page 2A-11

STEERING COLUMN .......................................................................................................... page 2A-12

STEERING COLUMN COMBINATION SWITCH ................................................................. page 2A-13

INSTRUMENT PANEL (NON-MULTIPLEXED VEHICLES; MODEL YEARS 2000, 2001, 2002) ............... page 2A-15

INSTRUMENT PANEL (NON-MULTIPLEXED VEHICLES; MODEL YEAR 2003) ................................. page 2A-17

INSTRUMENT PANEL (MULTIPLEXED VEHICLES) ................................................................... page 2A-19

INSTRUMENT PANEL SWITCHES ...................................................................................... page 2A-20

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS


DRIVER'S SEAT .................................................................................................................. page 2A-9

To adjust driver's seat ....................................................................................................... page 2A-9

SEAT BELTS ...................................................................................................................... page 2A-11

EXTERIOR REAR-VIEW MIRRORS .................................................................................... page 2A-11

STEERING COLUMN .......................................................................................................... page 2A-12

STEERING COLUMN COMBINATION SWITCH ................................................................. page 2A-13

INSTRUMENT PANEL (NON-MULTIPLEXED VEHICLES; MODEL YEARS 2000, 2001, 2002) ............... page 2A-15

INSTRUMENT PANEL (NON-MULTIPLEXED VEHICLES; MODEL YEAR 2003) ................................. page 2A-17

INSTRUMENT PANEL (MULTIPLEXED VEHICLES) ................................................................... page 2A-19

INSTRUMENT PANEL SWITCHES ...................................................................................... page 2A-20

Update B

_OG

B02A

PU

pdate B_O

GB

02AP

OP

ER

AT

ING

INS

TR

UC

TIO

NS

OP

ER

AT

ING

INS

TR

UC

TIO

NS

PAGE 2A-2 DATE 10/2004 SECTION 2

DATE 10/2004PAGE 2A-2 SECTION 2

C2045

C2045

WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS (NON-MULTIPLEXED VEHICLES) ........................... page 2A-26

WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS (MULTIPLEXED VEHICLES) ................................... page 2A-34

MESSAGES ON MULTIFUNCTION DISPLAY (MULTIPLEXED VEHICLES ONLY) ............. page 2A-35

INSTRUMENTS (NON-MULTIPLEXED VEHICLES)

Speedometer ................................................................................................................... page 2A-40Tachometer ..................................................................................................................... page 2A-40Engine coolant temperature gauge .................................................................................. page 2A-41Engine oil pressure gauge ............................................................................................... page 2A-41Front axle brakes air-pressure gauge .............................................................................. page 2A-42Drive axle service brakes air-pressure gauge ................................................................... page 2A-42Tag axle brakes air-pressure gauge ................................................................................. page 2A-42Turbo boost gauge .......................................................................................................... page 2A-42Fuel level gauge .............................................................................................................. page 2A-43

INSTRUMENTS (MULTIPLEXED VEHICLES)

Speedometer/odometer ................................................................................................... page 2A-44Tachometer ..................................................................................................................... page 2A-44Engine coolant temperature gauge .................................................................................. page 2A-44Fuel level gauge .............................................................................................................. page 2A-44Information screens on multifunction display ................................................................... page 2A-44

WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS (NON-MULTIPLEXED VEHICLES) ........................... page 2A-26

WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS (MULTIPLEXED VEHICLES) ................................... page 2A-34

MESSAGES ON MULTIFUNCTION DISPLAY (MULTIPLEXED VEHICLES ONLY) ............. page 2A-35

INSTRUMENTS (NON-MULTIPLEXED VEHICLES)

Speedometer ................................................................................................................... page 2A-40Tachometer ..................................................................................................................... page 2A-40Engine coolant temperature gauge .................................................................................. page 2A-41Engine oil pressure gauge ............................................................................................... page 2A-41Front axle brakes air-pressure gauge .............................................................................. page 2A-42Drive axle service brakes air-pressure gauge ................................................................... page 2A-42Tag axle brakes air-pressure gauge ................................................................................. page 2A-42Turbo boost gauge .......................................................................................................... page 2A-42Fuel level gauge .............................................................................................................. page 2A-43

INSTRUMENTS (MULTIPLEXED VEHICLES)

Speedometer/odometer ................................................................................................... page 2A-44Tachometer ..................................................................................................................... page 2A-44Engine coolant temperature gauge .................................................................................. page 2A-44Fuel level gauge .............................................................................................................. page 2A-44Information screens on multifunction display ................................................................... page 2A-44

OP

ER

AT

ING

IN

ST

RU

CT

ION

SO

PE

RA

TIN

G I

NS

TR

UC

TIO

NS

Upd

ate

B_O

GB

02A

PU

pdat

e B

_OG

B02

AP



C2045

DRIVING INSTRUCTIONS

ENGINE

To stop the engine ........................................................................................................... page 2B-1Pre-starting checks ......................................................................................................... page 2B-2To start the engine .......................................................................................................... page 2B-2To drive off ....................................................................................................................... page 2B-4To warm-up the engine .................................................................................................... page 2B-5

WT B500 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION ............................................................................ page 2B-6

Shift selector................................................................................................................... page 2B-6Range selection .............................................................................................................. page 2B-7"Do not shift" light ........................................................................................................... page 2B-9Diagnostic codes ............................................................................................................ page 2B-10Throttle control ............................................................................................................... page 2B-10Downshift or reverse inhibitor feature ............................................................................. page 2B-11Using the engine to slow the vehicle ............................................................................... page 2B-11Range preselection ......................................................................................................... page 2B-12Cold weather starts ......................................................................................................... page 2B-12Driving on snow or ice ..................................................................................................... page 2B-13Rocking out ..................................................................................................................... page 2B-13High transmission fluid temperature ................................................................................ page 2B-14Kick-down ....................................................................................................................... page 2B-15


ENGINE

To stop the engine ........................................................................................................... page 2B-1Pre-starting checks ......................................................................................................... page 2B-2To start the engine .......................................................................................................... page 2B-2To drive off ....................................................................................................................... page 2B-4To warm-up the engine .................................................................................................... page 2B-5

WT B500 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION ............................................................................ page 2B-6

Shift selector ................................................................................................................... page 2B-6Range selection .............................................................................................................. page 2B-7"Do not shift" light ........................................................................................................... page 2B-9Diagnostic codes ............................................................................................................ page 2B-10Throttle control ................................................................................................................ page 2B-10Downshift or reverse inhibitor feature ............................................................................... page 2B-11Using the engine to slow the vehicle ................................................................................ page 2B-11Range preselection ......................................................................................................... page 2B-12Cold weather starts ......................................................................................................... page 2B-12Driving on snow or ice ..................................................................................................... page 2B-13Rocking out ..................................................................................................................... page 2B-13High transmission fluid temperature ................................................................................ page 2B-14Kick-down ....................................................................................................................... page 2B-15

Update B

_OG

B02A

PU

pdate B_O

GB

02AP

OP

ER

AT

ING

INS

TR

UC

TIO

NS

OP

ER

AT

ING

INS

TR

UC

TIO

NS



C2045

C2045

ZF ASTRONIC-TRANSMISSION .................................................................................... page 2B-15

CRUISE CONTROL/FAST IDLE .................................................................................... page 2B-16

Cruise control .................................................................................................................. page 2B-16Fast idle .......................................................................................................................... page 2B-17

POWER STEERING ......................................................................................................... page 2B-19

BRAKES

Jake brake ...................................................................................................................... page 2B-19ZF Astronic ..................................................................................................................... page 2B-20Service brake (foot brake) ................................................................................................ page 2B-20Parking brake .................................................................................................................. page 2B-21Anti-lock braking system (ABS) ...................................................................................... page 2B-22

AUTOMATIC TRACTION CONTROL (ASR) ........................................................................ page 2B-22

RAISE/LOWER SYSTEM (optional) ................................................................................... page 2B-23

FRONT LOWER SYSTEM ................................................................................................. page 2B-24

REAR RAISE SYSTEM ....................................................................................................... page 2B-24

TAG AXLE UNLOADING (optional) ................................................................................... page 2B-25

ENTRANCE DOOR

Door control with dashboard switch ................................................................................ page 2B-26Door control from the outside .......................................................................................... page 2B-26

ZF ASTRONIC-TRANSMISSION .................................................................................... page 2B-15

CRUISE CONTROL/FAST IDLE .................................................................................... page 2B-16

Cruise control .................................................................................................................. page 2B-16Fast idle .......................................................................................................................... page 2B-17

POWER STEERING ......................................................................................................... page 2B-19

BRAKES

Jake brake ...................................................................................................................... page 2B-19ZF Astronic ..................................................................................................................... page 2B-20Service brake (foot brake) ................................................................................................ page 2B-20Parking brake .................................................................................................................. page 2B-21Anti-lock braking system (ABS) ...................................................................................... page 2B-22

AUTOMATIC TRACTION CONTROL (ASR) ........................................................................ page 2B-22

RAISE/LOWER SYSTEM (optional) ................................................................................... page 2B-23

FRONT LOWER SYSTEM ................................................................................................. page 2B-24

REAR RAISE SYSTEM ....................................................................................................... page 2B-24

TAG AXLE UNLOADING (optional) ................................................................................... page 2B-25

ENTRANCE DOOR

Door control with dashboard switch ................................................................................ page 2B-26Door control from the outside .......................................................................................... page 2B-26

OP

ER

AT

ING

IN

ST

RU

CT

ION

SO

PE

RA

TIN

G I

NS

TR

UC

TIO

NS

Upd

ate

B_O

GB

02A

PU

pdat

e B

_OG

B02

AP



C2045

To lock door from the inside ............................................................................................ page 2B-26To lock/unlock door from the outside ............................................................................... page 2B-26Automatic reopening ....................................................................................................... page 2B-27

LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT DOORS CENTRAL LOCKING SYSTEM ............................... page 2B-28

EMERGENCY CONDITIONSPARKING BRAKE EMERGENCY RELEASE

Air pressure release ....................................................................................................... page 2C-1Mechanical release ........................................................................................................ page 2C-1

HAZARD WARNING FLASHER ........................................................................................ page 2C-2

ENTRANCE DOOR EMERGENCY OPERATION .............................................................. page 2C-3

EMERGENCY OPERATION OF RAISE, LOWER AND REAR RISE SYSTEM ................. page 2C-4

COOLING FAN MECHANICAL LOCKING DEVICE ............................................................. page 2C-5

EMERGENCY EXITS

Side window emergency escape ..................................................................................... page 2C-6Roof emergency escape.................................................................................................. page 2C-7

LEAK IN HEATING SYSTEM .............................................................................................. page 2C-7

To lock door from the inside ............................................................................................ page 2B-26To lock/unlock door from the outside ............................................................................... page 2B-26Automatic reopening ....................................................................................................... page 2B-27

LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT DOORS CENTRAL LOCKING SYSTEM ............................... page 2B-28

EMERGENCY CONDITIONSPARKING BRAKE EMERGENCY RELEASE

Air pressure release ....................................................................................................... page 2C-1Mechanical release......................................................................................................... page 2C-1

HAZARD WARNING FLASHER ........................................................................................ page 2C-2

ENTRANCE DOOR EMERGENCY OPERATION .................................................................. page 2C-3

EMERGENCY OPERATION OF RAISE, LOWER AND REAR RISE SYSTEM ..................... page 2C-4

COOLING FAN MECHANICAL LOCKING DEVICE ............................................................. page 2C-5

EMERGENCY EXITS

Side window emergency escape ..................................................................................... page 2C-6Roof emergency escape.................................................................................................. page 2C-7

LEAK IN HEATING SYSTEM .............................................................................................. page 2C-7

Update B

_OG

B02A

PU

pdate B_O

GB

02AP

OP

ER

AT

ING

INS

TR

UC

TIO

NS

OP

ER

AT

ING

INS

TR

UC

TIO

NS



C2045

C2045

AN ENGINE WARNING LIGHT IS ILLUMINATED ............................................................... page 2C-8

Cummins ISM engine ..................................................................................................... page 2C-8Detroit Diesel engine ....................................................................................................... page 2C-10Caterpillar engine ............................................................................................................ page 2C-11

WT B500-TRANSMISSION "DO NOT SHIFT" LIGHT IS ILLUMINATED ............................ page 2C-12

Diagnostic codes ............................................................................................................ page 2C-12Diagnostic code display procedure .................................................................................. page 2C-13

ABS WARNING LIGHT IS ILLUMINATED .......................................................................... page 2C-14

AIR SYSTEM EMERGENCY FILL ....................................................................................... page 2C-14

PUSH-STARTING ............................................................................................................... page 2C-14

LIFTING AND TOWING THE COACH WITH A TOW TRUCK ............................................. page 2C-15

TIRE INFLATION ................................................................................................................ page 2C-16

SPARE WHEEL & TIRE ...................................................................................................... page 2C-16

TO CHANGE A ROAD WHEEL ........................................................................................... page 2C-17

To remove the wheel ........................................................................................................ page 2C-18To fit the spare wheel ...................................................................................................... page 2C-22

AN ENGINE WARNING LIGHT IS ILLUMINATED ............................................................... page 2C-8

Cummins ISM engine ...................................................................................................... page 2C-8Detroit Diesel engine ....................................................................................................... page 2C-10Caterpillar engine ............................................................................................................ page 2C-11

WT B500-TRANSMISSION "DO NOT SHIFT" LIGHT IS ILLUMINATED ............................ page 2C-12

Diagnostic codes ............................................................................................................ page 2C-12Diagnostic code display procedure .................................................................................. page 2C-13

ABS WARNING LIGHT IS ILLUMINATED .......................................................................... page 2C-14

AIR SYSTEM EMERGENCY FILL ....................................................................................... page 2C-14

PUSH-STARTING ............................................................................................................... page 2C-14

LIFTING AND TOWING THE COACH WITH A TOW TRUCK ............................................. page 2C-15

TIRE INFLATION ................................................................................................................ page 2C-16

SPARE WHEEL & TIRE ...................................................................................................... page 2C-16

TO CHANGE A ROAD WHEEL ........................................................................................... page 2C-17

To remove the wheel ........................................................................................................ page 2C-18To fit the spare wheel ...................................................................................................... page 2C-22

OP

ER

AT

ING

IN

ST

RU

CT

ION

SO

PE

RA

TIN

G I

NS

TR

UC

TIO

NS

Upd

ate

B_O

GB

02A

PU

pdat

e B

_OG

B02

AP



C2045

CHASSIS FRAME JACKING POINTS ................................................................................ page 2C-22

CLIMATE CONTROL OVERRIDE ........................................................................................ page 2C-24

JUMP STARTING ............................................................................................................. page 2C-24

To connect booster battery cables................................................................................... page 2C-25To disconnect booster battery cables .............................................................................. page 2C-26

MANUAL WHEELCHAIR LIFT OPERATION ................................................................... page 2C-27

CHASSIS FRAME JACKING POINTS ................................................................................ page 2C-22

CLIMATE CONTROL OVERRIDE ........................................................................................ page 2C-24

JUMP STARTING ............................................................................................................. page 2C-24

To connect booster battery cables................................................................................... page 2C-25To disconnect booster battery cables .............................................................................. page 2C-26

MANUAL WHEELCHAIR LIFT OPERATION ................................................................... page 2C-27

Update B

_OG

B02A

PU

pdate B_O

GB

02AP

OP

ER

AT

ING

INS

TR

UC

TIO

NS

OP

ER

AT

ING

INS

TR

UC

TIO

NS



C2045

C2045

OP

ER

AT

ING

IN

ST

RU

CT

ION

SO

PE

RA

TIN

G I

NS

TR

UC

TIO

NS

Upd

ate

B_O

GB

02A

PU

pdat

e B

_OG

B02

AP



C2045

DRIVER'S COMPARTMENT AND CONTROLSDRIVER'S SEAT

!!! CAUTION !!!

ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY BELT. MAKESURE THE SEAT IS ADJUSTED ANDSAFETY BELT FASTENED BEFORE

DRIVING.

NEVER ADJUST THE SEAT WHILE THECOACH IS IN MOTION.

TO ADJUST DRIVER'S SEAT

1. BackrestLift lever then adjust backrest to desiredangle.

2. Tilt(rear)To lower or raise the seat's rear section, pullhandle up, and push or pull the seat cushion.

3. Tilt(front)To lower or raise the seat's front section, pullhandle up, and push or pull the seat cushion.

T05111


DRIVER'S SEAT

!!! CAUTION !!!

ALWAYS WEAR SAFETY BELT. MAKESURE THE SEAT IS ADJUSTED ANDSAFETY BELT FASTENED BEFORE

DRIVING.

NEVER ADJUST THE SEAT WHILE THECOACH IS IN MOTION.

TO ADJUST DRIVER'S SEAT

1. BackrestLift lever then adjust backrest to desiredangle.

2. Tilt(rear)To lower or raise the seat's rear section, pullhandle up, and push or pull the seat cushion.

3. Tilt(front)To lower or raise the seat's front section, pullhandle up, and push or pull the seat cushion.

T05111

Update B

_OG

B02A

PU

pdate B_O

GB

02AP

OP

ER

AT

ING

INS

TR

UC

TIO

NS

OP

ER

AT

ING

INS

TR

UC

TIO

NS



C2045

C2045

4. Weight adjustmentSet seat tension by rotating knob (2) so thatthe number indicated on the knob scale isequal to approximately 50% of yourbodyweight; for example, if you weigh180 pounds, set knob at "90". Fine tune fromthis approximate setting.

5. Fore-and-aftTo adjust distance between driver anddashboard, pull handle up and slide the seatforward or backward.

6. ArmrestTo adjust the armrest to a lower position, turnthe control knob counterclockwise withoutapplying pressure on the armrest, then pushthe armrest down. Repeat procedure untilarmrest is at desired position. To adjust to ahigher position, lift armrest until at desiredheight then turn control knob clockwise until itstops.

7. HeadrestThe headrest can be adjusted forward orrearward, and vertically adjusted 2 inches bylowering or raising it.T05111

4. Weight adjustmentSet seat tension by rotating knob (2) so thatthe number indicated on the knob scale isequal to approximately 50% of yourbodyweight; for example, if you weigh180 pounds, set knob at "90". Fine tune fromthis approximate setting.

5. Fore-and-aftTo adjust distance between driver anddashboard, pull handle up and slide the seatforward or backward.

6. ArmrestTo adjust the armrest to a lower position, turnthe control knob counterclockwise withoutapplying pressure on the armrest, then pushthe armrest down. Repeat procedure untilarmrest is at desired position. To adjust to ahigher position, lift armrest until at desiredheight then turn control knob clockwise until itstops.

7. HeadrestThe headrest can be adjusted forward orrearward, and vertically adjusted 2 inches bylowering or raising it.T05111

OP

ER

AT

ING

IN

ST

RU

CT

ION

SO

PE

RA

TIN

G I

NS

TR

UC

TIO

NS

Upd

ate

B_O

GB

02A

PU

pdat

e B

_OG

B02

AP



C2045

!!! CAUTION !!!

FOR THE BEST PROTECTION, POSITIONTHE HEADREST BEHIND YOUR HEAD AND

NOT BEHIND YOUR NECK.

SEAT BELTS

The driver's seat, guide seat and somepassenger seats are equipped with safety belts.

!!! CAUTION !!!

SEAT BELT IS TO BE USED AT ALL TIMESWHEN COACH IS IN MOTION.

T02659

Push button to release

Insert until "Click" to fasten

!!! CAUTION !!!

CHILDREN YOUNGER THAN 10 YEARSSHOULD ALWAYS TAKE PLACE ON A SEAT

WITH A SEATBACK IN FRONT OF IT.

EXTERIOR REAR-VIEWMIRRORS

The vehicle is equipped with two exterior mirrorassemblies. Both support arms can be moved toposition the mirror head close to or away from thecoach body. The head assembly can turn on thesupport arm for initial adjustment. Each mirrorhead contains a flat and a convex-type mirror.Convex mirrors give a wide angle view. Objectsviewed in convex-type rear-view mirrors appearsmaller and are actually closer than they appear.To provide good visibility in adverse weatherconditions, the mirrors are equipped with heatingelements which are activated by a switch locatedon the R.H. dashboard. The flat mirrors can beadjusted with the remote control knob on the L.H.console (under the driver's side window). Theconvex mirrors must be manually adjusted.

!!! CAUTION !!!

FOR THE BEST PROTECTION, POSITIONTHE HEADREST BEHIND YOUR HEAD AND

NOT BEHIND YOUR NECK.

SEAT BELTS

The driver's seat, guide seat and somepassenger seats are equipped with safety belts.

!!! CAUTION !!!

SEAT BELT IS TO BE USED AT ALL TIMESWHEN COACH IS IN MOTION.

!!! CAUTION !!!

CHILDREN YOUNGER THAN 10 YEARSSHOULD ALWAYS TAKE PLACE ON A SEAT

WITH A SEATBACK IN FRONT OF IT.

EXTERIOR REAR-VIEWMIRRORS

The vehicle is equipped with two exterior mirrorassemblies. Both support arms can be moved toposition the mirror head close to or away from thecoach body. The head assembly can turn on thesupport arm for initial adjustment. Each mirrorhead contains a flat and a convex-type mirror.Convex mirrors give a wide angle view. Objectsviewed in convex-type rear-view mirrors appearsmaller and are actually closer than they appear.To provide good visibility in adverse weatherconditions, the mirrors are equipped with heatingelements which are activated by a switch locatedon the R.H. dashboard. The flat mirrors can beadjusted with the remote control knob on the L.H.console (under the driver's side window). Theconvex mirrors must be manually adjusted.

T02659

Push button to release

Insert until "Click" to fasten

Update B

_OG

B02A

PU

pdate B_O

GB

02AP

OP

ER

AT

ING

INS

TR

UC

TIO

NS

OP

ER

AT

ING

INS

TR

UC

TIO

NS



C2045

C2045

To adjust the flat-type mirrors

Adjust the flat-type mirrors until the roadis in full view.

1. Select mirror to be adjusted by rotating thecontrol knob so as to have the index (5)pointing towards:

• left upper corner of dial for left side mirror• right upper corner of dial for right side mirror.

2. To adjust mirror up ordown, press on edges(2) or (4) of controlknob.

3. To adjust mirrorsideways, press onedges (1) or (3) ofcontrol knob.

You can adjust the flat-type mirrors when thebattery master switch is closed and the ignition ison.

NOTE

Manual adjustment of the flat-typemirror is not possible.

To adjust the convex-type mirrors

Adjust the convex-type mirrors manually until theside of the coach is visible.

STEERING COLUMN

The articulated steering column can be adjustedfor rake and height.

While keeping the air valvebutton (located on thefootwell, in front of your seat)depressed with your foot,push and pull steering wheeluntil desired height and rakeare obtained. Then releasebutton to relock steeringcolumn.

NOTE

The pneumatic lock-release will onlyoperate when there is sufficient

pressure in the auxiliaries air tank.

A build-in safety device ensures that the steeringcolumn can only be adjusted with the vehiclestationary.

T00084

F03737

To adjust the flat-type mirrors

Adjust the flat-type mirrors until the roadis in full view.

1. Select mirror to be adjusted by rotating thecontrol knob so as to have the index (5)pointing towards:

• left upper corner of dial for left side mirror• right upper corner of dial for right side mirror.

2. To adjust mirror up ordown, press on edges(2) or (4) of controlknob.

3. To adjust mirrorsideways, press onedges (1) or (3) ofcontrol knob.

You can adjust the flat-type mirrors when thebattery master switch is closed and the ignition ison.

NOTE

Manual adjustment of the flat-typemirror is not possible.

To adjust the convex-type mirrors

Adjust the convex-type mirrors manually until theside of the coach is visible.

STEERING COLUMN

The articulated steering column can be adjustedfor rake and height.

While keeping the air valvebutton (located on thefootwell, in front of your seat)depressed with your foot,push and pull steering wheeluntil desired height and rakeare obtained. Then releasebutton to relock steeringcolumn.

NOTE

The pneumatic lock-release will onlyoperate when there is sufficient

pressure in the auxiliaries air tank.

A build-in safety device ensures that the steeringcolumn can only be adjusted with the vehiclestationary.

T00084

F03737

OP

ER

AT

ING

IN

ST

RU

CT

ION

SO

PE

RA

TIN

G I

NS

TR

UC

TIO

NS

Upd

ate

B_O

GB

02A

PU

pdat

e B

_OG

B02

AP



C2045

STEERING COLUMNCOMBINATION SWITCH

1. Horn

2. Windshield washer

3. High beam flashing (handle springs backwhen released)

4. High/low headlight beam selector.Headlights beam changes each time thehandle is pulled upwards against springpressure

5. Turn signals

6. Wipers

0 : offJ : intermittent wipingI : slow wipingII : fast wiping

T03314

STEERING COLUMNCOMBINATION SWITCH

1. Horn

2. Windshield washer

3. High beam flashing (handle springs backwhen released)

4. High/low headlight beam selector.Headlights beam changes each time thehandle is pulled upwards against springpressure

5. Turn signals

6. Wipers

0 : offJ : intermittent wipingI : slow wipingII : fast wiping

T03314

Update B

_OG

B02A

PU

pdate B_O

GB

02AP

OP

ER

AT

ING

INS

TR

UC

TIO

NS

OP

ER

AT

ING

INS

TR

UC

TIO

NS



C2045

C2045

T05631

T05631

OP

ER

AT

ING

IN

ST

RU

CT

ION

SO

PE

RA

TIN

G I

NS

TR

UC

TIO

NS

Upd

ate

B_O

GB

02A

PU

pdat

e B

_OG

B02

AP



C2045

INSTRUMENT PANEL(NON-MULTIPLEXED VEHICLES; MODEL YEARS 2000, 2001, 2002)

1. Parking brakeemergency release push-pull valve

2. Exterior rear-view mirrorcontrol

3. Passengerscompartment climatecontrol

4. Cruise control/fast idleswitches

5. Transmission push-button selector

6. Steering columncombination switch

7. Jake Brake control(lever or rocker switch)

8. Fuel level gauge

9. Air outlet

10. Engine coolanttemperature gauge

11. Tachometer

12. Engine oil pressure gauge

13. Turbo boost gauge

14. Upper indicator light panel

15. Lower indicator light panel

16. Speedometer

17. Drive axle service brakesair-pressure gauge

18. Front axle brakes air-pressure gauge

19. Air outlet

20. Dashboard gaugesillumination rheostat

21. Master/ignition switch

22. Starter switch

23. Dashboard switchesillumination rheostat

24. Hazard warning flasherswitch

25. Entrance door control

26. Video control panel

27. Radio

28. Driver's compartmentclimate control

29. Combustion heatertimer

30. Diagnostic box

31. Luggage compartmentdoors central lockingsystem push-pull valve

32. Parking brake push-pull valve

33. Steering columnposition unlock button

34. Tag axle brakes air-pressure gauge

35. Loudspeaker

36. +12V socket

37. Combustion heateron/off switch

38. Microphone socket

INSTRUMENT PANEL(NON-MULTIPLEXED VEHICLES; MODEL YEARS 2000, 2001, 2002)







7. Jake Brake control(lever or rocker switch)

8. Fuel level gauge

9. Air outlet


11. Tachometer

12. Engine oil pressure gauge




16. Speedometer



19. Air outlet



22. Starter switch





27. Radio


29. Combustion heatertimer

30. Diagnostic box





35. Loudspeaker

36. +12V socket

37. Combustion heateron/off switch


Update B

_OG

B02A

PU

pdate B_O

GB

02AP

OP

ER

AT

ING

INS

TR

UC

TIO

NS

OP

ER

AT

ING

INS

TR

UC

TIO

NS



C2045

C2045

T06261

T06261

OP

ER

AT

ING

IN

ST

RU

CT

ION

SO

PE

RA

TIN

G I

NS

TR

UC

TIO

NS

Upd

ate

B_O

GB

02A

PU

pdat

e B

_OG

B02

AP



C2045

INSTRUMENT PANEL(NON-MULTIPLEXED VEHICLES, MODEL YEAR 2003)


2. Cup holders





7. Fuel level gauge

8. Air outlet


10. Tachometer

11. Engine oil pressuregauge




15. Speedometer



18. Air outlet



21. Starter switch





26. Radio


28. Diagnostic box





33. Loudspeaker

34. +12V socket



INSTRUMENT PANEL(NON-MULTIPLEXED VEHICLES, MODEL YEAR 2003)


2. Cup holders





7. Fuel level gauge

8. Air outlet


10. Tachometer

11. Engine oil pressuregauge




15. Speedometer



18. Air outlet



21. Starter switch





26. Radio


28. Diagnostic box





33. Loudspeaker

34. +12V socket



Update B

_OG

B02A

PU

pdate B_O

GB

02AP

OP

ER

AT

ING

INS

TR

UC

TIO

NS

OP

ER

AT

ING

INS

TR

UC

TIO

NS



C2045

C2045

T06262

T06262

OP

ER

AT

ING

IN

ST

RU

CT

ION

SO

PE

RA

TIN

G I

NS

TR

UC

TIO

NS

Upd

ate

B_O

GB

02A

PU

pdat

e B

_OG

B02

AP



C2045

INSTRUMENT PANEL (MULTIPLEXED VEHICLES)


2. Cup holders





7. Fuel level gauge

8. Air outlet

9. Speedometer

10. Indicator light panel

11. Multifunction display

12. Tachometer

13. Air outlet


15. Starter switch




19. Radio


21. Emergency switch

22. Diagnostic box


24. Parking brake push-pullvalve

25. ZF Intarder handle


27. Multifunction displaybrightness rheostat


29. Multifunction displayselection button

30. Loudspeaker



33. +12V socket

INSTRUMENT PANEL (MULTIPLEXED VEHICLES)


2. Cup holders





7. Fuel level gauge

8. Air outlet

9. Speedometer

10. Indicator light panel


12. Tachometer

13. Air outlet


15. Starter switch




19. Radio


21. Emergency switch

22. Diagnostic box


24. Parking brake push-pullvalve

25. ZF Intarder handle


27. Multifunction displaybrightness rheostat


29. Multifunction displayselection button

30. Loudspeaker



33. +12V socket

Update B

_OG

B02A

PU

pdate B_O

GB

02AP

OP

ER

AT

ING

INS

TR

UC

TIO

NS

OP

ER

AT

ING

INS

TR

UC

TIO

NS



C2045

C2045

INSTRUMENT PANEL SWITCHES

Master/ignition switch

Off: batteries disconnectedFirst position: batteriesconnectedSecond position: ignition on

Drivers compartment lightingswitch

Depressing this rocker switch to thefirst position will turn on the ceilinglights above the driver's seat andstepwell. Depressing this switch to thesecond position will turn on both theceiling lights above the driver's seatand stepwell and the frontmost aislefluorescent lamp.

Interior lighting switch

Depressing this rocker switch to thefirst position will turn on the aisle nightlights and the parcel racks night lightsand power the passenger's readinglight circuit to enable passengers tooperate their personal reading lamps.Depressing this switch to the secondposition will turn on the aislefluorescent lights (except the frontmostone) and the reading lights.

INSTRUMENT PANEL SWITCHES

Master/ignition switch

Off: batteries disconnectedFirst position: batteriesconnectedSecond position: ignition on

Drivers compartment lightingswitch

Depressing this rocker switch to thefirst position will turn on the ceilinglights above the driver's seat andstepwell. Depressing this switch to thesecond position will turn on both theceiling lights above the driver's seatand stepwell and the frontmost aislefluorescent lamp.

Interior lighting switch

Depressing this rocker switch to thefirst position will turn on the aisle nightlights and the parcel racks night lightsand power the passenger's readinglight circuit to enable passengers tooperate their personal reading lamps.Depressing this switch to the secondposition will turn on the aislefluorescent lights (except the frontmostone) and the reading lights.

Exterior lighting switch

Depressing this rocker switch to thefirst position will turn on the clearance,identification and marker lights.Depressing the switch to the secondposition will turn on the clearance,identification and marker lights and theheadlights (switching the headlightsfrom low beam to high beam is with thecombination switch on the steeringcolumn)

MASTER SWITCH

OFF

IGNITION

MASTER

MASTER SWITCH

OFF

IGNITION

MASTER

Exterior lighting switch

Depressing this rocker switch to thefirst position will turn on the clearance,identification and marker lights.Depressing the switch to the secondposition will turn on the clearance,identification and marker lights and theheadlights (switching the headlightsfrom low beam to high beam is with thecombination switch on the steeringcolumn)

OP

ER

AT

ING

IN

ST

RU

CT

ION

SO

PE

RA

TIN

G I

NS

TR

UC

TIO

NS

Upd

ate

B_O

GB

02A

PU

pdat

e B

_OG

B02

AP



C2045

Luggage compartment lights

Depressing this rocker switch will turnon the luggage compartment lights.

Coach front kneeling system

Depressing this rocker switch willactivate the front kneeling system.Refer to "Front kneeling system" inSection 2B.

Coach rear raise system

The rear raise system is activated aslong as this spring-loaded switch isdepressed. Refer to "Rear raisesystem" in Section 2B.

Coach raise/lower system (optional)

Depressing the lower part of the rockerswitch will activate the suspensionlowering system. Depressing the upperpart of the rocker switch will activatethe suspension raising system. Referto "Raise/lower system" in Section 2B.

Tag axle unloading (optional)

Depressing this rocker switch (spring-loaded switch on multiplexed vehicles)will activate the tag axle unloadingsystem. Refer to "Tag axle unloading"in Section 2B.

Climate control "on/off"

Refer to "Climate control" in Section 3.

FRESH AIROPEN

CLOSEDRECIRC. AIR

Passengers' compartmentrecirculated air intake (on the L.H.console, under the driver's window)


Luggage compartment lights

Depressing this rocker switch will turnon the luggage compartment lights.

Coach front kneeling system

Depressing this rocker switch willactivate the front kneeling system.Refer to "Front kneeling system" inSection 2B.

Coach rear raise system

The rear raise system is activated aslong as this spring-loaded switch isdepressed. Refer to "Rear raisesystem" in Section 2B.

Coach raise/lower system (optional)

Depressing the lower part of the rockerswitch will activate the suspensionlowering system. Depressing the upperpart of the rocker switch will activatethe suspension raising system. Referto "Raise/lower system" in Section 2B.

Tag axle unloading (optional)

Depressing this rocker switch (spring-loaded switch on multiplexed vehicles)will activate the tag axle unloadingsystem. Refer to "Tag axle unloading"in Section 2B.

Climate control "on/off"


Passengers' compartmentrecirculated air intake (on the L.H.console, under the driver's window)


FRESH AIROPEN

CLOSEDRECIRC. AIR

Update B

_OG

B02A

PU

pdate B_O

GB

02AP

OP

ER

AT

ING

INS

TR

UC

TIO

NS

OP

ER

AT

ING

INS

TR

UC

TIO

NS



C2045

C2045

FRESH AIROPEN

CLOSEDRECIRC. AIR

Combustion heater "on/off" switch


L.H.-switch: first blower of driver'scompartment HVAC unit

This switch controls the velocity of theair that is sent to the air outlets in thedashboard and to the driver's footwell.This is a three position switch: off, half,full.

R.H.-switch: second blower ofdriver's compartment HVAC unit

This switch controls the velocity of theair that is sent to the windshield. Thisis a three position switch: off, half, full.

Driver's compartment HVAC unitrecirculated air intake(on R.H. console)

Front fog lights

Depress this rocker switch to turn onthe fog lights.

Combustion heater "on/off" switch


L.H.-switch: first blower of driver'scompartment HVAC unit

This switch controls the velocity of theair that is sent to the air outlets in thedashboard and to the driver's footwell.This is a three position switch: off, half,full.

R.H.-switch: second blower ofdriver's compartment HVAC unit

This switch controls the velocity of theair that is sent to the windshield. Thisis a three position switch: off, half, full.

Driver's compartment HVAC unitrecirculated air intake(on R.H. console)

FRESH AIROPEN

CLOSEDRECIRC. AIR

Front fog lights

Depress this rocker switch to turn onthe fog lights.

OP

ER

AT

ING

IN

ST

RU

CT

ION

SO

PE

RA

TIN

G I

NS

TR

UC

TIO

NS

Upd

ate

B_O

GB

02A

PU

pdat

e B

_OG

B02

AP



C2045

OVERRIDE

PROTECTION

DIA

Docking lights

The coach is equipped with fourdocking lights (two at the front and twoat the rear). Depress this rocker switchto power the docking lights system.The front docking lights illuminatetogether with the signal flashers toincrease lateral visibility while turning.The rear lights illuminate automaticallywhen the reverse (R) range is selectedto increase visibility while backing-upor docking the coach. The system isswitched off automatically when thevehicle speed reaches or exceeds10 mph.

Side mirror heating

Refer to "Exterior rear-view mirrors"earlier in this Section.

Deep snow and mud switch

Refer to "Automatic Traction Control(ASR)" in Section 2B.

Cummins and Caterpillar engines:diagnostic switch (with lockingdevice)

Refer to "An Engine Warning Light isilluminated" in Section 2C.

Cummins engine: stop engineoverride

Refer to "Warning and IndicatorLights" further in this Section.

Docking lights

The coach is equipped with fourdocking lights (two at the front and twoat the rear). Depress this rocker switchto power the docking lights system.The front docking lights illuminatetogether with the signal flashers toincrease lateral visibility while turning.The rear lights illuminate automaticallywhen the reverse (R) range is selectedto increase visibility while backing-upor docking the coach. The system isswitched off automatically when thevehicle speed reaches or exceeds10 mph.

Side mirror heating

Refer to "Exterior rear-view mirrors"earlier in this Section.


Refer to "Automatic Traction Control(ASR)" in Section 2B.

Cummins and Caterpillar engines:diagnostic switch (with lockingdevice)

Refer to "An Engine Warning Light isilluminated" in Section 2C.

Cummins engine: stop engineoverride

Refer to "Warning and IndicatorLights" further in this Section.

OVERRIDE

PROTECTION

DIA

Update B

_OG

B02A

PU

pdate B_O

GB

02AP

OP

ER

AT

ING

INS

TR

UC

TIO

NS

OP

ER

AT

ING

INS

TR

UC

TIO

NS



C2045

C2045

Detroit Diesel engine:stop engine override anddiagnostic switch (with lockingdevice)

For stop engine override: refer to"Warning and Indicator Lights"further in this Section.

For diagnostic switch: refer to "AnEngine Warning Light isilluminated" in Section 2C.

OVERRIDE

PROTECTION

DIA

OFF RES/ACCEL

ON SET/COASTCRUISE CONTROL

LIFT POWER

Cruise control/fast idle

Refer to "Cruise control/fastidle" in Section 2B.

Warning light test button (only onnon-multiplexed vehicles)

Jake brake

Refer to "Jake Brake" in Section 2B.

ZF intarder: foot controldisconnect switch

Refer to "ZF Intarder" in Section 6.

Wheelchair lift release

With the parking brake applied,depressing this rocker switch willenergize the wheelchair lift controlpanel behind the lift door.Simultaneously the door brake isactivated.

Entrance door control

Refer to "Entrance door" inSection 2B.

Detroit Diesel engine:stop engine override anddiagnostic switch (with lockingdevice)

For stop engine override: refer to"Warning and Indicator Lights"further in this Section.

For diagnostic switch: refer to "AnEngine Warning Light is illuminated"in Section 2C.

Cruise control/fast idle

Refer to "Cruise control/fastidle" in Section 2B.

Warning light test button (only onnon-multiplexed vehicles)

Jake brake

Refer to "Jake Brake" in Section 2B.

ZF intarder: foot controldisconnect switch



With the parking brake applied,depressing this rocker switch willenergize the wheelchair lift controlpanel behind the lift door.Simultaneously the door brake isactivated.

Entrance door control

Refer to "Entrance door" inSection 2B.

OVERRIDE

PROTECTION

DIA

OFF RES/ACCEL

ON SET/COAST

CRUISE CONTROL

LIFT POWER

OP

ER

AT

ING

IN

ST

RU

CT

ION

SO

PE

RA

TIN

G I

NS

TR

UC

TIO

NS

Upd

ate

B_O

GB

02A

PU

pdat

e B

_OG

B02

AP



C2045

START

Hazard warning flasher

Starter switch

The engine start switch is amomentary-on type switch and mustbe held in the depressed position toengage the starter. When released,switch will return to normal position.

Emergency switch (only onmultiplexed vehicles)

Use this switch in case of danger (firehazard). This switch instantly cuts offthe engine and the batteries at thesame time. The switch is provided witha safety cover (sealed).

Hazard warning flasher

START

Starter switch

The engine start switch is amomentary-on type switch and mustbe held in the depressed position toengage the starter. When released,switch will return to normal position.

Emergency switch (only onmultiplexed vehicles)

Use this switch in case of danger (firehazard). This switch instantly cuts offthe engine and the batteries at thesame time. The switch is providedwith a safety cover (sealed).

Passengers emergency buttonsdisconnect switch

Pressing down this rocker switch willdisconnect the electrical circuit of thepassengers emergency buttons.

Passengers emergency buttonsdisconnect switch

Pressing down this rocker switch willdisconnect the electrical circuit of thepassengers emergency buttons.

Update B

_OG

B02A

PU

pdate B_O

GB

02AP

OP

ER

AT

ING

INS

TR

UC

TIO

NS

OP

ER

AT

ING

INS

TR

UC

TIO

NS



C2045

C2045

WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS(NON-MULTIPLEXED VEHICLES)

Turn signal indicator light (green)

Flashes when the turn signals areactivated.

Air pressure (red)

Lights when pressure in any of the airtanks is below safety level. A warningbuzzer will sound.

!!! CAUTION !!!

DO NOT DRIVE WITH THE "AIRPRESSURE" LIGHT ON.

Air pressure in front wheel brakestank (red)

Lights when pressure in front wheelbrakes tank is below safety level.

Air pressure in drive wheel brakestank (red)

Lights when pressure in drive wheelbrakes tank is below safety level.

Air pressure in tag wheel brakestank (red)

Lights when pressure in tag wheelbrakes tank is below safety level.

High beam indicator light (blue)

Lights when the high beams areselected. High beams are selected withthe steering column combination switch.

Stop button (red)

Lights when passenger presses stopbutton.

WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS(NON-MULTIPLEXED VEHICLES)



Air pressure (red)

Lights when pressure in any of the airtanks is below safety level. A warningbuzzer will sound.

!!! CAUTION !!!

DO NOT DRIVE WITH THE "AIRPRESSURE" LIGHT ON.

Air pressure in front wheel brakestank (red)

Lights when pressure in front wheelbrakes tank is below safety level.

Air pressure in drive wheel brakestank (red)

Lights when pressure in drive wheelbrakes tank is below safety level.

Air pressure in tag wheel brakestank (red)

Lights when pressure in tag wheelbrakes tank is below safety level.



Stop button (red)

Lights when passenger presses stopbutton.

OP

ER

AT

ING

IN

ST

RU

CT

ION

SO

PE

RA

TIN

G I

NS

TR

UC

TIO

NS

Upd

ate

B_O

GB

02A

PU

pdat

e B

_OG

B02

AP



C2045

Parking brake (red)

Comes on when the parking brake isapplied regardless of the position of theparking brake control valve.

Suspension raise and rear raisesystem (yellow)

Lights when the suspension raise or rearraise system is energized.

Transmission fluid temperature (red)

Lights when the transmission fluidtemperature rises to danger level.

Entrance door (red)

Lights when the entrance door is open.

Alternator No. 1 (red)

If this message comes on during normaldriving, a fault has occurred in battery

charging system of alternator No. 1. Use of thestarter, HVAC system or lights in thesecircumstances will rapidly discharge the batteries.Also comes on when the battery equalizer is notworking properly.

Suspension lower and front kneelingsystem (yellow)

Lights when the suspension lower orfront kneeling system is energized.

Parking brake (red)


Suspension raise and rear raisesystem (yellow)

Lights when the suspension raise or rearraise system is energized.

Transmission fluid temperature (red)

Lights when the transmission fluidtemperature rises to danger level.

Entrance door (red)

Lights when the entrance door is open.

Alternator No. 1 (red)

If this message comes on during normaldriving, a fault has occurred in battery

charging system of alternator No. 1. Use of thestarter, HVAC system or lights in thesecircumstances will rapidly discharge the batteries.Also comes on when the battery equalizer is notworking properly.

Suspension lower and front kneelingsystem (yellow)

Lights when the suspension lower orfront kneeling system is energized.

Update B

_OG

B02A

PU

pdate B_O

GB

02AP

OP

ER

AT

ING

INS

TR

UC

TIO

NS

OP

ER

AT

ING

INS

TR

UC

TIO

NS



C2045

C2045

Fire (red)

Comes on when there is a fire or anunusually high heat condition in theengine or combustion heatercompartment.

!!! CAUTION !!!

IF LIGHT COMES ON, STOP COACH ASQUICKLY AS POSSIBLE AND DIRECTPASSENGERS TO LEAVE THE COACH

AND MOVE TO A POINT OF SAFETY AWAYFROM THE COACH. DO NOT OPERATE

THE COACH UNTIL YOU ARE SURE THEREIS NO FIRE AND/OR THE CAUSE FORWARNING HAS BEEN DETERMINED

AND CORRECTED.

Alternator No.2 (red)

Lights when the second alternator is notcharging the batteries.

AC failure (yellow)

Lights to indicate a problem in the ACsystem.

WTB500- transmission (yellow)

This should light with ignition on andengine not running. If it does not comeon,request service immediately.

Illumination of this light, accompanied by eightseconds of short beeps from the push-buttonselector, indicates that shifts are being restricted.Operation can continue in order to reach serviceassistance. Shift selector requests may notrespond, since the transmission is subject tooperating limitations, i.e. upshifts and downshiftsmay be restricted. Direction changes will notoccur.

Waste water level (green)

Lights when the waste water tank isnearly full.

Combustion heater (green)

Lights when the combustion heater isstandby.

ACFAILURE

DONOT

SHIFT

Fire (red)

Comes on when there is a fire or anunusually high heat condition in theengine or combustion heatercompartment.

!!! CAUTION !!!

IF LIGHT COMES ON, STOP COACH ASQUICKLY AS POSSIBLE AND DIRECTPASSENGERS TO LEAVE THE COACH

AND MOVE TO A POINT OF SAFETY AWAYFROM THE COACH. DO NOT OPERATE

THE COACH UNTIL YOU ARE SURE THEREIS NO FIRE AND/OR THE CAUSE FORWARNING HAS BEEN DETERMINED

AND CORRECTED.

Alternator No.2 (red)

Lights when the second alternator is notcharging the batteries.

AC failure (yellow)

Lights to indicate a problem in the ACsystem.

WTB500-transmission (yellow)

This should light with ignition on andengine not running. If it does not comeon,request service immediately.

Illumination of this light, accompanied by eightseconds of short beeps from the push-buttonselector, indicates that shifts are being restricted.Operation can continue in order to reach serviceassistance. Shift selector requests may notrespond, since the transmission is subject tooperating limitations, i.e. upshifts and downshiftsmay be restricted. Direction changes will notoccur.

Waste water level (green)

Lights when the waste water tank isnearly full.

Combustion heater (green)


ACFAILURE

DONOT

SHIFT

OP

ER

AT

ING

IN

ST

RU

CT

ION

SO

PE

RA

TIN

G I

NS

TR

UC

TIO

NS

Upd

ate

B_O

GB

02A

PU

pdat

e B

_OG

B02

AP



C2045

Anti-lock braking system (yellow)

This light works as follows with ignitionon:

• Light comes on momentarily, then goes out.ABS SYSTEM IS O.K.

• Light does not disappear at ignition:

- When coach is driven at speeds above4 mph, message will disappear.ABS SYSTEM IS O.K.

- If light does not disappear at speeds above 4mph, the Electronic Control Unit of the systemsenses a fault in the ABS system.

If the Electronic Control Unit senses a fault duringnormal coach operation, the ABS light will comeon and stay on.

Automatic traction control (yellow)

Lights when the drive wheels spin duringacceleration, indicating ASR is active.

The light will go out when the drive wheels stopspinning.

Brake lining wear (yellow)

Lights when brake pads are worn to thelimit. Should this happen, there are only

a few hundred miles of lining left and animmediate brake pad change should be made.

Master switch (green)

Lights when the battery master switch ison, but it will only do so when the engineis not running.

Jake brake/hydraulic retarder(green)

Comes on when the Jake brake/hydraulic retarder is on.

Tag axle unloading (green)

Comes on when the tag axle isunloaded.


Comes on when the wheelchair liftsystem is released.

ASR

Anti-lock braking system (yellow)

This light works as follows with ignitionon:

• Light comes on momentarily, then goes out.ABS SYSTEM IS O.K.

• Light does not disappear at ignition:

- When coach is driven at speeds above4 mph, message will disappear.ABS SYSTEM IS O.K.

- If light does not disappear at speeds above 4mph, the Electronic Control Unit of the systemsenses a fault in the ABS system.

If the Electronic Control Unit senses a fault duringnormal coach operation, the ABS light will comeon and stay on.

Automatic traction control (yellow)

Lights when the drive wheels spinduring acceleration, indicating ASR is

active. The light will go out when the drive wheelsstop spinning.

Brake lining wear (yellow)

Lights when brake pads are worn to thelimit. Should this happen, there are only

a few hundred miles of lining left and animmediate brake pad change should be made.

Master switch (green)

Lights when the battery master switch ison, but it will only do so when the engineis not running.

Jake brake/hydraulic retarder(green)

Comes on when the Jake brake/hydraulic retarder is on.

Tag axle unloading (green)



Comes on when the wheelchair liftsystem is released.

ASR

Update B

_OG

B02A

PU

pdate B_O

GB

02AP

OP

ER

AT

ING

INS

TR

UC

TIO

NS

OP

ER

AT

ING

INS

TR

UC

TIO

NS



C2045

C2045

ENGINE WARNING LIGHTS

Cummins ISM01 engine

These three lights should illuminate with theignition on. They should stop illuminating after afew seconds. The light will remain off until a faultcode is registered. If one of the lights remains on,an active fault code exists.

Comes on at the occurrence of any ofthe following out-of-limit conditions:

• coolant temperature• coolant level• oil temperature• oil pressure• air intake manifold temperature

If this light illuminates while driving, thevehicle can be safely driven but the faultmust be corrected as soon as possible.

This light indicates a major systemproblem and the vehicle should bestopped as soon as safely possible.This should be considered an

emergency. The vehicle must remain parked aslong as the fault exists.

The engine protection system logs separate faultcodes for out-of-range conditions associated withany of the following sensors:


This system will activate an engine warning lightwhen an out-of-range condition occurs. The lampwill remain on as long as the fault exists, andengine power and speed will gradually be reduced.If the out-of-range conditions continue, the lightwill start to flash or blink. A 30 second shutdown(= stepped, powerdown sequence until it shutsdown completely) sequence will begin.Momentarily depress the "Protection-override"dashswitch to override the emergency shutdownduring a 30 second period. To obtain asubsequent override of 30 seconds, the switchmust be recycled.

!!! CAUTION !!!

THE STOP ENGINE OVERRIDE MUST BEUSED ONLY IN EMERGENCY, SUCH AS

STOPENGINE

ENGINEWARNING

ENGINEMAINT

ENGINE WARNING LIGHTS


These three lights should illuminate with theignition on. They should stop illuminating after afew seconds. The light will remain off until a faultcode is registered. If one of the lights remains on,an active fault code exists.

Comes on at the occurrence of any ofthe following out-of-limit conditions:


If this light illuminates while driving, thevehicle can be safely driven but the faultmust be corrected as soon as possible.



The engine protection system logs separate faultcodes for out-of-range conditions associated withany of the following sensors:


This system will activate an engine warning lightwhen an out-of-range condition occurs. The lampwill remain on as long as the fault exists, andengine power and speed will gradually be reduced.If the out-of-range conditions continue, the lightwill start to flash or blink. A 30 second shutdown(= stepped, powerdown sequence until it shutsdown completely) sequence will begin.Momentarily depress the "Protection-override"dashswitch to override the emergency shutdownduring a 30 second period. To obtain asubsequent override of 30 seconds, the switchmust be recycled.

!!! CAUTION !!!


STOPENGINE

ENGINEWARNING

ENGINEMAINT

OP

ER

AT

ING

IN

ST

RU

CT

ION

SO

PE

RA

TIN

G I

NS

TR

UC

TIO

NS

Upd

ate

B_O

GB

02A

PU

pdat

e B

_OG

B02

AP



C2045

MOVING THE VEHICLE OUT OF TRAFFIC.EXCESSIVE USE COULD CAUSE SEVERE

ENGINE DAMAGE.


Both lights should illuminate with the ignition on.They should stop illuminating after a few seconds.The light will remain off until a fault code isregistered. If one of the lights remains on, anactive fault code exists.

Should this light come on for anyreason, the coach can still be operatedand you can proceed to yourdestination. This condition should bereported at the first available opportunity.



The engine is equipped with an engine protectionsystem. This system monitors critical engine

temperatures and pressures, and it will logdiagnostic faults if an over or under normaloperation condition occurs. If an out-of-rangecondition exists, and an engine derate action isinitiated, the operator will be alerted by an enginewarning lamp. If the out-of-range conditionscontinue, the light will start to flash or blink. A 30second shutdown (= stepped, powerdownsequence until it shuts down completely)sequence will begin. Momentarily depress the"Protection-override" dashswitch to override theemergency shutdown during a 30 second period.To obtain a subsequent override of 30 seconds,the switch must be recycled.

!!! CAUTION !!!



ENGINE DAMAGE.

ENGINEWARNING

STOPENGINE


ENGINE DAMAGE.


Both lights should illuminate with the ignition on.They should stop illuminating after a few seconds.The light will remain off until a fault code isregistered. If one of the lights remains on, anactive fault code exists.

Should this light come on for anyreason, the coach can still be operatedand you can proceed to yourdestination. This condition should bereported at the first available opportunity.



The engine is equipped with an engine protectionsystem. This system monitors critical engine

temperatures and pressures, and it will logdiagnostic faults if an over or under normaloperation condition occurs. If an out-of-rangecondition exists, and an engine derate action isinitiated, the operator will be alerted by an enginewarning lamp. If the out-of-range conditionscontinue, the light will start to flash or blink. A 30second shutdown (= stepped, powerdownsequence until it shuts down completely)sequence will begin. Momentarily depress the"Protection-override" dashswitch to override theemergency shutdown during a 30 second period.To obtain a subsequent override of 30 seconds,the switch must be recycled.

!!! CAUTION !!!



ENGINE DAMAGE.

ENGINEWARNING

STOPENGINE

Update B

_OG

B02A

PU

pdate B_O

GB

02AP

OP

ER

AT

ING

INS

TR

UC

TIO

NS

OP

ER

AT

ING

INS

TR

UC

TIO

NS



C2045

C2045

Detroit Diesel engine

Both lights will come on if ignition is switched on.This is the result of the DDEC computerdiagnosing the system to ensure everything isfunctional, including the light bulbs of both warninglights. If everything is O.K., both lights will go outin approx. 5 seconds.

NOTE

IF THE WARNING LIGHTS STAY ON,CONSULT A DDEC TECHNICIAN. OPERATING

THE ENGINE UNDER THESECIRCUMSTANCES MAY RESULT

IN ENGINE DAMAGE.

Should this light come on for anyreason, the coach can still beoperated and you can proceed to yourdestination. This condition should be

reported to a DDEC technician as soon aspossible.

When this light comes on, the DDECcomputer has detected a majormalfunction in the engine that requiresimmediate attention. It is your

responsibility to shut down the engine to avoidserious damage. The conditions that will causethe "Stop Engine" light to come on are:

• high coolant temperature• low coolant level• high oil temperature• low oil pressure

If the "Stop Engine" light illuminates, a 30 secondshutdown (= stepped, powerdown sequence untilit shuts down completely) sequence will begin.

Momentarily depress the "DIA" dashboard switchto override the emergency shutdown during a 30second period. To obtain a subsequent override,the switch must be recycled after 15 to 20seconds.

NOTE

HOLDING DOWN THE STOP ENGINEOVERRIDE SWITCH WILL NOT PREVENT

THE ENGINE SHUTDOWN SEQUENCE. YOUMUST CONTINUE TO RESET THE

AUTOMATIC SHUTDOWN SYSTEM BYPRESSING THE STOP ENGINE OVERRIDE

SWITCH AT INTERVALS OF APPROX. 15 TO20 SECONDS.

STOPENGINE

CHECKENGINE


Both lights will come on if ignition is switched on.This is the result of the DDEC computerdiagnosing the system to ensure everything isfunctional, including the light bulbs of both warninglights. If everything is O.K., both lights will go outin approx. 5 seconds.

NOTE

IF THE WARNING LIGHTS STAY ON,CONSULT A DDEC TECHNICIAN. OPERATING

THE ENGINE UNDER THESECIRCUMSTANCES MAY RESULT

IN ENGINE DAMAGE.

Should this light come on for anyreason, the coach can still beoperated and you can proceed to yourdestination. This condition should be

reported to a DDEC technician as soon aspossible.

When this light comes on, the DDECcomputer has detected a majormalfunction in the engine that requiresimmediate attention. It is your

responsibility to shut down the engine to avoidserious damage. The conditions that will causethe "Stop Engine" light to come on are:

• high coolant temperature• low coolant level• high oil temperature• low oil pressure

If the "Stop Engine" light illuminates, a 30 secondshutdown (= stepped, powerdown sequence untilit shuts down completely) sequence will begin.

Momentarily depress the "DIA" dashboard switchto override the emergency shutdown during a 30second period. To obtain a subsequent override,the switch must be recycled after 15 to 20seconds.

NOTE

HOLDING DOWN THE STOP ENGINEOVERRIDE SWITCH WILL NOT PREVENT

THE ENGINE SHUTDOWN SEQUENCE. YOUMUST CONTINUE TO RESET THE

AUTOMATIC SHUTDOWN SYSTEM BYPRESSING THE STOP ENGINE OVERRIDE

SWITCH AT INTERVALS OF APPROX. 15 TO20 SECONDS.

STOPENGINE

CHECKENGINE

OP

ER

AT

ING

IN

ST

RU

CT

ION

SO

PE

RA

TIN

G I

NS

TR

UC

TIO

NS

Upd

ate

B_O

GB

02A

PU

pdat

e B

_OG

B02

AP



C2045

The ECM will record the number of times theoverride is activated after a fault has occurred.

!!! CAUTION !!!

THE STOP ENGINE OVERRIDE MUST BEUSED ONLY IN EMERGENCY, SUCH ASMOVING THE COACH OUT OF TRAFFIC.

EXCESSIVE USE COULD CAUSESEVERE ENGINE DAMAGE.

Caterpillar

The "ENGINE WARNING" light will come on for 5seconds if ignition is switched on. If the lamp failsto illuminate, notify your authorized Caterpillardealer. If the lamp continues to stay on, the ECMhas detected a problem in the system.

This lamp indicates an activediagnostic code. The coach can stillbe operated and you can proceed toyour destination. This conditionshould be reported at the firstopportunity.

When this light comes on, the ECMhas detected a major malfunction inthe engine that requires immediateattention. It is your responsibility to

shut down the engine to avoid serious damage.The conditions that will cause the "Stop Engine"light to come on are:

• high coolant temperature• low coolant level• high inlet air temperature• low oil pressure.

In some cases the engine protection system willlimit vehicle speed, engine power and engine speed.This is indicating by the flashing of the "STOP

ENGINE" light.

When the engine is fully derated, the engine poweris limited to 160 hp. During a low oil pressurecondition, the engine can be limited to 1350 rpm.

STOPENGINE

ENGINEWARNING

The ECM will record the number of times theoverride is activated after a fault has occurred.

!!! CAUTION !!!

THE STOP ENGINE OVERRIDE MUST BEUSED ONLY IN EMERGENCY, SUCH ASMOVING THE COACH OUT OF TRAFFIC.

EXCESSIVE USE COULD CAUSESEVERE ENGINE DAMAGE.

Caterpillar

The "ENGINE WARNING" light will come on for 5seconds if ignition is switched on. If the lamp failsto illuminate, notify your authorized Caterpillardealer. If the lamp continues to stay on, the ECMhas detected a problem in the system.

This lamp indicates an activediagnostic code. The coach can stillbe operated and you can proceed toyour destination. This conditionshould be reported at the firstopportunity.

When this light comes on, the ECMhas detected a major malfunction inthe engine that requires immediateattention. It is your responsibility to

shut down the engine to avoid serious damage.The conditions that will cause the "Stop Engine"light to come on are:

• high coolant temperature• low coolant level• high inlet air temperature• low oil pressure.

In some cases the engine protection system willlimit vehicle speed, engine power and engine speed.This is indicating by the flashing of the "STOP

ENGINE" light.

When the engine is fully derated, the engine poweris limited to 160 hp. During a low oil pressurecondition, the engine can be limited to 1350 rpm.

STOPENGINE

ENGINEWARNING

Update B

_OG

B02A

PU

pdate B_O

GB

02AP

OP

ER

AT

ING

INS

TR

UC

TIO

NS

OP

ER

AT

ING

INS

TR

UC

TIO

NS



C2045

C2045

WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS(MULTIPLEXED VEHICLES)

Big red light on indicator light panel

If this light illuminates during vehicle drive, thismeans that a major problem is detected. Stop thevehicle as soon as safely possible and call fortechnical assistance. The problem can beidentified on the multifunction display.

Big yellow light on indicator light panel

The illumination of the big yellow light means thata minor problem is detected. The situation is notconsidered an emergency, but the vehicle shouldbe serviced to solve the problem. The problem canbe identified on the multifunction display.

Parking brake (red)

Not used.





Door open indicator light (red)

Lights when the entrance door or the liftdoor is open.

AC failure (red)

Comes on to indicate a problem in theAC system.

WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS(MULTIPLEXED VEHICLES)

Big red light on indicator light panel

If this light illuminates during vehicle drive, thismeans that a major problem is detected. Stop thevehicle as soon as safely possible and call fortechnical assistance. The problem can beidentified on the multifunction display.

Big yellow light on indicator light panel

The illumination of the big yellow light means thata minor problem is detected. The situation is notconsidered an emergency, but the vehicle shouldbe serviced to solve the problem. The problem canbe identified on the multifunction display.

Parking brake (red)

Not used.

ACFAILURE





Door open indicator light (red)

Lights when the entrance door or the liftdoor is open.

AC failure (red)

Comes on to indicate a problem in theAC system.

ACFAILURE

OP

ER

AT

ING

IN

ST

RU

CT

ION

SO

PE

RA

TIN

G I

NS

TR

UC

TIO

NS

Upd

ate

B_O

GB

02A

PU

pdat

e B

_OG

B02

AP



C2045

MESSAGES ON MULTIFUNCTION DISPLAY(MULTIPLEXED VEHICLES ONLY)

Fuel level low

Jake brake

Comes on when the Jake brake or ZFIntarder is on.

Combustion heater standby

Comes on when the combustion heateris standby.

Combustion heater burneroperative

Comes on when the burner of thecombustion heater is operative.

Wheelchair lift released

Lights when the wheelchair lift system isreleased.

Parking brake


Multiplex system failure

Comes on when a node output isinterrupted or shorted

Tag axle unloading


Battery voltage low

Comes on when the battery voltage islow with engine running.

Multiplex communication failure

Comes on when there is a multiplexcommunication failure.

Starter motor

Starter selection switch in enginecompartment in the REAR STARTposition.

MESSAGES ON MULTIFUNCTION DISPLAY(MULTIPLEXED VEHICLES ONLY)

Fuel level low

Jake brake

Comes on when the Jake brake or ZFIntarder is on.

Combustion heater standby

Comes on when the combustion heateris standby.

Combustion heater burneroperative

Comes on when the burner of thecombustion heater is operative.

Wheelchair lift released

Lights when the wheelchair lift system isreleased.

Parking brake


Multiplex system failure

Comes on when a node output isinterrupted or shorted

Tag axle unloading


Battery voltage low

Comes on when the battery voltage islow with engine running.

Multiplex communication failure

Comes on when there is a multiplexcommunication failure.

Starter motor

Starter selection switch in enginecompartment in the REAR STARTposition.

Update B

_OG

B02A

PU

pdate B_O

GB

02AP

OP

ER

AT

ING

INS

TR

UC

TIO

NS

OP

ER

AT

ING

INS

TR

UC

TIO

NS



C2045

C2045

Suspension front kneeling system

Comes on when the front kneelingsystem is energized.

Suspension rear raise system

Comes on when the suspension rearraise system is energized.

Suspension raise system

Comes on when the suspension raisesystem is energized.

Suspension lower system

Comes on when the suspension lowersystem is energized.

Anti-lock braking system

This message works as follows withignition on:

• Message comes on momentarily, then goesout. ABS SYSTEM IS OK.

• Message does not disappear at ignition:

- When vehicle is driven at speeds above 4mph, message will disappear. ABS SYSTEMIS OK.

- If message does not disappear at speedsabove 4 mph, the Electronic Control Unit ofthe system senses a fault in the ABSsystem.

If the Electronic ControlUnit senses a fault duringnormal vehicle operation, the ABS message willcome on and stay on.

Automatic traction control

Comes on when the drive wheels spinduring acceleration, indicating ASR isactive. The message will disappearwhen the drive wheels stop spinning.

Suspension front kneeling system

Comes on when the front kneelingsystem is energized.

Suspension rear raise system

Comes on when the suspension rearraise system is energized.

Suspension raise system

Comes on when the suspension raisesystem is energized.

Suspension lower system

Comes on when the suspension lowersystem is energized.

Anti-lock braking system

This message works as follows withignition on:

• Message comes on momentarily, then goesout. ABS SYSTEM IS OK.

• Message does not disappear at ignition:

- When vehicle is driven at speeds above 4mph, message will disappear. ABS SYSTEMIS OK.

- If message does not disappear at speedsabove 4 mph, the Electronic Control Unit ofthe system senses a fault in the ABSsystem.

If the Electronic ControlUnit senses a fault duringnormal vehicle operation, the ABS message willcome on and stay on.

Automatic traction control

Comes on when the drive wheels spinduring acceleration, indicating ASR isactive. The message will disappearwhen the drive wheels stop spinning.

OP

ER

AT

ING

IN

ST

RU

CT

ION

SO

PE

RA

TIN

G I

NS

TR

UC

TIO

NS

Upd

ate

B_O

GB

02A

PU

pdat

e B

_OG

B02

AP



C2045

Transmission fluid temperature

Comes on when the transmission fluidtemperature rises to danger level.

Emergency call

Comes on when someone pushes anemergency button.

Air pressure

Comes on when air pressure is belowsafety level.

!!! CAUTION !!!

DO NOT DRIVE WITH THE "AIRPRESSURE" MESSAGE ON.

Brake lining wear

Comes on each time the brake pedal isdepressed when brake pads on one ofthe axles are almost worn to the limit. Ifthe brake pads are worn to the limit, the

message will come on continuously.Should this happen, there are only afew hundred miles of lining left and animmediate brake pad change shouldbe made.On the display also appears on whichwheel the brake pads are worn.Example: "AXLE 1 LHS".

Alternator No. 1 failure

If this message comes on duringnormal driving, a fault has occurred inbattery charging system of alternatorNo. 1. Use of the starter, heating/ventilation or lights in thesecircumstances will rapidly dischargethe batteries.


If this message comes on duringnormal driving, a fault has occurred inbattery charging system of alternatorNo. 2.

Transmission fluid temperature

Comes on when the transmission fluidtemperature rises to danger level.

Emergency call

Comes on when someone pushes anemergency button.

Air pressure

Comes on when air pressure is belowsafety level.

!!! CAUTION !!!

DO NOT DRIVE WITH THE "AIRPRESSURE" MESSAGE ON.

Brake lining wear

Comes on each time the brake pedal isdepressed when brake pads on one ofthe axles are almost worn to the limit. Ifthe brake pads are worn to the limit, the

message will come on continuously.Should this happen, there are only afew hundred miles of lining left and animmediate brake pad change shouldbe made.On the display also appears on whichwheel the brake pads are worn.Example: "AXLE 1 LHS".


If this message comes on duringnormal driving, a fault has occurred inbattery charging system of alternatorNo. 1. Use of the starter, heating/ventilation or lights in thesecircumstances will rapidly dischargethe batteries.


If this message comes on duringnormal driving, a fault has occurred inbattery charging system of alternatorNo. 2.

Update B

_OG

B02A

PU

pdate B_O

GB

02AP

OP

ER

AT

ING

INS

TR

UC

TIO

NS

OP

ER

AT

ING

INS

TR

UC

TIO

NS



C2045

C2045

Engine warning message(Cummins)

Refer to "Warning and indicatorlights (non-multiplexed vehicles)"for more information.

Engine warning message(Detroit Diesel DDEC IV only)


Engine warning message(Detroit Diesel DDEC V)

Refer to "CHECK ENGINE" warninglight under "Warning and indicatorlights (non-multiplexed vehicles)"for more information.

Engine warning message(Caterpillar)

This message flashes at fivesecond intervals whenever theelectronics detect an active fault of

ENGINEWARNING

STOP ENGINE

CHECKENGINE

ENGINEWARNING

ENGINEWARNING

condition. If the message appears and if themessage stays on after initial start-up, theelectronics have detected a system problem

Engine warning message(Cummins and Detroit Diesel)



Warns you of engine problems.

STOP ENGINE

Engine warning message(Cummins)


Engine warning message(Detroit Diesel DDEC IV only)


Engine warning message(Detroit Diesel DDEC V)

Refer to "CHECK ENGINE" warninglight under "Warning and indicatorlights (non-multiplexed vehicles)"for more information.


This message flashes at fivesecond intervals whenever theelectronics detect an active fault of

ENGINEWARNING

STOP ENGINE

CHECKENGINE

ENGINEWARNING

ENGINEWARNING

condition. If the message appears and if themessage stays on after initial start-up, theelectronics have detected a system problem

Engine warning message(Cummins and Detroit Diesel)



Warns you of engine problems.

STOP ENGINE

OP

ER

AT

ING

IN

ST

RU

CT

ION

SO

PE

RA

TIN

G I

NS

TR

UC

TIO

NS

Upd

ate

B_O

GB

02A

PU

pdat

e B

_OG

B02

AP



C2045

DO NOT SHIFT

BATTERYUNBALANCE

WTB500-transmission


Battery equalizer

Comes on when battery equalizeris not working properly.

Fire

Refer to "Warning and indicator lights(non-multiplexed vehicles)" for moreinformation.

ZF Astronic-transmission

Refer to "ZF Astronic" in Section 6.

DO NOT SHIFT

BATTERYUNBALANCE

WTB500-transmission


Battery equalizer

Comes on when battery equalizeris not working properly.

Fire

Refer to "Warning and indicator lights(non-multiplexed vehicles)" for moreinformation.

ZF Astronic-transmission

Refer "ZF Astronic" in Section 6.

Update B

_OG

B02A

PU

pdate B_O

GB

02AP

OP

ER

AT

ING

INS

TR

UC

TIO

NS

OP

ER

AT

ING

INS

TR

UC

TIO

NS



C2045

C2045

INSTRUMENTS(NON-MULTIPLEXED VEHICLES)

SPEEDOMETER

Indicates forward speedof the coach in miles-per-hour and kilometers-per-hour. The odometerregisters the accumulatedmiles the coach hasbeen driven.

TACHOMETER

Indicates the enginespeed in hundreds ofrevolutions per minute.Onflat road stretches andwhen going uphill theengine ECU limits enginespeed at approx. 2,100rpm.

!!! CAUTION !!!

THE ELECTRONIC FUEL SYSTEMS HAVENO CONTROL OVER THE ENGINE, WHENIT IS BEING DRIVEN BY THE WHEELS OFTHE VEHICLE GOING DOWNHILL. UNDER

THESE CIRCUMSTANCES, IT IS UP YOU TOKEEP ENGINE REVS UNDER CONTROL BY

REDUCING VEHICLE SPEED.WHEN THE TACHOMETER NEEDLE

EXCEEDS "21" ON THE DIAL, THE ENGINEOVERSPEEDS. THIS MAY LEAD TO

SERIOUS DAMAGE.T03682

T03683

INSTRUMENTS(NON-MULTIPLEXED VEHICLES)

SPEEDOMETER

Indicates forward speedof the coach in miles-per-hour and kilometers-per-hour. The odometerregisters the accumulatedmiles the coach hasbeen driven.

TACHOMETER

Indicates the enginespeed in hundreds ofrevolutions per minute.Onflat road stretches andwhen going uphill theengine ECU limits enginespeed at approx. 2,100rpm.

!!! CAUTION !!!

THE ELECTRONIC FUEL SYSTEMS HAVENO CONTROL OVER THE ENGINE, WHENIT IS BEING DRIVEN BY THE WHEELS OFTHE VEHICLE GOING DOWNHILL. UNDER

THESE CIRCUMSTANCES, IT IS UP TO YOU TO KEEP ENGINE REVS UNDER CONTROL

BY REDUCING VEHICLE SPEED.WHEN THE TACHOMETER NEEDLE

EXCEEDS "21" ON THE DIAL, THE ENGINEOVERSPEEDS. THIS MAY LEAD TO

SERIOUS DAMAGE.T03682

T03683

OP

ER

AT

ING

IN

ST

RU

CT

ION

SO

PE

RA

TIN

G I

NS

TR

UC

TIO

NS

Upd

ate

B_O

GB

02A

PU

pdat

e B

_OG

B02

AP



C2045

T03684

T03685

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATUREGAUGE

The temperature of thecoolant must never moveinto the red area(approx. 210°F). If theengine overheats innormal drivingconditions, first checktransmission oil level,coolant level and fanoperation.

!!! CAUTION !!!

CHECK COOLANT LEVEL ONLY WHENENGINE HAS BEEN STOPPED. WAIT UNTILCOOLANT TEMPERATURE IS BELOW 120°F

BEFORE REMOVING SURGE TANK CAP.FAILURE TO DO SO MAY CAUSE

PERSONAL INJURY FROM HOT COOLANTSPRAY.

NEVER ADD COLD COOLANT TO ANOVERHEATED ENGINE: CRACKS IN

CYLINDER BLOCK MAY RESULT.ALLOW ENGINE TO COOL TO BELOW

120°F BEFORE ADDING COOLANT.

ENGINE OIL PRESSURE GAUGE


The temperature of thecoolant must never moveinto the red area (approx.210°F). If the engineoverheats in normaldriving conditions, firstcheck transmission oillevel, coolant level andfan operation.

!!! CAUTION !!!

CHECK COOLANT LEVEL ONLY WHENENGINE HAS BEEN STOPPED. WAIT UNTILCOOLANT TEMPERATURE IS BELOW 120°F

BEFORE REMOVING SURGE TANK CAP.FAILURE TO DO SO MAY CAUSE

PERSONAL INJURY FROM HOT COOLANTSPRAY.

NEVER ADD COLD COOLANT TO ANOVERHEATED ENGINE: CRACKS IN

CYLINDER BLOCK MAY RESULT.ALLOW ENGINE TO COOL TO BELOW

120°F BEFORE ADDING COOLANT.

T03684

• 30 psi at 1,200 rpm• 10 psi at idle speed


Minimum oil pressure (warm engine)

Cummins

Detroit Diesel

T03685

ENGINE OIL PRESSURE GAUGE



Minimum oil pressure (warm engine)

Cummins

Detroit Diesel

Update B

_OG

B02A

PU

pdate B_O

GB

02AP

OP

ER

AT

ING

INS

TR

UC

TIO

NS

OP

ER

AT

ING

INS

TR

UC

TIO

NS



C2045

C2045

T03689

T03690

T03686

FRONT AXLE BRAKESAIR-PRESSURE GAUGE

This gauge, calibrated inpsi, indicates pressure infront axle brakes tank.

Normal working pressureranges from 105 to 135psi.

DRIVE AXLE SERVICE BRAKESAIR-PRESSURE GAUGE

This gauge, calibrated inpsi indicates pressure indrive axle service brakestank.


TAG AXLE BRAKES AIR-PRESSUREGAUGE

This gauge, calibrated inpsi indicates pressure intag axle brakes tank.


TURBO BOOST GAUGE

This gauge indicates theboost pressure in theengine air intakemanifold.

T03688

T03689

T03690

T03686

FRONT AXLE BRAKESAIR-PRESSURE GAUGE

This gauge, calibrated inpsi, indicates pressure infront axle brakes tank.


DRIVE AXLE SERVICE BRAKESAIR-PRESSURE GAUGE

This gauge, calibrated inpsi indicates pressure indrive axle service brakestank.


TAG AXLE BRAKES AIR-PRESSUREGAUGE

This gauge, calibrated inpsi indicates pressure intag axle brakes tank.


TURBO BOOST GAUGE

This gauge indicates theboost pressure in theengine air intakemanifold.

T03688

OP

ER

AT

ING

IN

ST

RU

CT

ION

SO

PE

RA

TIN

G I

NS

TR

UC

TIO

NS

Upd

ate

B_O

GB

02A

PU

pdat

e B

_OG

B02

AP



C2045

T03687

FUEL LEVEL GAUGE

Indicates fuel level intank.

T03687

FUEL LEVEL GAUGE

Indicates fuel level intank.

Update B

_OG

B02A

PU

pdate B_O

GB

02AP

OP

ER

AT

ING

INS

TR

UC

TIO

NS

OP

ER

AT

ING

INS

TR

UC

TIO

NS



C2045

C2045

INSTRUMENTS(MULTIPLEXED VEHICLES)

SPEEDOMETER/ODOMETER

Indicates forward speed of the coach in miles-per-hour. The odometer registers the accumulatedmiles the coach has been driven.

TACHOMETER

Refer to "Instruments (non-multiplexed vehicles)"for more information.



FUEL LEVEL GAUGE

Indicates fuel level in tank.

INFORMATION SCREENS ONMULTIFUNCTION DISPLAY

Air pressure, engine oil pressure, turbo boost andtransmission fluid temperature can be visualized

1. Speedometer/odometer


3. Tachometer

4. Engine coolant temperature gauge

5. Multifunction display brightness rheostat

6. Multifunction display selection button

7. Fuel level gauge

INSTRUMENTS(MULTIPLEXED VEHICLES)

SPEEDOMETER/ODOMETER

Indicates forward speed of the coach in miles-per-hour. The odometer registers the accumulatedmiles the coach has been driven.

TACHOMETER




FUEL LEVEL GAUGE

Indicates fuel level in tank.

INFORMATION SCREENS ONMULTIFUNCTION DISPLAY

Air pressure, engine oil pressure, turbo boost andtransmission fluid temperature can be visualized

1. Speedometer/odometer


3. Tachometer

4. Engine coolant temperature gauge

5. Multifunction display brightness rheostat

6. Multifunction display selection button

7. Fuel level gauge

OP

ER

AT

ING

IN

ST

RU

CT

ION

SO

PE

RA

TIN

G I

NS

TR

UC

TIO

NS

Upd

ate

B_O

GB

02A

PU

pdat

e B

_OG

B02

AP



C2045

by pressing the multifuction display selectionbutton.

Air pressure information screen

Press the multifunction display selection buttononce. Status is shown as a bar graph whichdisappears automatically after 10 seconds.

Bar graph showing 125 psi in the front axlebrakes tank ("I"), 135 psi in the drive axleservice ("II") and 115 psi on the tag axle ("I"beneath pressure numbers)

Engine oil pressure informationscreen

Press the multifunction display selection buttonfour times to obtain the actual operating pressure.Pressure in psi.

Turbo boost information screen

Press the multifunction display selection buttonthree times to obtain the boost pressure in theengine air intake manifold. Pressure in psi.

Transmission fluid temperatureinformation screen

Press the multifunction display selection buttontwice to obtain the actual transmission fluidtemperature. Temperature in Fahrenheit.

by pressing the multifuction display selectionbutton.

Air pressure information screen

Press the multifunction display selection buttononce. Status is shown as a bar graph whichdisappears automatically after 10 seconds.

Bar graph showing 125 psi in the front axlebrakes tank ("I"), 135 psi in the drive axleservice ("II") and 115 psi on the tag axle ("I"beneath pressure numbers)

Engine oil pressure informationscreen

Press the multifunction display selection buttonfour times to obtain the actual operating pressure.Pressure in psi.

Turbo boost information screen

Press the multifunction display selection buttonthree times to obtain the boost pressure in theengine air intake manifold. Pressure in psi.

Transmission fluid temperatureinformation screen

Press the multifunction display selection buttontwice to obtain the actual transmission fluidtemperature. Temperature in Fahrenheit.

Update B

_OG

B02A

PU

pdate B_O

GB

02AP

OP

ER

AT

ING

INS

TR

UC

TIO

NS

OP

ER

AT

ING

INS

TR

UC

TIO

NS



C2045

C2045

OP

ER

AT

ING

IN

ST

RU

CT

ION

SO

PE

RA

TIN

G I

NS

TR

UC

TIO

NS

Upd

ate

B_O

GB

02A

QU

pdat

e B

_OG

B02

AQ

SECTION 2 PAGE 2B-1DATE 10/2004


C2045

C2045

DRIVING INSTRUCTIONSENGINE

TO STOP THE ENGINE

By switching off the ignition, the fuel supply to thecylinders will be cut off and the engine will stop.

!!! CAUTION !!!

ALLOW THE ENGINE TO IDLE 3 TO 5MINUTES AFTER A FULL LOAD

OPERATION BEFORE SHUTTING THEENGINE OFF. THIS ALLOWS THE ENGINE TO COOL GRADUALLY AND UNIFORMLY.

BY NO MEANS MUST THE ENGINE BERACED JUST BEFORE STOPPING IT.

TO DO SO MAY CAUSE SEVEREDAMAGE TO THE TURBOCHARGER.

For vehicles with a raise/lower system only:

If you leave the coach unattended for a longerperiod of time, operate the coach lower system toprevent the coach from leaning to one side andpossibly causing damage to adjacent vehicles orobjects. This precaution will counter the unequalloss of pressure(which occurs after a longerperiod of time) in the air suspension system.

Procedure:

1. Park the coach.

!!! CAUTION !!!

THE NEXT STEP WILL CAUSE THE COACHSUPERSTRUCTURE TO FALL OVER2 INCHES BELOW NORMAL RIDING

HEIGHT. TAKE CARE THAT NO PERSONSOR OBJECTS GET CAUGHT

UNDERNEATH THE COACH SKIRT.

2. Momentarily push the lower part of the"Raise/lower"switch on the instrument

panel.The coach will lower about 2inches.


ENGINE

TO STOP THE ENGINE

By turning the ignition switch key to the "off"position, the fuel supply to the cylinders will be cutoff and the engine will stop.

!!! CAUTION !!!

ALLOW THE ENGINE TO IDLE 3 TO 5MINUTES AFTER A FULL LOAD

OPERATION BEFORE SHUTTING THEENGINE OFF. THIS ALLOWS THE ENGINE TO COOL GRADUALLY AND UNIFORMLY.

BY NO MEANS MUST THE ENGINE BERACED JUST BEFORE STOPPING IT.

TO DO SO MAY CAUSE SEVEREDAMAGE TO THE TURBOCHARGER.

For vehicles with a raise/lower system only:

If you leave the coach unattended for a longerperiod of time, operate the coach lower system toprevent the coach from leaning to one side andpossibly causing damage to adjacent vehicles orobjects. This precaution will counter the unequalloss of pressure(which occurs after a longerperiod of time) in the air suspension system.

Procedure:

1. Park the coach.

!!! CAUTION !!!

THE NEXT STEP WILL CAUSE THE COACHSUPERSTRUCTURE TO FALL OVER2 INCHES BELOW NORMAL RIDING

HEIGHT. TAKE CARE THAT NO PERSONSOR OBJECTS GET CAUGHT

UNDERNEATH THE COACH SKIRT.

2. Momentarily push the lower part of the"Raise/lower"switch on the instrument

panel.The coach will lower about 2inches.

Update B

_OG

B02A

QU

pdate B_O

GB

02AQ

OP

ER

AT

ING

INS

TR

UC

TIO

NS

OP

ER

AT

ING

INS

TR

UC

TIO

NS

PAGE 2B-2 DATE 10/2004 SECTION 2

DATE 10/2004PAGE 2B-2 SECTION 2

C2045

C2045

3. Turn the ignition switch key to the "off" position.

4. Switch off master switch on instrument panel.

Follow procedure from high to low before driving off.

PRE-STARTING CHECKS

The following checks should be made beforetaking the coach on service:

• Engine oil level• Coolant level• Transmission fluid level• Power steering fluid level• Check that the outside of the coach is clear

and clean• Wheel nuts for tightness• Tire inflation and condition• Air-cleaner restriction indicator• Emergency windows securely latched.

From inside the vehicle, firmly push outward onboth lower corners of the emergency window.No movement is allowed.From outside the vehicle, check the alignmentof the emergency side windows. Lower edge ofan emergency window that is not properlylatched will visibly stick out.

3. Turn the ignition switch key to the "off" position.

4. Switch off master switch on instrument panel.

Follow procedure from high to low before driving off.

PRE-STARTING CHECKS

The following checks should be made beforetaking the coach on service:

• Engine oil level• Coolant level• Transmission fluid level• Power steering fluid level• Check that the outside of the coach is clear

and clean• Wheel nuts for tightness• Tire inflation and condition• Air-cleaner restriction indicator• Emergency windows securely latched.

From inside the vehicle, firmly push outward onboth lower corners of the emergency window.No movement is allowed.From outside the vehicle, check the alignmentof the emergency side windows. Lower edge ofan emergency window that is not properlylatched will visibly stick out.

• Wheel rims for cracks and deformation• Check for fluid leaks in engine compartment, at

wheel hubs, etc.• Drive belt condition and tension

TO START THE ENGINE

!!! CAUTION !!!

TO PREVENT DAMAGE TO THE STARTINGMOTOR, DO NOT ENGAGE STARTING

MOTOR FOR MORE THAN 15 SECONDS.WAIT 2 MINUTES BETWEEN EACH

ATTEMPT TO START.

TO PREVENT SERIOUS STARTING MOTORDAMAGE, DO NOT PRESS THE STARTERSWITCH AGAIN AFTER THE ENGINE HAS

STARTED.

PROTECT THE TURBOCHARGER DURINGTHE STARTUP BY NOT ACCELERATINGTO ANY SPEED ABOVE IDLE FOR TWO

MINUTES TO ALLOW OIL TO REACH THETURBOCHARGER.

• Wheel rims for cracks and deformation• Check for fluid leaks in engine compartment, at

wheel hubs, etc.• Drive belt condition and tension

TO START THE ENGINE

!!! CAUTION !!!

TO PREVENT DAMAGE TO THE STARTINGMOTOR, DO NOT ENGAGE STARTING

MOTOR FOR MORE THAN 15 SECONDS.WAIT 2 MINUTES BETWEEN EACH

ATTEMPT TO START.

TO PREVENT SERIOUS STARTING MOTORDAMAGE, DO NOT PRESS THE STARTERSWITCH AGAIN AFTER THE ENGINE HAS

STARTED.

PROTECT THE TURBOCHARGER DURINGTHE STARTUP BY NOT ACCELERATINGTO ANY SPEED ABOVE IDLE FOR TWO

MINUTES TO ALLOW OIL TO REACH THETURBOCHARGER.

OP

ER

AT

ING

IN

ST

RU

CT

ION

SO

PE

RA

TIN

G I

NS

TR

UC

TIO

NS

Upd

ate

B_O

GB

02A

QU

pdat

e B

_OG

B02

AQ



C2045

C2045

1. Make sure the parking brake is on.

2. Switch ignition "on".

Non-multiplexed vehicle: the following warninglights should come on:

• "DO NOT SHIFT" (only in case of WT-transmission)

• Parking brake• Alternator No.1• Alternator No.2• Low engine oil pressure• "ABS" (for a few seconds)• "ASR" (for a few seconds)• In case of Cummins ISM engine: The

engine diagnostic lights "ENGINE MAINT","STOP ENGINE" and "ENGINE WARNING" come onfor approximately 3 seconds. These lampswill not come on if you turn off the ignitionand than back on within 30 seconds.

• In case of Detroit Diesel engine: The enginediagnostic lights "STOP ENGINE" and "CHECKENGINE" come on for approximately 5seconds.

If air pressure is low, the air pressure warninglight will also illuminate and a buzzer willsound.

Multiplexed vehicle: the following warningmessages should come on:

• Parking brake• Alternator No.1• Alternator No.2• "ABS" (for a few seconds)• "ASR" (for a few seconds)• In case of Cummins ISM engine: The engine

warning messages "ENGINE MAINTENANCE"(ISM01 only), "ENGINE WARNING" and "STOPENGINE" come on successively. Afterapproximately 3 seconds the "STOP ENGINE"message is changed by the "DO NOT SHIFT"message (only in case of WT-transmission).The engine warning messages will not comeon if you turn off the ignition and than backon within 30 seconds.

• In case of Detroit Diesel engine: The enginewarning message "STOP ENGINE" comes onfor approx. 5 seconds. For WT-transmissiononly: after approximately 5 seconds the"STOP ENGINE" message is changed by the"DO NOT SHIFT" message.

• In case of Caterpillar engine: The enginewarning message "ENGINE WARNING" comeson for approx. 5 seconds. For WT-transmission only: after approximately 5seconds the "ENGINE WARNING" messageis changed by the "DO NOT SHIFT" message


1. Make sure the parking brake is on.


Non-multiplexed vehicle: the following warninglights should come on:

• "DO NOT SHIFT" (only in case of WT-transmission)

• Parking brake• Alternator No.1• Alternator No.2• Low engine oil pressure• "ABS" (for a few seconds)• "ASR" (for a few seconds)• In case of Cummins ISM engine: The

engine diagnostic lights "ENGINE MAINT","STOP ENGINE" and "ENGINEWARNING" come on for approximately3 seconds. These lamps will not come on ifyou turn off the ignition and than back onwithin 30 seconds.

• In case of Detroit Diesel engine: Theengine diagnostic lights "STOP ENGINE"and "CHECK ENGINE" come on forapproximately 5 seconds.


Multiplexed vehicle: the following warningmessages should come on:

• Parking brake• Alternator No.1• Alternator No.2• "ABS" (for a few seconds)• "ASR" (for a few seconds)• In case of Cummins ISM engine: The engine

warning messages "ENGINE MAINTENANCE"(ISM01 only), "ENGINE WARNING" and "STOPENGINE" come on successively. Afterapproximately 3 seconds the "STOP ENGINE"message is changed by the "DO NOT SHIFT"message (only in case of WT-transmission).The engine warning messages will not comeon if you turn off the ignition and than backon within 30 seconds.

• In case of Detroit Diesel engine: The enginewarning message "STOP ENGINE" comes onfor approx. 5 seconds. For WT-transmissiononly: after approximately 5 seconds the"STOP ENGINE" message is changed by the"DO NOT SHIFT" message.

• In case of Caterpillar engine: The enginewarning message "ENGINE WARNING" comeson for approx. 5 seconds. For WT-transmission only: after approximately 5seconds the "ENGINE WARNING" messageis changed by the "DO NOT SHIFT" message


Update B

_OG

B02A

QU

pdate B_O

GB

02AQ

OP

ER

AT

ING

INS

TR

UC

TIO

NS

OP

ER

AT

ING

INS

TR

UC

TIO

NS



C2045

C2045

Control box in engine compartment

1. Socket for 24V lamp2. Engine compartment

light switch2. Engine stop button3. Starter override switch4. Engine start button

NOTE

The Electronic Control Unit of thetransmission automatically selects

neutral at startup.

4. Be sure the override switch in the enginecompartment is in the "run" position.Otherwise the starting motor will not engage.

5. Press the starter switch firmly. As soon asengine fires, release switch.

NOTE

For Cummins and Caterpillar engines:in park the engine speed is limited to

1,600 rpm.

TO DRIVE OFF

1. Build up normal working pressure in thecompressed air tanks.

In any case, before taking the coach onservice, run the engine at part throttle for about5 minutes before operating with load.

NOTE

The Electronic Control Unit of thetransmission automatically selects

neutral at startup.

4. Be sure the override switch in the enginecompartment is in the "run" position.Otherwise the starting motor will not engage.

5. Press the starter switch firmly. As soon asengine fires, release switch.

NOTE

For Cummins and Caterpillar engines:in park the engine speed is limited to

1,600 rpm.

TO DRIVE OFF

1. Build up normal working pressure in thecompressed air tanks.

In any case, before taking the coach onservice, run the engine at part throttle forabout 5 minutes before operating with load.

Control box in engine compartment

1. Socket for 24V lamp2. Engine compartment

light switch2. Engine stop button3. Starter override switch4. Engine start button

3. Make sure transmission is in Neutral(the display of the transmission push-buttonselector will display N).

3. Make sure transmission is in Neutral(the display of the transmission push-buttonselector will display N).

OP

ER

AT

ING

IN

ST

RU

CT

ION

SO

PE

RA

TIN

G I

NS

TR

UC

TIO

NS

Upd

ate

B_O

GB

02A

QU

pdat

e B

_OG

B02

AQ



C2045

C2045

2. With the engine idling, depress and hold thefoot brake pedal: then depress the appropriategear selector button.

NOTE

The transmission will not go into gearunless the foot brake is depressed.

3. Release parking brake.The parking brakelight on the instrument panel should go out,when the parking brake push-pull valve isplaced in the OFF position. If it does not doso, this means circuit air-pressure is still low.

!!! CAUTION !!!

DO NOT ATTEMPT TO DRIVE OFFBEFORE THE PARKING BRAKE

INDICATOR LIGHT HAS GONE OUT.

4. Release foot brake pedal and accelerate.The vehicle now moves off and driving canfurther be regulated by mere use of throttlepedal and foot brake.

TO WARM-UP THE ENGINE

Avoid full throttle operation with a cold engine.Drive at moderate speeds until coolanttemperature gauge indicates 140 °F. Only thenmay the engine be required to develop its fulloutput.

2. With the engine idling, depress and hold thefoot brake pedal: then depress the appropriategear selector button.

NOTE

The transmission will not go into gearunless the foot brake is depressed.

3. Release parking brake.The parking brakelight on the instrument panel should go out,when the parking brake push-pull valve isplaced in the OFF position. If it does not doso, this means circuit air-pressure is still low.

!!! CAUTION !!!

DO NOT ATTEMPT TO DRIVE OFFBEFORE THE PARKING BRAKE

INDICATOR LIGHT HAS GONE OUT.

4. Release foot brake pedal and accelerate.The vehicle now moves off and driving canfurther be regulated by mere use of throttlepedal and foot brake.

TO WARM-UP THE ENGINE

Avoid full throttle operation with a cold engine.Drive at moderate speeds until coolanttemperature gauge indicates 140 °F. Only thenmay the engine be required to develop its fulloutput.

Update B

_OG

B02A

QU

pdate B_O

GB

02AQ

OP

ER

AT

ING

INS

TR

UC

TIO

NS

OP

ER

AT

ING

INS

TR

UC

TIO

NS



C2045

C2045

T05126

PUSH-BUTTONSHIFT SELECTOR

WT B500 AUTOMATICTRANSMISSION

The B500 automatic is available in two versions,with either 5 or 6 forward speeds and onereverse. The transmission operation is controlledby an Electronic Control Unit (ECU). In addition,the ECU monitors the system for conditions thatcould result in damage to the transmission orimproper vehicle operation.

SHIFT SELECTOR

The pushbutton shiftselector has R, N, D, ↓↓↓↓↓ ,↑↑↑↑↑ , a mode button and adigital display. Duringnormal operation, whenthe D (Drive) button ispressed, the digitaldisplay shows the highestforward range attainablefor the shift schedule inuse. Abnormal operationis also indicated by the

digital display. When all segments of the digitaldisplay are illuminated for more than 12 seconds,the ECU did not complete initialization.When thedigital display is blank, there is no power to theselector. When the display shows a " " (cateye),a selector-related fault code has been logged.Conditions which illuminate the "DO NOT SHIFT"light will disable the shift selector and the digitaldisplay will show the range actually attained. Thetransmission will not shift into range if a "DO NOTSHIFT" code is active. When the display showseither R or D has been requested and the displayis flashing, the requesed range has not beenachieved due to an inhibit function. Check foractive codes when D (Drive) is not attained. OnceD (Drive) is attained, the transmission will shiftinto the lowest range programmed for the D (Drive)position, usually first. Manual selection of rangeswithin the D (Drive) selection is done by pressingthe ↑↑↑↑↑ (UP) or ↓↓↓↓↓ (DOWN) arrow buttons until thedesired range is shown in the display window.

The pushbutton selector incorporates a MODEbutton which allows the driver to enable asecondary shift schedule.


The B500 automatic is available in two versions,with either 5 or 6 forward speeds and onereverse. The transmission operation is controlledby an Electronic Control Unit (ECU). In addition,the ECU monitors the system for conditions thatcould result in damage to the transmission orimproper vehicle operation.

SHIFT SELECTOR

The pushbutton shiftselector has R, N, D, ↓↓↓↓↓ ,↑↑↑↑↑ , a mode button and adigital display. Duringnormal operation, whenthe D (Drive) button ispressed, the digitaldisplay shows the highestforward range attainablefor the shift schedule inuse. Abnormal operationis also indicated by the

digital display. When all segments of the digitaldisplay are illuminated for more than 12 seconds,the ECU did not complete initialization.When thedigital display is blank, there is no power to theselector. When the display shows a " " (cateye),a selector-related fault code has been logged.Conditions which illuminate the "DO NOT SHIFT"light will disable the shift selector and the digitaldisplay will show the range actually attained. Thetransmission will not shift into range if a "DO NOTSHIFT" code is active. When the display showseither R or D has been requested and the displayis flashing, the requesed range has not beenachieved due to an inhibit function. Check foractive codes when D (Drive) is not attained. OnceD (Drive) is attained, the transmission will shiftinto the lowest range programmed for the D (Drive)position, usually first. Manual selection of rangeswithin the D (Drive) selection is done by pressingthe ↑↑↑↑↑ (UP) or ↓↓↓↓↓ (DOWN) arrow buttons until thedesired range is shown in the display window.

The pushbutton selector incorporates a MODEbutton which allows the driver to enable asecondary shift schedule.

T05126

PUSH-BUTTONSHIFT SELECTOR

OP

ER

AT

ING

IN

ST

RU

CT

ION

SO

PE

RA

TIN

G I

NS

TR

UC

TIO

NS

Upd

ate

B_O

GB

02A

QU

pdat

e B

_OG

B02

AQ



C2045

C2045

It is not necessary to select the right moment toupshift or downshift during changing road andtraffic conditions. The transmission does it for you.However, knowledge of the gear ranges and whento select them will make vehicle control and yourjob even easier.

RANGE SELECTION

!!! CAUTION !!!

IN THE EVENT YOU LEAVE THE COACH,EVEN MOMENTARILY, WHILE THE ENGINE

IS RUNNING, BE SURE THAT THETRANSMISSION IS IN N (NEUTRAL),

PARKING BRAKE IS SET AND PROPERLYENGAGED. UNEXPECTED AND POSSIBLE

SUDDEN VEHICLE MOVEMENT MAYOCCUR IF THESE PRECAUTIONS

ARE NOT TAKEN.

Completely stop the vehicle beforeshifting from a forward range to Reverseor from Reverse to a forward range. Thedisplay will show R when Reverse isattained.

Use Neutral when you start the engine,to check vehicle accessories, and forextended periods of engine idleoperation. Neutral and economy modeare automatically set during startup. Ifthe vehicle starts in any range otherthan neutral, seek serviceimmediately.The display will show Nwhen Neutral is selected. Alwaysselect N (Neutral) before turning off thevehicle engine.

!!! CAUTION !!!

IF YOU LET THE VEHICLE COASTIN NEUTRAL, THERE IS NO ENGINEBRAKING AND YOU COULD LOSECONTROL. COASTING CAN ALSOCAUSE SEVERE TRANSMISSION

DAMAGE. TO HELP AVOID INJURYAND PROPERTY DAMAGE, DO NOTALLOW THE VEHICLE TO COAST

IN NEUTRAL.R

N

It is not necessary to select the right moment toupshift or downshift during changing road andtraffic conditions. The transmission does it for you.However, knowledge of the gear ranges and whento select them will make vehicle control and yourjob even easier.

RANGE SELECTION

!!! CAUTION !!!

IN THE EVENT YOU LEAVE THE COACH,EVEN MOMENTARILY, WHILE THE ENGINE

IS RUNNING, BE SURE THAT THETRANSMISSION IS IN N (NEUTRAL), PARKING

BRAKE IS SET AND PROPERLY ENGAGED.UNEXPECTED AND POSSIBLE SUDDEN

VEHICLE MOVEMENT MAYOCCUR IF THESE PRECAUTIONS

ARE NOT TAKEN.

Completely stop the vehicle beforeshifting from a forward range to Reverseor from Reverse to a forward range. Thedisplay will show R when Reverse isattained.

Use Neutral when you start the engine,to check vehicle accessories, and forextended periods of engine idleoperation. Neutral and economy modeare automatically set during startup. Ifthe vehicle starts in any range otherthan neutral, seek serviceimmediately.The display will show Nwhen Neutral is selected. Alwaysselect N (Neutral) before turning off thevehicle engine.

!!! CAUTION !!!

IF YOU LET THE VEHICLE COASTIN NEUTRAL, THERE IS NO ENGINEBRAKING AND YOU COULD LOSECONTROL. COASTING CAN ALSOCAUSE SEVERE TRANSMISSION

DAMAGE. TO HELP AVOID INJURYAND PROPERTY DAMAGE, DO NOTALLOW THE VEHICLE TO COAST

IN NEUTRAL.R

N

Update B

_OG

B02A

QU

pdate B_O

GB

02AQ

OP

ER

AT

ING

INS

TR

UC

TIO

NS

OP

ER

AT

ING

INS

TR

UC

TIO

NS



C2045

C2045

5432

The transmission will initially attain firstrange when D (Drive) is selected(except for those units programmed tostart in second range). As vehiclespeed increases, the transmission willupshift automatically through eachrange. As the vehicle slows, thetransmission will downshiftautomatically. The display will show thecurrent operating range.

!!! CAUTION !!!

IF YOU JUST DOWNSHIFT OR JUST USESERVICE BRAKES WHEN GOING DOWNHILL,

YOU CAN LOSE CONTROL AND CAUSEINJURY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE. TO HELP

AVOID LOSS OF CONTROL, USE ACOMBINATION OF DOWNSHIFTING, BRAKING,

AND OTHER RETARDING DEVICES.DOWNSHIFTING TO A LOWER TRANSMISSION

RANGE INCREASES ENGINE BRAKING ANDHELPS YOU TO MAINTAIN CONTROL.

THE TRANSMISSION HAS A FEATURE TO

PREVENT AUTOMATIC UPSHIFTING ABOVE

THE LOWER RANGE SELECTED. HOWEVER,

DURING DOWNHILL OPERATION, IF ENGINE

GOVERNED SPEED IS EXCEEDED IN THE

LOWER RANGE, THE TRANSMISSION MAY

UPSHIFT TO THE NEXT HIGHER RANGE. THIS

WILL REDUCE BRAKING AND COULD CAUSE

A LOSS OF CONTROL. APPLY THE VEHICLE

BRAKES OR OTHER RETARDING DEVICE TO

PREVENT EXCEEDING ENGINE GOVERNED

SPEED IN THE LOWER RANGE SELECTED.

.

Occasionally, road conditions, load, ortraffic conditions will make it desirableto restrict automatic shifting to a lowerrange. Lower ranges provide greaterengine braking for going down grades(the lower the range, the greater thebraking effect).

With the arrow buttons you can selectindividual forward ranges. Push the ↑↑↑↑↑(UP) or ↓↓↓↓↓ (DOWN) arrow to the desiredrange. The display will show yourchoice of range. Even though a lower

D

The transmission will initially attain firstrange when D (Drive) is selected(except for those units programmed tostart in second range). As vehiclespeed increases, the transmission willupshift automatically through eachrange. As the vehicle slows, thetransmission will downshiftautomatically. The display will show thecurrent operating range.

!!! CAUTION !!!

IF YOU JUST DOWNSHIFT OR JUST USESERVICE BRAKES WHEN GOING DOWNHILL,

YOU CAN LOSE CONTROL AND CAUSEINJURY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE. TO HELP

AVOID LOSS OF CONTROL, USE ACOMBINATION OF DOWNSHIFTING, BRAKING,

AND OTHER RETARDING DEVICES.DOWNSHIFTING TO A LOWER TRANSMISSION

RANGE INCREASES ENGINE BRAKING ANDHELPS YOU TO MAINTAIN CONTROL.

THE TRANSMISSION HAS A FEATURE TO

PREVENT AUTOMATIC UPSHIFTING ABOVE

THE LOWER RANGE SELECTED. HOWEVER,

DURING DOWNHILL OPERATION, IF ENGINE

GOVERNED SPEED IS EXCEEDED IN THE

LOWER RANGE, THE TRANSMISSION MAY

UPSHIFT TO THE NEXT HIGHER RANGE. THIS

WILL REDUCE BRAKING AND COULD CAUSE

A LOSS OF CONTROL. APPLY THE VEHICLE

BRAKES OR OTHER RETARDING DEVICE TO



.

Occasionally, road conditions, load, ortraffic conditions will make it desirableto restrict automatic shifting to a lowerrange. Lower ranges provide greaterengine braking for going down grades(the lower the range, the greater thebraking effect).

With the arrow buttons you can selectindividual forward ranges. Push the ↑↑↑↑↑(UP) or ↓↓↓↓↓ (DOWN) arrow to thedesired range. The display will showyour choice of range. Even though a

D

5432

OP

ER

AT

ING

IN

ST

RU

CT

ION

SO

PE

RA

TIN

G I

NS

TR

UC

TIO

NS

Upd

ate

B_O

GB

02A

QU

pdat

e B

_OG

B02

AQ



C2045

C2045

1

DO NOTSHIFT

range was selected, the transmissionmay not downshift until vehicle speedis reduced.

Use this range when pulling throughmud and deep snow, whenmaneuvering in tight spaces, or whiledriving up or down grades. First rangeprovides the vehicle with its maximumdriving power and maximum enginebraking power. Push the ↓↓↓↓↓ (DOWN)arrow until first range appears on thedisplay.

"DO NOT SHIFT" LIGHT

The electronic control system isprogrammed to inform you of a problemwith the transmission system andautomatically take action to protect the

operator, vehicle, and transmission. When theElectronic Control Unit (ECU) detects a DO NOTSHIFT condition, the ECU restricts shifting, turnson the DO NOT SHIFT light on the instrumentpanel, and registers a diagnostic code.

NOTE

For some problems, diagnostic codesmay be registered without the ECUactivating the DO NOT SHIFT light.

Each time the engine is started, the DO NOTSHIFT light will illuminate, then turn off after a fewseconds. This momentary lighting is to show thatthe status light circuits are working properly. If theDO NOT SHIFT light does not illuminate duringignition, or if the light remains on after ignition, thesystem should be checked immediately

Continued illumination of the DO NOT SHIFT lightduring vehicle operation (other than start-up)indicates that the ECU has signaled a diagnosticcode. Illumination of the DO NOT SHIFT light isaccompanied by a flashing display from the shiftselector. The shift selector display will show theactual range attained and the transmission will notrespond to shift selector requests.

The indications from the shift selector are providedto inform the operator that the transmission is notperforming as designed and is operating withreduced capabilities. Before turning the ignition off,

lower range was selected, thetransmission may not downshift untilvehicle speed is reduced.

Use this range when pulling throughmud and deep snow, whenmaneuvering in tight spaces, or whiledriving up or down grades. First rangeprovides the vehicle with its maximumdriving power and maximum enginebraking power. Push the ↓↓↓↓↓ (DOWN)arrow until first range appears on thedisplay.

"DO NOT SHIFT" LIGHT

The electronic control system isprogrammed to inform you of a problemwith the transmission system andautomatically take action to protect the

operator, vehicle, and transmission. When theElectronic Control Unit (ECU) detects a DO NOTSHIFT condition, the ECU restricts shifting, turnson the DO NOT SHIFT light on the instrumentpanel, and registers a diagnostic code.

NOTE

For some problems, diagnostic codesmay be registered without the ECUactivating the DO NOT SHIFT light.

Each time the engine is started, the DO NOTSHIFT light will illuminate, then turn off after a fewseconds. This momentary lighting is to show thatthe status light circuits are working properly. If theDO NOT SHIFT light does not illuminate duringignition, or if the light remains on after ignition, thesystem should be checked immediately

Continued illumination of the DO NOT SHIFT lightduring vehicle operation (other than start-up)indicates that the ECU has signaled a diagnosticcode. Illumination of the DO NOT SHIFT light isaccompanied by a flashing display from the shiftselector. The shift selector display will show theactual range attained and the transmission willnot respond to shift selector requests.

The indications from the shift selector areprovided to inform the operator that thetransmission is not performing as designed and isoperating with reduced capabilities. Before turning

1

DO NOTSHIFT

Update B

_OG

B02A

QU

pdate B_O

GB

02AQ

OP

ER

AT

ING

INS

TR

UC

TIO

NS

OP

ER

AT

ING

INS

TR

UC

TIO

NS



C2045

C2045

the transmission may be operated for a short timein the selected range in order to "limp home" forservice assistance. Service should be performedimmediately in order to minimize the potential fordamage to the transmission.

When the DO NOT SHIFT light comes on and theignition switch is turned off, the transmission willremain in N (Neutral) until the condition causingthe DO NOT SHIFT light is corrected

Generally, while the DO NOT SHIFT light is on,upshifts and downshifts will be restricted anddirection changes will not occur. The pushbuttonshift selector does not respond to any operatorshift requests while the DO NOT SHIFT light isilluminated. The lockup clutch is disengaged whentransmission shifting is restricted or during anycritical transmission malfunction

DIAGNOSTIC CODES

Refer to "Transmission diagnostic codes" inSection 2C.

THROTTLE CONTROL

!!! CAUTION !!!

TO HELP AVOID INJURY OR PROPERTYDAMAGE CAUSED BY SUDDEN MOVEMENTOF THE VEHICLE, DO NOT MAKE SHIFTSFROM N (NEUTRAL) TO D (DRIVE) OR R

(REVERSE) WHEN THE THROTTLE IS OPEN.IF YOU SHIFT WHILE THE THROTTLE ISOPEN TOO MUCH, THE TRANSMISSION

WILL ONLY ENGAGE IF THE THROTTLE ISCLOSED IN THE NEXT THREE SECONDS.

THAT CAN CAUSE A SUDDEN MOVEMENT OFTHE VEHICLE. LEAVING THE THROTTLEOPEN LONGER THAN THREE SECONDS

CAUSES THE TRANSMISSION TO REMAININ N (NEUTRAL). AVOID THIS CONDITIONBY MAKING SHIFTS FROM N (NEUTRAL)

TO D (DRIVE) OR R (REVERSE) ONLYWHEN THE THROTTLE IS CLOSED.

The position of the throttle pedal influences thetiming at which automatic shifting occurs. When

the ignition off, the transmission may be operatedfor a short time in the selected range in order to"limp home" for service assistance. Service shouldbe performed immediately in order to minimize thepotential for damage to the transmission.

When the DO NOT SHIFT light comes on and theignition switch is turned off, the transmission willremain in N (Neutral) until the condition causingthe DO NOT SHIFT light is corrected

Generally, while the DO NOT SHIFT light is on,upshifts and downshifts will be restricted anddirection changes will not occur. The pushbuttonshift selector does not respond to any operatorshift requests while the DO NOT SHIFT light isilluminated. The lockup clutch is disengagedwhen transmission shifting is restricted or duringany critical transmission malfunction

DIAGNOSTIC CODES

Refer to "Transmission diagnostic codes" inSection 2C.

THROTTLE CONTROL

!!! CAUTION !!!



WILL ONLY ENGAGE IF THE THROTTLE ISCLOSED IN THE NEXT THREE SECONDS.THAT CAN CAUSE A SUDDEN MOVEMENT

OF THE VEHICLE. LEAVING THE THROTTLEOPEN LONGER THAN THREE SECONDS



The position of the throttle pedal influences thetiming at which automatic shifting occurs. When

OP

ER

AT

ING

IN

ST

RU

CT

ION

SO

PE

RA

TIN

G I

NS

TR

UC

TIO

NS

Upd

ate

B_O

GB

02A

QU

pdat

e B

_OG

B02

AQ



C2045

C2045

the pedal is fully depressed, upshifts will occurautomatically at high engine speeds. A partiallydepressed position of the pedal will cause theupshifts to occur at lower engine speeds. Anelectronic throttle position signal tells the ECUhow much the operator has depressed the pedal.Excessive throttle position affects directionalchange shifts (shifts from N (Neutral) to D (Drive)or R (Reverse)).

DOWNSHIFT OR REVERSEINHIBITOR FEATURE

NOTE

The shift from N (Neutral) to D (Drive)or R (Reverse) is inhibited when enginespeed is above idle. N (Neutral) must

be reselected and the idle speedreduced before the shift will occur.

When shifts to D (Drive) or R (Reverse)are inhibited, the digit on the shift

selector display will flash.

Although there is no speed limitation onupshifting, there is on downshifting and shifts fromN (Neutral) into D (Drive) or R (Reverse). If adownshift or Neutral-to-Range shift is selectedwhen the engine speed is too high, the ECU willprevent the shift from occurring until N (Neutral) isreselected and/or the shift is made at a lowerspeed.

USING THE ENGINE TO SLOW THEVEHICLE

!!! CAUTION !!!

IF YOU JUST DOWNSHIFT OR JUST USESERVICE BRAKES WHEN GOING

DOWNHILL, YOU CAN LOSE CONTROLAND CAUSE INJURY AND PROPERTYDAMAGE. TO HELP AVOID LOSS OFCONTROL, USE A COMBINATION OF

DOWNSHIFTING, BRAKING, AND OTHERRETARDING DEVICES. DOWNSHIFTING TO

A LOWER TRANSMISSION RANGEINCREASES ENGINE BRAKING AND HELPS

the pedal is fully depressed, upshifts will occurautomatically at high engine speeds. A partiallydepressed position of the pedal will cause theupshifts to occur at lower engine speeds. Anelectronic throttle position signal tells the ECUhow much the operator has depressed the pedal.Excessive throttle position affects directionalchange shifts (shifts from N (Neutral) to D (Drive)or R (Reverse)).

DOWNSHIFT OR REVERSEINHIBITOR FEATURE

NOTE

The shift from N (Neutral) to D (Drive)or R (Reverse) is inhibited when enginespeed is above idle. N (Neutral) must

be reselected and the idle speedreduced before the shift will occur.

When shifts to D (Drive) or R (Reverse)are inhibited, the digit on the shift

selector display will flash.

Although there is no speed limitation onupshifting, there is on downshifting and shifts fromN (Neutral) into D (Drive) or R (Reverse). If adownshift or Neutral-to-Range shift is selectedwhen the engine speed is too high, the ECU willprevent the shift from occurring until N (Neutral) isreselected and/or the shift is made at a lowerspeed.

USING THE ENGINE TO SLOW THEVEHICLE

!!! CAUTION !!!

IF YOU JUST DOWNSHIFT OR JUST USESERVICE BRAKES WHEN GOING

DOWNHILL, YOU CAN LOSE CONTROLAND CAUSE INJURY AND PROPERTYDAMAGE. TO HELP AVOID LOSS OFCONTROL, USE A COMBINATION OF

DOWNSHIFTING, BRAKING, AND OTHERRETARDING DEVICES. DOWNSHIFTING TO

A LOWER TRANSMISSION RANGEINCREASES ENGINE BRAKING AND HELPS

Update B

_OG

B02A

QU

pdate B_O

GB

02AQ

OP

ER

AT

ING

INS

TR

UC

TIO

NS

OP

ER

AT

ING

INS

TR

UC

TIO

NS



C2045

C2045

YOU TO MAINTAIN CONTROL. THETRANSMISSION HAS A FEATURE TO

PREVENT AUTOMATIC UPSHIFTING ABOVETHE LOWER RANGE SELECTED.

HOWEVER, DURING DOWNHILL

OPERATION, IF ENGINE GOVERNED SPEED

IS EXCEEDED IN THE LOWER RANGE, THE

TRANSMISSION MAY UPSHIFT TO THE

NEXT HIGHER RANGE. THIS WILL REDUCE

BRAKING AND COULD CAUSE A LOSS OF

CONTROL. APPLY THE VEHICLE BRAKES

OR OTHER RETARDING DEVICE TO



To use the engine as a braking force, select thenext lower range. If the vehicle is exceeding themaximum speed for this range, use the retarderand/or the service brakes to slow the coach.When a lower speed is reached, the ECU willautomatically downshift the transmission. Enginebraking provides good speed control for goingdown grades. When the vehicle is heavily loaded,

or the grade is steep, it may be desirable topreselect a lower range before reaching the grade.If engine-governed speed is exceeded, thetransmission will upshift automatically to the nextrange.

RANGE PRESELECTION

Range preselection means selecting a lowerrange to match driving conditions you encounteror expect to encounter. Learning to takeadvantage of preselected shifts will give youbetter control on slick or icy roads and ondowngrades. Downshifting to a lower rangeincreases engine braking. The selection of alower range often prevents cycling between thatrange and the next higher range on a series ofshort up-and-down hills.

COLD WEATHER STARTS

The transmission is programmed to restrict fulloperation until specific temperatures are reached.Refer to the following chart for temperature restric-tions.

YOU TO MAINTAIN CONTROL. THETRANSMISSION HAS A FEATURE TO

PREVENT AUTOMATIC UPSHIFTING ABOVETHE LOWER RANGE SELECTED.

HOWEVER, DURING DOWNHILL

OPERATION, IF ENGINE GOVERNED SPEED

IS EXCEEDED IN THE LOWER RANGE, THE

TRANSMISSION MAY UPSHIFT TO THE

NEXT HIGHER RANGE. THIS WILL REDUCE

BRAKING AND COULD CAUSE A LOSS OF

CONTROL. APPLY THE VEHICLE BRAKES

OR OTHER RETARDING DEVICE TO PREVENT

EXCEEDING ENGINE GOVERNED SPEED IN

THE LOWER RANGE SELECTED.

To use the engine as a braking force, select thenext lower range. If the vehicle is exceeding themaximum speed for this range, use the retarderand/or the service brakes to slow the coach.When a lower speed is reached, the ECU willautomatically downshift the transmission. Enginebraking provides good speed control for goingdown grades. When the vehicle is heavily loaded,

or the grade is steep, it may be desirable topreselect a lower range before reaching the grade.If engine-governed speed is exceeded, thetransmission will upshift automatically to the nextrange.

RANGE PRESELECTION

Range preselection means selecting a lowerrange to match driving conditions you encounteror expect to encounter. Learning to takeadvantage of preselected shifts will give you bettercontrol on slick or icy roads and on downgrades.Downshifting to a lower range increases enginebraking. The selection of a lower range oftenprevents cycling between that range and the nexthigher range on a series of short up-and-downhills.

COLD WEATHER STARTS

The transmission is programmed to restrict fulloperation until specific temperatures are reached.Refer to the following chart for temperature restric-tions.

OP

ER

AT

ING

IN

ST

RU

CT

ION

SO

PE

RA

TIN

G I

NS

TR

UC

TIO

NS

Upd

ate

B_O

GB

02A

QU

pdat

e B

_OG

B02

AQ



C2045

C2045

DO NOT SHIFTLight

OFF

OFF

OFF

Operation

Neutral, Second,or Reverse


Full operation inall ranges

Sump OilTemperature

-25 °F and below

-24 °Fto 19 °F

20 °F andabove

DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE

Here is where all of your ability as a professionaldriver comes into focus regardless of whattransmission you have. If possible, reduce yourspeed and select a lower range before you losetraction. Select the range that will not exceed thespeed you expect to maintain. Accelerate ordecelerate very gradually to prevent losingtraction. It is very important to slow gradually,when a lower range is selected. It is important thatyou reach the lower range selected beforeattempting to accelerate. This will avoid anunexpected downshift during acceleration.

ROCKING OUT

!!! CAUTION !!!



WILL ONLY ENGAGE IF THE THROTTLE ISCLOSED IN THE NEXT THREE SECONDS.

THAT CAN CAUSE A SUDDEN MOVEMENT OFTHE VEHICLE. LEAVING THE THROTTLEOPEN LONGER THAN THREE SECONDS



DO NOT MAKE N (NEUTRAL)-TO-D(DRIVE)OR DIRECTIONAL SHIFT CHANGES WHEN

DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE

Here is where all of your ability as a professionaldriver comes into focus regardless of whattransmission you have. If possible, reduce yourspeed and select a lower range before you losetraction. Select the range that will not exceed thespeed you expect to maintain. Accelerate ordecelerate very gradually to prevent losingtraction. It is very important to slow gradually,when a lower range is selected. It is important thatyou reach the lower range selected beforeattempting to accelerate. This will avoid anunexpected downshift during acceleration.

ROCKING OUT

!!! CAUTION !!!



WILL ONLY ENGAGE IF THE THROTTLE ISCLOSED IN THE NEXT THREE SECONDS.THAT CAN CAUSE A SUDDEN MOVEMENT

OF THE VEHICLE. LEAVING THE THROTTLEOPEN LONGER THAN THREE SECONDS



DO NOT MAKE N (NEUTRAL)-TO-D(DRIVE)OR DIRECTIONAL SHIFT CHANGES WHEN

DO NOT SHIFTLight

OFF

OFF

OFF

Operation



Full operation inall ranges

Sump OilTemperature

-25 °F and below

-24 °Fto 19 °F

20 °F andabove

Update B

_OG

B02A

QU

pdate B_O

GB

02AQ

OP

ER

AT

ING

INS

TR

UC

TIO

NS

OP

ER

AT

ING

INS

TR

UC

TIO

NS



C2045

C2045

THE ENGINE RPM IS ABOVE IDLE. IF THEWHEELS ARE STUCK AND NOT TURNING,DO NOT APPLY FULL POWER FOR MORETHAN 30 SECONDS. FULL POWER FOR

MORE THAN 30 SECONDS UNDER THESECONDITIONS WILL CAUSE THE

TRANSMISSION TO OVERHEAT. IF THETRANSMISSION OVERHEATS, SHIFT TON (NEUTRAL) AND OPERATE THE ENGINE

AT 1,200 - 1,500 RPM UNTIL ITCOOLS (2-3 MINUTES).

If the vehicle is stuck in deep sand, snow, ormud, it may be possible to rock it out. Shift to D(Drive) and apply steady, light throttle (never fullthrottle). When the vehicle has rocked forward asfar as it will go, apply and hold the coach servicebrakes. Allow the engine to return to idle; thenselect R (Reverse). Release the brakes and applya steady, light throttle and allow the vehicle torock in R (Reverse) as far as it will go. Again,apply and hold the service brakes and allow theengine to return to idle. This procedure may berepeated in D (Drive) and R (Reverse) if eachdirectional shift continues to move the bus a

greater distance. Never make N (Neutral)-to-D(Drive) or directional shift changes when theengine rpm is above idle.

HIGH TRANSMISSION FLUIDTEMPERATURE

If the transmission overheats, the ECU will inhibitoperation in the higher ranges.

If the transmission overheats during normaloperations, check the fluid level in thetransmission. (Refer to the Fluid CheckProcedures as described in the "Maintenance"section.)

If the engine coolant temperature gauge indicatesa high temperature, the transmission is probablyoverheated. Stop the vehicle and check thecooling system. If it appears to be functioningproperly, run the engine at 1,200 - 1,500 rpm withthe transmission in N (Neutral). This shouldreduce the transmission and engine temperaturesto normal operating levels in 2 or 3 minutes. Iftemperature does not decrease, reduce the enginerpm.

THE ENGINE RPM IS ABOVE IDLE. IF THEWHEELS ARE STUCK AND NOT TURNING,DO NOT APPLY FULL POWER FOR MORETHAN 30 SECONDS. FULL POWER FOR

MORE THAN 30 SECONDS UNDER THESECONDITIONS WILL CAUSE THE

TRANSMISSION TO OVERHEAT. IF THETRANSMISSION OVERHEATS, SHIFT TON (NEUTRAL) AND OPERATE THE ENGINE

AT 1,200 - 1,500 RPM UNTIL ITCOOLS (2-3 MINUTES).

If the vehicle is stuck in deep sand, snow, ormud, it may be possible to rock it out. Shift to D(Drive) and apply steady, light throttle (never fullthrottle). When the vehicle has rocked forward asfar as it will go, apply and hold the coach servicebrakes. Allow the engine to return to idle; thenselect R (Reverse). Release the brakes and applya steady, light throttle and allow the vehicle torock in R (Reverse) as far as it will go. Again,apply and hold the service brakes and allow theengine to return to idle. This procedure may berepeated in D (Drive) and R (Reverse) if eachdirectional shift continues to move the bus a

greater distance. Never make N (Neutral)-to-D(Drive) or directional shift changes when theengine rpm is above idle.

HIGH TRANSMISSION FLUIDTEMPERATURE

If the transmission overheats, the ECU will inhibitoperation in the higher ranges.

If the transmission overheats during normaloperations, check the fluid level in thetransmission. (Refer to the Fluid CheckProcedures as described in the "Maintenance"section.)

If the engine coolant temperature gauge indicatesa high temperature, the transmission is probablyoverheated. Stop the vehicle and check thecooling system. If it appears to be functioningproperly, run the engine at 1,200 - 1,500 rpm withthe transmission in N (Neutral). This shouldreduce the transmission and engine temperaturesto normal operating levels in 2 or 3 minutes. Iftemperature does not decrease, reduce the enginerpm.

OP

ER

AT

ING

IN

ST

RU

CT

ION

SO

PE

RA

TIN

G I

NS

TR

UC

TIO

NS

Upd

ate

B_O

GB

02A

QU

pdat

e B

_OG

B02

AQ



C2045

C2045

!!! CAUTION !!!

THE ENGINE SHOULD NEVER BEOPERATED FOR MORE THAN 30

SECONDS AT FULL THROTTLE WITHTHE TRANSMISSION IN RANGE AND THE

OUTPUT STALLED. PROLONGEDOPERATION OF THIS TYPE WILL CAUSE

THE TRANSMISSION FLUID TEMPERATURETO BECOME EXCESSIVELY HIGH ANDWILL RESULT IN SEVERE OVERHEAT

DAMAGE TO THE TRANSMISSION.

If the engine coolant temperature gauge indicates ahigh temperature, an engine problem is indicated. Ifhigh temperature in either the engine or transmis-sion persists, stop the engine and have the over-heating condition investigated by a technician.

KICK-DOWN

When you need maximum effort fast (e.g. forovertaking or hill-climbing), depress the throttlepedal through the detent marking the full throttleposition.

This action causes earlier-than-normal downshiftsand delays upshifts until maximum engine speedis reached.

ZF ASTRONICTRANSMISSION

Refer to "ZF Astronic transmission" in Section 6.

!!! CAUTION !!!

THE ENGINE SHOULD NEVER BEOPERATED FOR MORE THAN 30

SECONDS AT FULL THROTTLE WITHTHE TRANSMISSION IN RANGE AND THE

OUTPUT STALLED. PROLONGEDOPERATION OF THIS TYPE WILL CAUSE

THE TRANSMISSION FLUID TEMPERATURETO BECOME EXCESSIVELY HIGH ANDWILL RESULT IN SEVERE OVERHEAT

DAMAGE TO THE TRANSMISSION.

If the engine coolant temperature gauge indicates ahigh temperature, an engine problem is indicated. Ifhigh temperature in either the engine or transmis-sion persists, stop the engine and have the over-heating condition investigated by a technician.

KICK-DOWN

When you need maximum effort fast (e.g. forovertaking or hill-climbing), depress the throttlepedal through the detent marking the full throttleposition.

This action causes earlier-than-normal downshiftsand delays upshifts until maximum engine speedis reached.

ZF ASTRONICTRANSMISSION

Refer to ZF Astronic transmission" in Section 6.

Update B

_OG

B02A

QU

pdate B_O

GB

02AQ

OP

ER

AT

ING

INS

TR

UC

TIO

NS

OP

ER

AT

ING

INS

TR

UC

TIO

NS



C2045

C2045

CRUISE CONTROL/FAST IDLE

These switches have a dual purpose depending onvehicle speed:

• parked vehicle: fast idle• vehicle speed higher than 30 mph (20 mph for a

Detroit Diesel engine): cruise control

CRUISE CONTROL

!!! CAUTION !!!

DO NOT USE CRUISE CONTROL WHENTHE ROAD IS SLIPPERY, IN HEAVY

TRAFFIC, OR WHEN THE WEATHER ISINCLEMENT. LOSS OF VEHICLE

CONTROL CAN RESULT.

The cruise control has three modes: off, standbyand active.

Cruise control off

Place switch (1) in the "OFF" position.

Cruise control standby

Occurs, when switch (1) is put in the "ON"position.

Cruise control active

With switch (1) in the "ON" position, push andrelease switch (2) into the "SET/COAST" position.Release throttle pedal.

Momentarily pushing switch (2) into the "SET/COAST" position will establish a set speed at thespeedometer reading at the time of pushing.

T01226

Cruise control/fast idle switches

CRUISE CONTROL/FAST IDLE

These switches have a dual purpose depending onvehicle speed:

• parked vehicle: fast idle• vehicle speed higher than 30 mph (20 mph for a

Detroit Diesel engine): cruise control

CRUISE CONTROL

!!! CAUTION !!!

DO NOT USE CRUISE CONTROL WHENTHE ROAD IS SLIPPERY, IN HEAVY

TRAFFIC, OR WHEN THE WEATHER ISINCLEMENT. LOSS OF VEHICLE

CONTROL CAN RESULT.

The cruise control has three modes: off, standbyand active.

Cruise control off

Place switch (1) in the "OFF" position.

Cruise control standby

Occurs, when switch (1) is put in the "ON"position.

Cruise control active

With switch (1) in the "ON" position, push andrelease switch (2) into the "SET/COAST"position. Release throttle pedal.

Momentarily pushing switch (2) into the "SET/COAST" position will establish a set speed at thespeedometer reading at the time of pushing.

T01226


OP

ER

AT

ING

IN

ST

RU

CT

ION

SO

PE

RA

TIN

G I

NS

TR

UC

TIO

NS

Upd

ate

B_O

GB

02A

QU

pdat

e B

_OG

B02

AQ



C2045

C2045

Momentarily pushing switch (2) into the"RESUME/ACCEL." position will return cruisecontrol to the previously established cruise speed.

Once the cruise control is in the active mode, thethrottle pedal can be used to increase the vehiclespeed beyond the cruise control set speed. Whenthe pedal is released, cruise control is reactivatedwhen vehicle speed reaches the previously setspeed.

Cruise control is deactivated and returns to thestandby mode in several ways: the brake pedal ispressed, Jake Brake or ZF Intarder is switched on,the engine speed (rpm) drops below 1,000 rpm(1,100 rpm for Detroit Diesel engine), the vehiclespeed (mph) drops below 30 mph (20 mph forDetroit Diesel engine).

To return to active mode if cruise control hasbeen disengaged, the operator must push andrelease switch (2) either into "SET/COAST"position or into "RESUME/ACCEL." position.

The vehicle speed can be increased withoutdepressing throttle pedal, by holding switch (2) inthe "RESUME/ACCEL." position; the speed atrelease becomes the new cruise control setspeed.

By holding switch (2) in the "SET/COAST"position, the vehicle speed decreases until switchis released; the speed at release becomes thenew cruise control set speed.

FAST IDLE

The switches are used for fast idle adjustment, if:• throttle pedal is released• brake pedal is released• parking brake is applied• transmission is in "Neutral"

Fast idle is needed to maintain sufficient electricalpower and HVAC compressor rpm's to run theHVAC system while parked.

Cummins engine

With switch (1) in the "ON" position, push andrelease switch (2) into the:

• "RESUME/ACCEL." position to cause theengine to idle at a speed of 1,200 rpm;

• "SET/COAST" position to cause the engine toidle at a speed of 900 rpm.

Momentarily pushing switch (2) into the"RESUME/ACCEL." position will return cruisecontrol to the previously established cruise speed.

Once the cruise control is in the active mode, thethrottle pedal can be used to increase the vehiclespeed beyond the cruise control set speed. Whenthe pedal is released, cruise control is reactivatedwhen vehicle speed reaches the previously setspeed.

Cruise control is deactivated and returns to thestandby mode in several ways: the brake pedal ispressed, Jake Brake or ZF Intarder is switched on,the engine speed (rpm) drops below 1,000 rpm(1,100 rpm for Detroit Diesel engine), the vehiclespeed (mph) drops below 30 mph (20 mph forDetroit Diesel engine).

To return to active mode if cruise control hasbeen disengaged, the operator must push andrelease switch (2) either into "SET/COAST"position or into "RESUME/ACCEL." position.

The vehicle speed can be increased withoutdepressing throttle pedal, by holding switch (2) inthe "RESUME/ACCEL." position; the speed atrelease becomes the new cruise control setspeed.

By holding switch (2) in the "SET/COAST"position, the vehicle speed decreases until switchis released; the speed at release becomes thenew cruise control set speed.

FAST IDLE

The switches are used for fast idle adjustment, if:• throttle pedal is released• brake pedal is released• parking brake is applied• transmission is in "Neutral"

Fast idle is needed to maintain sufficient electricalpower and HVAC compressor rpm's to run theHVAC system while parked.

Cummins engine

With switch (1) in the "ON" position, push andrelease switch (2) into the:

• "RESUME/ACCEL." position to cause theengine to idle at a speed of 1,200 rpm;

• "SET/COAST" position to cause the engine toidle at a speed of 900 rpm.

Update B

_OG

B02A

QU

pdate B_O

GB

02AQ

OP

ER

AT

ING

INS

TR

UC

TIO

NS

OP

ER

AT

ING

INS

TR

UC

TIO

NS



C2045

C2045

Then push and release switch(2) in the:

• "RESUME/ACCEL." position to increase theengine fast idle speed with 25 rpm. Thishappens every time the switch is momentarilypushed in the "RESUME/ACCEL" position. Themaximum fast idle speed is full rpm.

• "SET/COAST" position to decrease the enginefast idle speed with 25 rpm. This happens everytime the switch is momentarily pushed in the"SET/COAST" position. The minimum fast idlespeed is 600 rpm.

Fast idle is deactivated in several ways: the brakepedal or throttle pedal is pressed, switch (1) isplaced in the "OFF" position or Jake Brake controllever is moved.

Caterpillar engine

With switch (1) in the "ON" position, push andrelease switch (2) into the "SET/COAST" positionto cause the engine to idle at a speed of 900 rpm.To cause the engine to idle at a speed of 1,200rpm, push and release switch (2) into the "SET/COAST" position twice.

To go back from 1,200 to 900 rpm, push andrelease switch (2) into the "RESUME/ACCEL"position.

By holding switch (2) in the "RESUME/ACCEL."position, the fast idle speed will increase until theswitch is released. The maximum idle speed is1,600 rpm.By holding switch (2) in the "SET/COAST" position,the fast idle speed will decrease until the switch isreleased. The minimum fast idle speed is 850 rpm.

Fast idle is deactivated in several ways: the brakepedal or throttle pedal is pressed, switch (1) isplaced in the "OFF" position, Jake Brake controllever is moved or transmission is set into gear.


With switch (1) in the "ON" position, push andrelease switch (2) in the "RESUME/ACCEL"position to bring the fast idle to 1,000 rpm.

T01226


By holding switch (2) in the "RESUME/ACCEL."position, the fast idle speed will increase until theswitch is released. The maximum idle speed is1,600 rpm.By holding switch (2) in the "SET/COAST" position,the fast idle speed will decrease until the switch isreleased. The minimum fast idle speed is 850 rpm.

Fast idle is deactivated in several ways: the brakepedal or throttle pedal is pressed, switch (1) isplaced in the "OFF" position, Jake Brake controllever is moved or transmission is set into gear.


With switch (1) in the "ON" position, push andrelease switch (2) in the "RESUME/ACCEL"position to bring the fast idle to 1,000 rpm.

Then push and release switch(2) in the:

• "RESUME/ACCEL." position to increase theengine fast idle speed with 25 rpm. Thishappens every time the switch is momentarilypushed in the "RESUME/ACCEL" position. Themaximum fast idle speed is full rpm.

• "SET/COAST" position to decrease the enginefast idle speed with 25 rpm. This happens everytime the switch is momentarily pushed in the"SET/COAST" position. The minimum fast idlespeed is 600 rpm.

Fast idle is deactivated in several ways: the brakepedal or throttle pedal is pressed, switch (1) isplaced in the "OFF" position or Jake Brake controllever is moved.

Caterpillar engine

With switch (1) in the "ON" position, push andrelease switch (2) into the "SET/COAST" positionto cause the engine to idle at a speed of 900 rpm.To cause the engine to idle at a speed of 1,200rpm, push and release switch (2) into the "SET/COAST" position twice.

To go back from 1,200 to 900 rpm, push andrelease switch (2) into the "RESUME/ACCEL"position.

T01226


OP

ER

AT

ING

IN

ST

RU

CT

ION

SO

PE

RA

TIN

G I

NS

TR

UC

TIO

NS

Upd

ate

B_O

GB

02A

QU

pdat

e B

_OG

B02

AQ



C2045

C2045

POWER STEERING

Should hydraulic assistance fail while driving,steering is still possible but requires extra manualeffort. Since steering movements andmaneuvering will be slower and more difficult toperform, adopt a correspondingly reduced speedand take the coach to the workshop as soon aspossible.

!!! CAUTION !!!

REMEMBER THAT A LOSS OF STEERINGPOWER ASSISTANCE WILL NEVER LEAVEYOU WITH AN UNSTEERABLE VEHICLE;

THE RESISTANCE AT THE STEERINGWHEEL WILL INCREASE CONSIDERABLY.AS THIS TYPE OF BREAKDOWN IS RAREAND THEREFORE WILL HAPPEN RATHER

UNEXPECTEDLY, YOUR FIRSTIMPRESSION MIGHT BE THAT THE

STEERING SYSTEM IS LOCKED.

BRAKES

JAKE BRAKE

The Jake Brake is an engine retarder that usesthe engine itself to add in slowing and controllingthe vehicle. When actuated, the Jake Brakealters the operation of the engine's exhaust valves,so that the engine works as a power absorbing aircompressor. This provides a retarding action tothe wheels.

The Jake Brake is controlled by a three-positionswitch (lever on earlier vehicles) on the instrumentpanel. The switch offers two stages of increasedpower from the Jake Brake:

Former switch

First position: 50% engine braking

Second position: 100% engine braking

Third position: 0% engine braking

Current switch




POWER STEERING

Should hydraulic assistance fail while driving,steering is still possible but requires extra manualeffort. Since steering movements andmaneuvering will be slower and more difficult toperform, adopt a correspondingly reduced speedand take the coach to the workshop as soon aspossible.

!!! CAUTION !!!

REMEMBER THAT A LOSS OF STEERINGPOWER ASSISTANCE WILL NEVER LEAVE

YOU WITH AN UNSTEERABLE VEHICLE;THE RESISTANCE AT THE STEERING

WHEEL WILL INCREASE CONSIDERABLY.AS THIS TYPE OF BREAKDOWN IS RAREAND THEREFORE WILL HAPPEN RATHER

UNEXPECTEDLY, YOUR FIRSTIMPRESSION MIGHT BE THAT THE

STEERING SYSTEM IS LOCKED.

BRAKES

JAKE BRAKE

The Jake Brake is an engine retarder that usesthe engine itself to add in slowing and controllingthe vehicle. When actuated, the Jake Brakealters the operation of the engine's exhaust valves,so that the engine works as a power absorbing aircompressor. This provides a retarding action tothe wheels.

The Jake Brake is controlled by a three-positionswitch (lever on earlier vehicles) on the instrumentpanel. The switch offers two stages of increasedpower from the Jake Brake:

Former switch




Current switch




0%

50%

100%

100%

0%

50%

0%

50%

100%

100%

0%

50%

Update B

_OG

B02A

QU

pdate B_O

GB

02AQ

OP

ER

AT

ING

INS

TR

UC

TIO

NS

OP

ER

AT

ING

INS

TR

UC

TIO

NS



C2045

C2045

SERVICE BRAKE (FOOT BRAKE)

The brake pedal acts on all wheels of the coachthrough a triple-circuit compressed air system.

!!! CAUTION !!!

FULL BRAKING POWER MAY NOT BE

AVAILABLE, WHEN BRAKES ARE WET.

IF THE VEHICLE HAS BEEN DRIVENTHROUGH WATER, OR AFTER WASHING

IT, DRY THE BRAKES BY LIGHTLYAPPLYING THE SERVICE BRAKE SEVERALTIMES WHEN THE COACH IS IN MOTION.

Keep an eye on the dashboard air-pressuregauges. In normal service conditions, pointers ofthese instruments should register between 105and 135 psi.

When an air-pressure warning light comes onwhile driving, stop the coach aside the road andcall for technical assistance.

This light on the instrument panelshows when the Jake Brake is "on".

!!! CAUTION !!!

THE JAKE BRAKE CANNOT HOLD THECOACH STATIONARY. DO NOT USE IT

AS A PARKING BRAKE.

NOTE

When the Jake Brake is switched on ,you only have to lift your foot from thethrottle pedal and you start braking.

ZF INTARDER


This light on the instrument panelshows when the Jake Brake is "on".

!!! CAUTION !!!

THE JAKE BRAKE CANNOT HOLD THECOACH STATIONARY. DO NOT USE IT

AS A PARKING BRAKE.

NOTE

When the Jake Brake is switched on ,you only have to lift your foot from thethrottle pedal and you start braking.

ZF INTARDER


SERVICE BRAKE (FOOT BRAKE)

The brake pedal acts on all wheels of the coachthrough a triple-circuit compressed air system.

!!! CAUTION !!!

FULL BRAKING POWER MAY NOT BE

AVAILABLE, WHEN BRAKES ARE WET.IF THE VEHICLE HAS BEEN DRIVEN

THROUGH WATER, OR AFTER WASHING IT, DRY THE BRAKES BY LIGHTLY

APPLYING THE SERVICE BRAKE SEVERALTIMES WHEN THE COACH IS IN MOTION.

Keep an eye on the dashboard air-pressuregauges. In normal service conditions, pointers ofthese instruments should register between 105and 135 psi.

When an air-pressure warning light comes onwhile driving, stop the coach aside the road andcall for technical assistance.

OP

ER

AT

ING

IN

ST

RU

CT

ION

SO

PE

RA

TIN

G I

NS

TR

UC

TIO

NS

Upd

ate

B_O

GB

02A

QU

pdat

e B

_OG

B02

AQ



C2045

C2045

PARKING BRAKE

!!! CAUTION !!!

THE PARKING BRAKE SHOULD BEAPPLIED BEFORE LEAVING THE DRIVER'SSEAT. THIS WILL HELP KEEP THE COACHFROM MOVING UNEXPECTEDLY, WHICHCOULD RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY

AND/OR PROPERTY DAMAGE.

The parking brake operates on the drive wheels.Air is used in this system to keep the brakesOFF. A failure in the air supply will bring thebrakes into operation automatically.

The parking brakecontrol valve islocated on the R.H.lower console.

• To apply the parking brake: pull control valveknob up.

• To release the parking brake, push the controlvalve knob down.

This light on the instrument panel willcome on, when the parking brake is on.

T03734

PARKING BRAKE

!!! CAUTION !!!

THE PARKING BRAKE SHOULD BEAPPLIED BEFORE LEAVING THE DRIVER'SSEAT. THIS WILL HELP KEEP THE COACHFROM MOVING UNEXPECTEDLY, WHICHCOULD RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY

AND/OR PROPERTY DAMAGE.

The parking brake operates on the drive wheels.Air is used in this system to keep the brakesOFF. A failure in the air supply will bring thebrakes into operation automatically.

The parking brakecontrol valve islocated on the R.H.lower console.

• To apply the parking brake: pull control valveknob up.

• To release the parking brake, push the controlvalve knob down.

This light on the instrument panel willcome on, when the parking brake is on.

T03734

Update B

_OG

B02A

QU

pdate B_O

GB

02AQ

OP

ER

AT

ING

INS

TR

UC

TIO

NS

OP

ER

AT

ING

INS

TR

UC

TIO

NS



C2045

C2045

ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM (ABS)The purpose of ABS is to maintain vehicle stabilityand control during braking, and to minimize thestopping distance regardless of road conditions.

NOTE

Having ABS on your vehicle should nottempt you to reckless driving. Even theshortest possible braking distance maybe too long. Also bear in mind that the

vehicles behind you may not beequipped with ABS and may not be

able to stop as fast as you can.

In order to benefit from the ABS equipment, youshould not operate the brake pedal in a pumpingmanner as you would in case of a brake systemwithout ABS on slippery roads. Hold the brakepedal once it is pressed down. ABS automaticallyapplies the brakes up to five times per second,obviously much faster than you could do pumpingthe brake pedal.

If this light comes on during normalcoach operation, the whole or a part ofthe system is defective. Since thebraking power is not affected, you may

drive on. Still you should reckon with a higherskidding risk. Report the fault to the workshoppersonnel as soon as you return.

AUTOMATIC TRACTIONCONTROL (ASR)

ASR helps improve traction when coach is onslippery surfaces by reducing drive wheeloverspin.ASR works automatically in two differentways:

1. If a drive wheel starts to spin, ASR applies airpressure to brake the wheel. This transfersengine torque to the wheels with bettertraction.

2. If all drive wheels spin, ASR reduces enginetorque to provide improved traction.

ASR turns itself on and off, you do not have to selectthis feature.

ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM (ABS)The purpose of ABS is to maintain vehicle stabilityand control during braking, and to minimize thestopping distance regardless of road conditions.

NOTE

Having ABS on your vehicle should nottempt you to reckless driving. Even theshortest possible braking distance maybe too long. Also bear in mind that the

vehicles behind you may not beequipped with ABS and may not be

able to stop as fast as you can.

In order to benefit from the ABS equipment, youshould not operate the brake pedal in a pumpingmanner as you would in case of a brake systemwithout ABS on slippery roads. Hold the brakepedal once it is pressed down. ABS automaticallyapplies the brakes up to five times per second,obviously much faster than you could do pumpingthe brake pedal.

If this light comes on during normalcoach operation, the whole or a part ofthe system is defective. Since thebraking power is not affected, you may

drive on. Still you should reckon with a higherskidding risk. Report the fault to the workshoppersonnel as soon as you return.

AUTOMATIC TRACTIONCONTROL (ASR)

ASR helps improve traction when coach is onslippery surfaces by reducing drive wheeloverspin.ASR works automatically in two differentways:

1. If a drive wheel starts to spin, ASR applies airpressure to brake the wheel. This transfersengine torque to the wheels with bettertraction.

2. If all drive wheels spin, ASR reduces enginetorque to provide improved traction.

ASR turns itself on and off, you do not have to selectthis feature.

OP

ER

AT

ING

IN

ST

RU

CT

ION

SO

PE

RA

TIN

G I

NS

TR

UC

TIO

NS

Upd

ate

B_O

GB

02A

QU

pdat

e B

_OG

B02

AQ



C2045

C2045

This light comes on when the drive wheelsspin during acceleration, indicating ASR isactive. It will extinguish when the drivewheels stop spinning.

Deep snow and mud switchThis funcion increases available traction on extra softsurfaces like slush or mud, or on snow-coveredupgrades, by slightly increasing the permissiblewheel spin.

When this feature is selected, the ASRlight blinks continuously.

To deactivate this feature press switchagain or turn off ignition.

RAISE/LOWER SYSTEM(OPTIONAL)

By actuating the "Raise/Lower" switchon the instrument panel, the height ofthe suspension air bellows can eitherbe increased or decreased by about 2inches in relation to the normal

operating height. This allows the vehicle to passmore easily under overhead spans or on steep oruneven ground.

!!! CAUTION !!!

THE RAISE / LOWER SYSTEM ISTO BE OPERATED ONLY AT SLOW

MANOEUVERING SPEED, OR DAMAGETO THE VEHICLE COULD RESULT.

A buzzer will sound as long as the raise/lowersystem is activated.

To activate the

• lower system: momentarily push on lower partof switch.

• raise system: momentarily push on upper partof switch.

To deactivate the

• lower system: momentarily push on lower partof switch again.

• raise system: momentarily push on upper partof switch again.

ASR

This light comes on when the drive wheelsspin during acceleration, indicating ASR isactive. It will extinguish when the drivewheels stop spinning.


This funcion increases available traction on extra softsurfaces like slush or mud, or on snow-coveredupgrades, by slightly increasing the permissiblewheel spin.

When this feature is selected, the ASRlight blinks continuously.

To deactivate this feature press switchagain or turn off ignition.

RAISE/LOWER SYSTEM(OPTIONAL)

By actuating the "Raise/Lower" switchon the instrument panel, the height ofthe suspension air bellows can eitherbe increased or decreased by about 2inches in relation to the normal

operating height. This allows the vehicle to passmore easily under overhead spans or on steep oruneven ground.

!!! CAUTION !!!

THE RAISE / LOWER SYSTEM ISTO BE OPERATED ONLY AT SLOW

MANOEUVERING SPEED, OR DAMAGETO THE VEHICLE COULD RESULT.

A buzzer will sound as long as the raise/lowersystem is activated.

To activate the

• lower system: momentarily push on lower partof switch.

• raise system: momentarily push on upper partof switch.

To deactivate the

• lower system: momentarily push on lower partof switch again.

• raise system: momentarily push on upper partof switch again.

ASR

Update B

_OG

B02A

QU

pdate B_O

GB

02AQ

OP

ER

AT

ING

INS

TR

UC

TIO

NS

OP

ER

AT

ING

INS

TR

UC

TIO

NS



C2045

C2045

FRONT LOWER SYSTEM

This system is designed to lower thefront of the coach to provide a lowerpassenger door step height.

!!! CAUTION !!!

BEFORE LOWERING THEFRONT OF THE COACH, TAKE CARE

THAT PEOPLE OUTSIDE OF THE COACHSTAND CLEAR OF THE ENTRANCE

DOOR AND WELL BACK OF THE CURB TO HELP AVOID PERSONAL INJURY.

The front lower system operates only when theparking brake is applied and the entrance dooris closed.

1. Push rocker switch to lower the front end ofthe coach.This will automatically apply the door brakeand disconnect the throttle pedal. A buzzerwill sound as long as the coach is lowering.

3. Wait until the buzzer stops to sound andopen the entrance door.If you open the entrance door when thebuzzer sounds, the coach will be brought tonormal ride height immediately.

REAR RAISE SYSTEM

This feature is installed to prevent rearbumper scuffing in off-highwaysituations. This feature will raise therear of the vehicle to allow additionalrear body clearance.To activate the rear raise system:momentarily push lower part ofswitch.

To deactivate the rear raise system: momentarilypush lower part of switch again.

!!! CAUTION !!!

THIS SYSTEM IS TO BE OPERATED ONLYAT LOW MANOEUVERING SPEED.

FRONT LOWER SYSTEM

This system is designed to lower thefront of the coach to provide a lowerpassenger door step height.

!!! CAUTION !!!

BEFORE LOWERING THEFRONT OF THE COACH, TAKE CARE

THAT PEOPLE OUTSIDE OF THE COACHSTAND CLEAR OF THE ENTRANCE

DOOR AND WELL BACK OF THE CURB TO HELP AVOID PERSONAL INJURY.

The front lower system operates only when theparking brake is applied and the entrance dooris closed.

1. Push rocker switch to lower the front end ofthe coach.This will automatically apply the door brakeand disconnect the throttle pedal. A buzzerwill sound as long as the coach is lowering.

3. Wait until the buzzer stops to sound andopen the entrance door.If you open the entrance door when thebuzzer sounds, the coach will be brought tonormal ride height immediately.

REAR RAISE SYSTEM

This feature is installed to prevent rearbumper scuffing in off-highwaysituations. This feature will raise therear of the vehicle to allow additionalrear body clearance.To activate the rear raise system:momentarily push lower part ofswitch.

To deactivate the rear raise system: momentarilypush lower part of switch again.

!!! CAUTION !!!

THIS SYSTEM IS TO BE OPERATED ONLYAT LOW MANOEUVERING SPEED.

OP

ER

AT

ING

IN

ST

RU

CT

ION

SO

PE

RA

TIN

G I

NS

TR

UC

TIO

NS

Upd

ate

B_O

GB

02A

QU

pdat

e B

_OG

B02

AQ



C2045

C2045

TAG AXLE UNLOADING(OPTIONAL)

!!! CAUTION !!!

THE TAG AXLE UNLOADING SYSTEM MUSTBE USED ONLY IN EMERGENCY, SUCH AS TO

DRIVE OFF ON A SLIPPERY ROAD ORTO MANOEUVRE THE VEHICLE. TAG AXLE

UNLOADING WILL RESULT IN ANOVERWEIGHT SITUATION ON THE

DRIVE AXLE .

This system is used to improve the traction whenthe road surface is slippery.

Rocker switch

The tag axle air bellows are unloadedas this rocker switch is depressed.The system will be switched offautomatically when the vehicle speedreaches or exceeds 10 mph.Consequently, the system will be

switched on again when the vehicle speed fallsbelow 10 mph with the switch depressed.

Spring-loaded type switch

The tag axle air bellows are unloadedas the lower part of this switch ismomentarily depressed. The systemwill be switched off automaticallywhen the vehicle speed reaches orexceeds 10 mph, or after 1 minute.

TAG AXLE UNLOADING(OPTIONAL)

!!! CAUTION !!!

THE TAG AXLE UNLOADING SYSTEM MUSTBE USED ONLY IN EMERGENCY, SUCH AS TO

DRIVE OFF ON A SLIPPERY ROAD ORTO MANOEUVRE THE VEHICLE. TAG AXLE

UNLOADING WILL RESULT IN ANOVERWEIGHT SITUATION ON THE

DRIVE AXLE .

This system is used to improve the traction whenthe road surface is slippery.

Rocker switch

The tag axle air bellows are unloadedas this rocker switch is depressed.The system will be switched offautomatically when the vehicle speedreaches or exceeds 10 mph.Consequently, the system will be

switched on again when the vehicle speed fallsbelow 10 mph with the switch depressed.

Spring-loaded type switch

The tag axle air bellows are unloadedas the lower part of this switch ismomentarily depressed. The systemwill be switched off automaticallywhen the vehicle speed reaches orexceeds 10 mph, or after 1 minute.

Update B

_OG

B02A

QU

pdate B_O

GB

02AQ

OP

ER

AT

ING

INS

TR

UC

TIO

NS

OP

ER

AT

ING

INS

TR

UC

TIO

NS



C2045

C2045

ENTRANCE DOOR

DOOR CONTROL WITH DASHBOARDSWITCH

To open the doorMomentarily depress the switch.

To close the doorMomentarily depress the same switchagain.

DOOR CONTROL FROM THEOUTSIDEThe entrance door can be opened/closed bymeans of push button(1) recessed into the doorleaf.

To open the doorMomentarily depresspush button(1).

To close the doorMomentarily depressthe same push buttonagain.

TO LOCK DOOR FROM THE INSIDEThe door can be lockedfrom the inside by turning theknob to the left. Unlock byturning the knob to the right.

TO LOCK/UNLOCK DOOR FROM THEOUTSIDE

The entrance doorcan also be lockedfrom the outside.First insert the keyinto lock (1) andturn the key aquarter turn to theright (in this positionyou cannot remove

the key). Then, turn black handle (2) a quarter turnto the left to lock the door. Return the key aquarter turn to the left and remove the key. Nowthe door is locked.

T03664

T04280

T03663

ENTRANCE DOOR

DOOR CONTROL WITH DASHBOARDSWITCH

To open the doorMomentarily depress the switch.

To close the doorMomentarily depress the same switchagain.

DOOR CONTROL FROM THEOUTSIDEThe entrance door can be opened/closed bymeans of push button(1) recessed into the doorleaf.

To open the doorMomentarily depresspush button(1).

To close the doorMomentarily depressthe same push buttonagain.

TO LOCK DOOR FROM THE INSIDEThe door can be lockedfrom the inside by turning theknob to the left. Unlock byturning the knob to the right.

TO LOCK/UNLOCK DOOR FROM THEOUTSIDE

The entrance doorcan also be lockedfrom the outside.First insert the keyinto lock (1) andturn the key aquarter turn to theright (in this positionyou cannot remove

the key). Then, turn black handle (2) a quarter turnto the left to lock the door. Return the key aquarter turn to the left and remove the key. Nowthe door is locked.

T03664

T04280

T03663

OP

ER

AT

ING

IN

ST

RU

CT

ION

SO

PE

RA

TIN

G I

NS

TR

UC

TIO

NS

Upd

ate

B_O

GB

02A

QU

pdat

e B

_OG

B02

AQ



C2045

C2045

To unlock: insert key into lock and turn key aquarter turn to the right. Turn black handle aquarter turn to the right. Turn key a quarter turn tothe left and remove the key. The door is unlockedagain.

!!! CAUTION !!!

THE DOOR MUST BE UNLOCKED BEFORECLOSING. FAILURE TO DO SO CAN

DAMAGE THE MECHANISM.

AUTOMATIC REOPENINGIf the door is blocked during the closing oropening cycle, the door movement will be reversedautomatically. It will remain in that position untilyou push again a control switch.

To unlock: insert key into lock and turn key aquarter turn to the right. Turn black handle aquarter turn to the right. Turn key a quarter turn tothe left and remove the key. The door is unlockedagain.

!!! CAUTION !!!

THE DOOR MUST BE UNLOCKED BEFORECLOSING. FAILURE TO DO SO CAN

DAMAGE THE MECHANISM.

AUTOMATIC REOPENINGIf the door is blocked during the closing oropening cycle, the door movement will be reversedautomatically. It will remain in that position untilyou push again a control switch.

Update B

_OG

B02A

QU

pdate B_O

GB

02AQ

OP

ER

AT

ING

INS

TR

UC

TIO

NS

OP

ER

AT

ING

INS

TR

UC

TIO

NS



C2045

C2045

LUGGAGE COMPARTMENTDOORS CENTRAL LOCKING

SYSTEM

The luggage compartment doors are locked byspring pressure of the single acting air cylindermounted in each door handle, and require airpressure to be released. They will be lockedautomatically when the parking brake is released.To unlock the doors, first apply the parking brake.Actuation of the control button, mounted on theR.H.lower console, will lock or unlock.

To unlock the doors:

1. Apply parking brake.

2. Push the control button to unlock the doors.

To lock the doors:

Pull the control button to lock the doors. Notethat the doors will be locked automaticallywhen you release the parking brake,regardless of the position of the control button.

LUGGAGE COMPARTMENTDOORS CENTRAL LOCKING

SYSTEM

The luggage compartment doors are locked byspring pressure of the single acting air cylindermounted in each door handle, and require airpressure to be released. They will be lockedautomatically when the parking brake is released.To unlock the doors, first apply the parking brake.Actuation of the control button, mounted on theR.H.lower console, will lock or unlock.

To unlock the doors:

1. Apply parking brake.

2. Push the control button to unlock the doors.

To lock the doors:

Pull the control button to lock the doors. Notethat the doors will be locked automaticallywhen you release the parking brake,regardless of the position of the control button.

OP

ER

AT

ING

IN

ST

RU

CT

ION

SO

PE

RA

TIN

G I

NS

TR

UC

TIO

NS

Upd

ate

B_O

GB

02A

RU

pdat

e B

_OG

B02

AR

SECTION 2 PAGE 2C-1DATE 10/2004


C2045

C2045

T03735

EMERGENCY CONDITIONSPARKING BRAKE

EMERGENCY RELEASE

AIR PRESSURE RELEASE

If the coach is forced to a sudden stop due to lackof air pressure in the service brake tanks(causing instant automatic application of thespring brakes), you can use the parking brakeemergency release to move the coach to a pointof safety.

Hold down the "EMERGENCY PARKING BRAKE

RELEASE" knob, which is mounted on thetray below the driver'swindow. As long asthe knob is pushed in,the spring brakeactuators on the driveaxle are supplied withcompressed air fromthe parking brakeemergency releasetank. This will releasethe parking brake.

NOTE

THIS PROCEDURE CAN ONLY BE DONE AFEW TIMES, UNTIL THE EMERGENCY TANKAIR PRESSURE HAS FALLEN TOO LOW TO

RELEASE THE BRAKES.

MECHANICAL RELEASE

!!! CAUTION !!!

ALWAYS CHOCK ROAD WHEELSPRIOR TO MECHANICALLY RELEASING

THE PARKING BRAKE.

TO REDUCE THE RISK OF PERSONALINJURY, INSERT SAFETY PROPS

BETWEEN THE COACH BODY EDGESAND THE GROUND BEFORE GETTING

BENEATH THE COACH.

To tow the coach in the event of the spring brakeactuator connecting lines being defective, eachdrive axle brake cylinder has a mechanicalrelease.

T03735

EMERGENCY CONDITIONSPARKING BRAKE

EMERGENCY RELEASE

AIR PRESSURE RELEASE

If the coach is forced to a sudden stop due to lackof air pressure in the service brake tanks(causing instant automatic application of thespring brakes), you can use the parking brakeemergency release to move the coach to a pointof safety.

Hold down the "EMERGENCY PARKING BRAKE

RELEASE" knob, which is mounted on thetray below the driver'swindow. As long asthe knob is pushed in,the spring brakeactuators on the driveaxle are supplied withcompressed air fromthe parking brakeemergency releasetank. This will releasethe parking brake.

NOTE

THIS PROCEDURE CAN ONLY BE DONE AFEW TIMES, UNTIL THE EMERGENCY TANKAIR PRESSURE HAS FALLEN TOO LOW TO

RELEASE THE BRAKES.

MECHANICAL RELEASE

!!! CAUTION !!!

ALWAYS CHOCK ROAD WHEELSPRIOR TO MECHANICALLY RELEASING

THE PARKING BRAKE.

TO REDUCE THE RISK OF PERSONALINJURY, INSERT SAFETY PROPS

BETWEEN THE COACH BODY EDGESAND THE GROUND BEFORE GETTING

BENEATH THE COACH.

To tow the coach in the event of the spring brakeactuator connecting lines being defective, eachdrive axle brake cylinder has a mechanicalrelease.

Update B

_OG

B02A

RU

pdate B_O

GB

02AR

OP

ER

AT

ING

INS

TR

UC

TIO

NS

OP

ER

AT

ING

INS

TR

UC

TIO

NS

PAGE 2C-2 DATE 10/2004 SECTION 2

DATE 10/2004PAGE 2C-2 SECTION 2

C2045

C2045

T03775

Parking brake release bolt on drive axle brakecylinder

The release bolt is located under the dust cap onthe front of each cylinder.

Chock wheels to prevent the coach from rollingaway. To mechanically release the spring brakeactuator, remove the dust cap (if installed) andturn the release bolt counterclockwise as far as itwill go. Do this for both brake cylinders of theaxle. The coach can now be towed. Refer to"LIFTING AND TOWING THE COACH WITH ATOW TRUCK" later in this Section.

As soon as the air supply has been restored,rescrew the bolt in to a torque of 35 to 38 ft.lbf.Reinstall the dust cap.

HAZARD WARNINGFLASHER

The hazard warningflasher has beendesigned to have allturn signal lights flashsimultaneously, whenthe "hazard" switch onthe R.H. dashboard ispushed. You canenergize the systemat any time. Use the

hazard warning flasher to warn other driverswhenever your coach becomes a traffic hazard.

T03017

DUST CAP

T03775

Parking brake release bolt on drive axle brakecylinder

The release bolt is located under the dust cap onthe front of each cylinder.

Chock wheels to prevent the coach from rollingaway. To mechanically release the spring brakeactuator, remove the dust cap (if installed) andturn the release bolt counterclockwise as far as itwill go. Do this for both brake cylinders of theaxle. The coach can now be towed. Refer to"LIFTING AND TOWING THE COACH WITH ATOW TRUCK" later in this Section.

As soon as the air supply has been restored,rescrew the bolt in to a torque of 35 to 38 ft.lbf.Reinstall the dust cap.

HAZARD WARNINGFLASHER

The hazard warningflasher has beendesigned to have allturn signal lights flashsimultaneously, whenthe "hazard" switch onthe R.H. dashboard ispushed. You canenergize the systemat any time. Use the

hazard warning flasher to warn other driverswhenever your coach becomes a traffic hazard.

T03017

DUST CAP

OP

ER

AT

ING

IN

ST

RU

CT

ION

SO

PE

RA

TIN

G I

NS

TR

UC

TIO

NS

Upd

ate

B_O

GB

02A

RU

pdat

e B

_OG

B02

AR



C2045

C2045

F04257

T02708

ENTRANCE DOOREMERGENCY OPERATION

The pneumatic dooractuation cylinder can bedepressurized by usingthe emergency releasehandles on the insideand outside (at the rightunder the front bumper)of the coach, which allowthe door leaf to be

pushed or pulled open manually. Turn the handlein the direction of the arrow to release thepressure. The handle must be returned to its initialposition before the door will operate automaticallyagain.

With the push-button mounted under the rubberboot (see photo) you can open/close the doorfrom inside should the electrical control circuit failwith the compressed air system still intact.

!!! CAUTION !!!

WHEN OPERATING THE DOOR VALVEMANUALLY, THE SAFETY RE-OPEN

SYSTEM WILL BE INOPERATIVE.

Location of emergency push-button to open/close the door in case of an electrical controlcircuit fail with compressed-air system stillintact (at the right of the stairway whenentering the vehicle)

F04257

T02708

ENTRANCE DOOREMERGENCY OPERATION

The pneumatic dooractuation cylinder canbe depressurized byusing the emergencyrelease handles on theinside and outside (at theright under the frontbumper) of the coach,which allow the door leaf

to be pushed or pulled open manually. Turn thehandle in the direction of the arrow to release thepressure. The handle must be returned to its initialposition before the door will operate automaticallyagain.

With the push-button mounted under the rubberboot (see photo) you can open/close the doorfrom inside should the electrical control circuit failwith the compressed air system still intact.

!!! CAUTION !!!

WHEN OPERATING THE DOOR VALVEMANUALLY, THE SAFETY RE-OPEN

SYSTEM WILL BE INOPERATIVE.

Location of emergency push-button to open/close the door in case of an electrical controlcircuit fail with compressed-air system stillintact (at the right of the stairway whenentering the vehicle)

Update B

_OG

B02A

RU

pdate B_O

GB

02AR

OP

ER

AT

ING

INS

TR

UC

TIO

NS

OP

ER

AT

ING

INS

TR

UC

TIO

NS



C2045

C2045

F04390

EMERGENCY OPERATIONOF RAISE, LOWER ANDREAR RAISE SYSTEM

1. Lower system control valve2. Rear raise system control valve2. Raise system control valve

The control valves are located behind a plate inthe rear wall of the luggage compartment. Theyare equipped with a push button mounted underthe rubber boot. This gives direct control overthese valves. This is a means to place the coachin the raised, lowered or rear raise position,

should the electrical control circuit fail with thecompressed-air system still intact.

To operate the valve manually:

1. Disconnect plug at solenoid.

2. Press down on rubber boot, depending whichvalve you take the coach will raise,lower orrear raise.

3. Press on rubber boot again to bring the coachin normal ride position.

F04390

EMERGENCY OPERATIONOF RAISE, LOWER ANDREAR RAISE SYSTEM

1. Lower system control valve2. Rear raise system control valve2. Raise system control valve

The control valves are located behind a plate inthe rear wall of the luggage compartment. Theyare equipped with a push button mounted underthe rubber boot. This gives direct control overthese valves. This is a means to place the coachin the raised, lowered or rear raise position,

should the electrical control circuit fail with thecompressed-air system still intact.

To operate the valve manually:

1. Disconnect plug at solenoid.

2. Press down on rubber boot, depending whichvalve you take the coach will raise,lower orrear raise.

3. Press on rubber boot again to bring the coachin normal ride position.

OP

ER

AT

ING

IN

ST

RU

CT

ION

SO

PE

RA

TIN

G I

NS

TR

UC

TIO

NS

Upd

ate

B_O

GB

02A

RU

pdat

e B

_OG

B02

AR



C2045

C2045

F04686

Location of screws to mechanically lock the fanclutch

COOLING FAN MECHANICALLOCKING DEVICE

In case of an electrical power or fan clutch failure,the fan clutch can be mechanically locked asfollows:

!!! CAUTION !!!

SET THE OVERRIDE SWITCH IN THEENGINE COMPARTMENT TO THE "OFF"POSITION TO PREVENT ACCIDENTAL

STARTING OF THE ENGINE

1. Set the starter override switch in the enginecompartment to the "off" position to preventaccidental starting of the engine.

2. Loosen the locking nuts of the two screws(wrench size: 13 mm) located at the front ofthe fan clutch (see photo).

3. Tighten both screws until the fan can not beturned by hand anymore (tightening torquescrews: 18 ft.lbf)

4. Tighten the locking nuts again.

!!! CAUTION !!!

THIS IS ONLY A TEMPORARY REPAIR.ALWAYS TIGHTEN BOTH

LOCKING SCREWS.

F04686

Location of screws to mechanically lock the fanclutch

COOLING FAN MECHANICALLOCKING DEVICE

In case of an electrical power or fan clutch failure,the fan clutch can be mechanically locked asfollows:

!!! CAUTION !!!

SET THE OVERRIDE SWITCH IN THEENGINE COMPARTMENT TO THE "OFF"POSITION TO PREVENT ACCIDENTAL

STARTING OF THE ENGINE

1. Set the starter override switch in the enginecompartment to the "off" position to preventaccidental starting of the engine.

2. Loosen the locking nuts of the two screws(wrench size: 13 mm) located at the front ofthe fan clutch (see photo).

3. Tighten both screws until the fan can not beturned by hand anymore (tightening torquescrews: 18 ft.lbf)

4. Tighten the locking nuts again.

!!! CAUTION !!!

THIS IS ONLY A TEMPORARY REPAIR.ALWAYS TIGHTEN BOTH

LOCKING SCREWS.

Update B

_OG

B02A

RU

pdate B_O

GB

02AR

OP

ER

AT

ING

INS

TR

UC

TIO

NS

OP

ER

AT

ING

INS

TR

UC

TIO

NS



C2045

C2045

T02688

PULLDOWN

PUSH

EMERGENCY EXITS

SIDE WINDOW EMERGENCY ESCAPESome side windows can be used as anemergency escape. They are hinged at the topand equipped with a handle to open from theinside, only in case of emergency. When a handleis not located within an occupant space of anadjacent seat, a label indicates the location of thenearest release mechanism.

To open:

1. Pull the window latch handle down.

2. Push the window out from the bottom.

To close:

1. From inside the vehicle, open the window atleast 45°.

2. Release the window so that it falls to close.

3. Check that emergency window is securelylatched.From inside the vehicle, firmly push outward onboth lower corners. No movement is allowed.From outside the vehicle, check the alignmentof the emergency side window. Lower edge ofan emergency window that is not properlylatched wil visibly stick out.

T02688

PULLDOWN

PUSH

EMERGENCY EXITS

SIDE WINDOW EMERGENCY ESCAPESome side windows can be used as anemergency escape. They are hinged at the topand equipped with a handle to open from theinside, only in case of emergency. When a handleis not located within an occupant space of anadjacent seat, a label indicates the location of thenearest release mechanism.

To open:

1. Pull the window latch handle down.

2. Push the window out from the bottom.

To close:

1. From inside the vehicle, open the window atleast 45°.

2. Release the window so that it falls to close.

3. Check that emergency window is securelylatched.From inside the vehicle, firmly push outward onboth lower corners. No movement is allowed.From outside the vehicle, check the alignmentof the emergency side window. Lower edge ofan emergency window that is not properlylatched wil visibly stick out.

OP

ER

AT

ING

IN

ST

RU

CT

ION

SO

PE

RA

TIN

G I

NS

TR

UC

TIO

NS

Upd

ate

B_O

GB

02A

RU

pdat

e B

_OG

B02

AR



C2045

C2045

F02302

ROOF EMERGENCY ESCAPE

The roof ventilators located in the front and rearsections of the coach can be opened from theinside to serve as escape hatches.

To open the escape hatch:

1. Push out the ventilaton hatch completely.

2. Push black tab (1) in the direction shown bythe arrow on release handle (2).

3. Push release handle (2) out.

LEAK IN HEATING SYSTEM

If engine coolant should be lost through a massiveleak in the vehicle heating system lines, switch offthe climate control switch and isolate the enginecooling system from the heating system byclosing the main isolating valves in the heatingsystem supply and return lines.

The isolating valves are located in the combustionheater compartment.

F02302

ROOF EMERGENCY ESCAPE

The roof ventilators located in the front and rearsections of the coach can be opened from theinside to serve as escape hatches.

To open the escape hatch:

1. Push out the ventilaton hatch completely.

2. Push black tab (1) in the direction shown bythe arrow on release handle (2).

3. Push release handle (2) out.

LEAK IN HEATING SYSTEM

If engine coolant should be lost through a massiveleak in the vehicle heating system lines, switch offthe climate control switch and isolate the enginecooling system from the heating system byclosing the main isolating valves in the heatingsystem supply and return lines.

The isolating valves are located in the combustionheater compartment.

Update B

_OG

B02A

RU

pdate B_O

GB

02AR

OP

ER

AT

ING

INS

TR

UC

TIO

NS

OP

ER

AT

ING

INS

TR

UC

TIO

NS



C2045

C2045

the lights will not flash but will be illuminated.The fault code will flash in the followingsequence:

First, the "ENGINE WARNING" light will flash.There will be a short pause, lasting for one totwo seconds. After that the flashing of the"STOP ENGINE" light will indicate the number ofthe recorded fault. There will be an one- or two-second pause between two consecutivenumbers. Then the "ENGINE WARNING" light willcome on, signaling that the end of the faultcode number has been reached. The three-digit

AN ENGINE WARNING LIGHTIS ILLUMINATED

For vehicle operation when an engine warninglight on the instrument panel illuminates, seeunder "WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS".Read fault codes before calling for assistance.

NOTE

ON MULTIPLEXED VEHICLES ONLY: THEENGINE DIAGNOSTIC LIGHTS ARE LOCATEDIN THE DIAGNOSTIC BOX. THE DIAGNOSTIC

BOX IS MOUNTED BEHIND AN ACCESSDOOR IN THE R.H. CONSOLE.

CUMMINS ISM ENGINE

Proceed as follows.

1. Unlock switch "A" and push lower part.


3. If any fault codes were active during systempower down, the "ENGINE WARNING" and "STOP

ENGINE" lights will begin to flash the code of therecorded faults. If no fault codes are recorded,

T03033

ISM Engine diagnostic switch on L.H. dashboard

DIA

ISM DIAGNOSE

the lights will not flash but will be illuminated.The fault code will flash in the followingsequence:

First, the "ENGINE WARNING" light will flash.There will be a short pause, lasting for one totwo seconds. After that the flashing of the"STOP ENGINE" light will indicate the number ofthe recorded fault. There will be an one- or two-second pause between two consecutivenumbers. Then the "ENGINE WARNING" light willcome on, signaling that the end of the faultcode number has been reached. The three-digit

AN ENGINE WARNING LIGHTIS ILLUMINATED

For vehicle operation when an engine warninglight on the instrument panel illuminates, seeunder "WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS".Read fault codes before calling for assistance.

NOTE

ON MULTIPLEXED VEHICLES ONLY: THEENGINE DIAGNOSTIC LIGHTS ARE LOCATEDIN THE DIAGNOSTIC BOX. THE DIAGNOSTIC

BOX IS MOUNTED BEHIND AN ACCESS DOORIN THE R.H. CONSOLE.

CUMMINS ISM ENGINE

Proceed as follows.

1. Unlock switch "A" and push lower part.


3. If any fault codes were active during systempower down, the "ENGINE WARNING" and "STOP

ENGINE" lights will begin to flash the code of therecorded faults. If no fault codes are recorded,

T03033

ISM Engine diagnostic switch on L.H. dashboard

DIA

ISM DIAGNOSE

OP

ER

AT

ING

IN

ST

RU

CT

ION

SO

PE

RA

TIN

G I

NS

TR

UC

TIO

NS

Upd

ate

B_O

GB

02A

RU

pdat

e B

_OG

B02

AR



C2045

C2045

code number will continue repeating itself untilthe system is instructed otherwise.

To go to the next fault code, momentarily pushswitch (2) of the "Cruise control/Fast idle"system into the "RESUME/ACCEL" position. Thistakes you to the fault code recorded next. Youcan return to the previous fault code bymomentarily pushing this switch into the "SET/

COAST" position. If only one fault code hasbeen recorded, the ISM system will

T01226


continuously display the same fault code,when lower or upper part of this switch ismomentarily pushed.

!!! CAUTION !!!

DO NOT FORGET TO SWITCH OFF(UPPER PART PUSHED) SWITCH "A"WHEN NOT USING THE DIAGNOSTIC

SYSTEM.

Active fault codes can also be displayed bythe Road Relay (option). If the fault codebecomes inactive during the trip, it will not bedisplayed by the Road Relay. When a fault isidentified, the Road Relay will display a fault/alarm message. Active fault codes can beviewed by pressing and holding down thediagnostic (wrench) key. If more than one faulthas been found, the fault codes will scrollevery three to five seconds.

code number will continue repeating itself untilthe system is instructed otherwise.

To go to the next fault code, momentarily pushswitch (2) of the "Cruise control/Fast idle"system into the "RESUME/ACCEL" position. Thistakes you to the fault code recorded next. Youcan return to the previous fault code bymomentarily pushing this switch into the "SET/

COAST" position. If only one fault code hasbeen recorded, the ISM system will

T01226


continuously display the same fault code,when lower or upper part of this switch ismomentarily pushed.

!!! CAUTION !!!

DO NOT FORGET TO SWITCH OFF(UPPER PART PUSHED) SWITCH "A"WHEN NOT USING THE DIAGNOSTIC

SYSTEM.

Active fault codes can also be displayed bythe Road Relay (option). If the fault codebecomes inactive during the trip, it will not bedisplayed by the Road Relay. When a fault isidentified, the Road Relay will display a fault/alarm message. Active fault codes can beviewed by pressing and holding down thediagnostic (wrench) key. If more than one faulthas been found, the fault codes will scrollevery three to five seconds.

Update B

_OG

B02A

RU

pdate B_O

GB

02AR

OP

ER

AT

ING

INS

TR

UC

TIO

NS

OP

ER

AT

ING

INS

TR

UC

TIO

NS



C2045

C2045

DETROIT DIESEL ENGINE

It is important to point out that whenever the"CHECK ENGINE" light (CEL) ("ENGINE WARNING" lighton multiplexed vehicles) ,or the "STOP ENGINE" light(SEL) comes on, the DDEC computer will deter-mine where the problem is, and will then store thisinformation in its memory.

If the malfunction is intermittent, the lights willcome on and go off as the computer senses thechanging engine condition.

Read fault codes before calling for assistance.

With the engine shut off and the ignitionon, depress and hold the "DIA" switchin the diagnostic box:

Active codes will be flashed on the "STOP ENGINE"light (SEL) first, followed by inactive codesbeing flashed on the "CHECK ENGINE" light (CEL).They will for example flashtwice...pause....flash once...pause, thus in thiscase flash code number 21. Code 21 indicatesthe throttle position sensor input voltage ishigh. Code 25 indicates that all systems areworking satisfactorily.

When all the inactive codes have been flashed,the process of flashing all the active codes fol-lowed by all the inactive codes will repeat until the"DIA" switch is released.

SEL / CEL EXAMPLES

SEL Active Codes

1 Flash 3 Flashes

Long pauseShortpause

Code 13 Code 21

Shortpause

T03675

CEL Inactive Codes

2 Flashes 1 Flash

DIA

DETROIT DIESEL ENGINE

IIt is important to point out that whenever the "CHECK

ENGINE" light (CEL) ("ENGINE WARNING" light onmultiplexed vehicles) ,or the "STOP ENGINE" light(SEL) comes on, the DDEC computer will determinewhere the problem is, and will then store this informa-tion in its memory.

If the malfunction is intermittent, the lights willcome on and go off as the computer senses thechanging engine condition.

Read fault codes before calling for assistance.

With the engine shut off and the ignitionon, depress and hold the "DIA" switchin the diagnostic box:

Active codes will be flashed on the "STOP ENGINE"light (SEL) first, followed by inactive codes beingflashed on the "CHECK ENGINE" light (CEL). They willfor example flash twice...pause....flashonce...pause, thus in this case flash code number21. Code 21 indicates the throttle position sensorinput voltage is high. Code 25 indicates that allsystems are working satisfactorily.

When all the inactive codes have been flashed,the process of flashing all the active codes fol-lowed by all the inactive codes will repeat until the"DIA" switch is released.

SEL / CEL EXAMPLES

SEL Active Codes

1 Flash 3 Flashes

Long pauseShortpause

Code 13 Code 21

Shortpause

T03675

CEL Inactive Codes

2 Flashes 1 Flash

DIA

OP

ER

AT

ING

IN

ST

RU

CT

ION

SO

PE

RA

TIN

G I

NS

TR

UC

TIO

NS

Upd

ate

B_O

GB

02A

RU

pdat

e B

_OG

B02

AR



C2045

C2045

CATERPILLAR ENGINE

First method

1. Place the "CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF" switch inthe "OFF" position.

2. Push the "SET/RESUME" switch to eitherposition. Hold that position until the "ENGINE

WARNING" lamp begins to flash.

Second method

Push and hold the "DIA" switch in thediagnostic box until the "ENGINE


The "ENGINE WARNING" lamp will flash inorder to indicate a two digit flash code.

The sequence of flashing represents the systemdiagnostic message. Count the first sequence offlashes in order to determine the first digit of thediagnostic code. After a two second pause, thesecond sequence of flashes will identify thesecond digit of the diagnostic code.

DIA

Any additional diagnostic codes will follow after apause. The additional diagnostic codes will bedisplayed in the same manner. Flash code 55signals that "No Detected Faults" have occurredsince the ignition key switch has been turned tothe ON position. Troubleshooting is not requiredfor codes "35", "41", "47" and "55".

CATERPILLAR ENGINE

First method

1. Place the "CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF" switch inthe "OFF" position.

2. Push the "SET/RESUME" switch to eitherposition. Hold that position until the "ENGINE


Second method

Push and hold the "DIA" switch in thediagnostic box until the "ENGINE


The "ENGINE WARNING" lamp will flash inorder to indicate a two digit flash code.

The sequence of flashing represents the systemdiagnostic message. Count the first sequence offlashes in order to determine the first digit of thediagnostic code. After a two second pause, thesecond sequence of flashes will identify thesecond digit of the diagnostic code.

DIA

Any additional diagnostic codes will follow after apause. The additional diagnostic codes will bedisplayed in the same manner. Flash code 55signals that "No Detected Faults" have occurredsince the ignition key switch has been turned tothe ON position. Troubleshooting is not requiredfor codes "35", "41", "47" and "55".

Update B

_OG

B02A

RU

pdate B_O

GB

02AR

OP

ER

AT

ING

INS

TR

UC

TIO

NS

OP

ER

AT

ING

INS

TR

UC

TIO

NS



C2045

C2045

WTB500 AUTOMATICTRANSMISSION "DO NOT

SHIFT" LIGHT IS ILLUMINATED

For vehicle operation when the "DO NOT SHIFT"warning light illuminates, see under"WT B500 Automatic Transmission" and"Warning and indicator lights" earlier in thisSection. Read diagnostic codes before calling forassistance.

DIAGNOSTIC CODES

Diagnostics codes are numerical indicationsrelating to a malfunction in transmission operation.Each code consists of a two-digit main code anda two-digit subcode. These codes are logged in alist in the ECU memory with the most severe orotherwise most recent code listed first. Amaximum of five codes (numbered d1-d5) may belisted in memory at one time. As codes areadded, the oldest nonactive code is dropped fromthe list. If all codes are active, the code with thelowest priority that is not included on the severitylist is dropped from the list. Access to thediagnostic codes and code information is throughthe pushbutton shift selector or the diagnosticdata reader.

The ECU separately stores the active andhistorical (nonactive) codes. An active code is anycode that is current in the ECU decision-makingprocess. Historical codes are codes that areretained in the ECU's memory and will notnecessarily affect the ECU decision-makingprocess. Historical codes are useful indetermining if a problem is isolated, isintermittent, or results from a previousmalfunction.

When the diagnostic mode is entered, the firstcode (position d1) is displayed as follows (eachdisplay item lasts for about one second): d, 1,main code (two digits displayed one-at-a-time),subcode (two digits displayed one-at-a-time),sequence repeats. Press the MODE buttonmomentarily to display codes for positions d2-d5in the same manner. After a fixed number ofignition cycles, a code may be deleted frommemory if it has not recurred. The shift selectordiagnostic mode will end automatically after twominutes without operator input.

WTB500 AUTOMATICTRANSMISSION "DO NOT

SHIFT" LIGHT IS ILLUMINATED

For vehicle operation when the "DO NOT SHIFT"warning light illuminates, see under"WT B500 Automatic Transmission" and"Warning and indicator lights" earlier in thisSection. Read diagnostic codes before calling forassistance.

DIAGNOSTIC CODES

Diagnostics codes are numerical indicationsrelating to a malfunction in transmission operation.Each code consists of a two-digit main code anda two-digit subcode. These codes are logged in alist in the ECU memory with the most severe orotherwise most recent code listed first. Amaximum of five codes (numbered d1-d5) may belisted in memory at one time. As codes areadded, the oldest nonactive code is dropped fromthe list. If all codes are active, the code with thelowest priority that is not included on the severitylist is dropped from the list. Access to thediagnostic codes and code information is throughthe pushbutton shift selector or the diagnosticdata reader.

The ECU separately stores the active andhistorical (nonactive) codes. An active code isany code that is current in the ECU decision-making process. Historical codes are codes thatare retained in the ECU's memory and will notnecessarily affect the ECU decision-makingprocess. Historical codes are useful indetermining if a problem is isolated, isintermittent, or results from a previousmalfunction.

When the diagnostic mode is entered, the firstcode (position d1) is displayed as follows (eachdisplay item lasts for about one second): d, 1,main code (two digits displayed one-at-a-time),subcode (two digits displayed one-at-a-time),sequence repeats. Press the MODE buttonmomentarily to display codes for positions d2-d5in the same manner. After a fixed number ofignition cycles, a code may be deleted frommemory if it has not recurred. The shift selectordiagnostic mode will end automatically after twominutes without operator input.

OP

ER

AT

ING

IN

ST

RU

CT

ION

SO

PE

RA

TIN

G I

NS

TR

UC

TIO

NS

Upd

ate

B_O

GB

02A

RU

pdat

e B

_OG

B02

AR



C2045

C2045

DIAGNOSTIC CODE DISPLAY PROCEDURE

Diagnostic codes can be read and cleared by twomethods:• With the Pro-Link® 9000 Diagnostic Data Reader.The use of the Pro-Link® 9000 diagnostic tool isdescribed in the instruction manual furnished witheach tool.

• With the pushbutton shift selector.

To display stored codes

Proceed as follows to read the diagnostic codeswith the pushbutton shift selector:

1. Bring the vehicle to a stop at a safe location.Apply the parking brake.

2. Simultaneously press the "up" and "down"arrow buttons twice to access the diagnosticdisplay mode.

3. Observe the digital display for codes (codeswill appear one digit at a time).

3. Press the MODE button to see the next code -repeat for subsequent codes.

To clear active indicators and resume vehicleoperation

Proceed as follows to clear active indicators:

Press and hold the MODE button forapproximately three seconds until the modeindicator (LED) flashes. Release the MODE buttonand active indicators such as the "DO NOTSHIFT" light will not be illuminated. Some codesare self-clearing and others require ignition cyclesto clear.

NOTE

If the condition that caused the code isstill present, the code will again become

active.

DIAGNOSTIC CODE DISPLAY PROCEDURE

Diagnostic codes can be read and cleared by twomethods:• With the Pro-Link® 9000 Diagnostic Data Reader.The use of the Pro-Link® 9000 diagnostic tool isdescribed in the instruction manual furnished witheach tool.

• With the pushbutton shift selector.

To display stored codes

Proceed as follows to read the diagnostic codeswith the pushbutton shift selector:

1. Bring the vehicle to a stop at a safe location.Apply the parking brake.

2. Simultaneously press the "up" and "down"arrow buttons twice to access the diagnosticdisplay mode.

3. Observe the digital display for codes (codeswill appear one digit at a time).

3. Press the MODE button to see the next code -repeat for subsequent codes.

To clear active indicators and resume vehicleoperation

Proceed as follows to clear active indicators:

Press and hold the MODE button forapproximately three seconds until the modeindicator (LED) flashes. Release the MODEbutton and active indicators such as the "DONOT SHIFT" light will not be illuminated. Somecodes are self-clearing and others require ignitioncycles to clear.

NOTE

If the condition that caused the code isstill present, the code will again become

active.

Update B

_OG

B02A

RU

pdate B_O

GB

02AR

OP

ER

AT

ING

INS

TR

UC

TIO

NS

OP

ER

AT

ING

INS

TR

UC

TIO

NS



C2045

C2045

F04694

ABS WARNING LIGHT ISILLUMINATED

Read trouble codes before calling for assistance.Proceed as follows:

1. Turn ignition key on.

2. Press and hold the diagnostic switch for onesecond. The diagnostic switch is located in thediagnostic box in R.H. console of dashboard.

3. Count the flashes of the "ABS" warning lamp inthe diagnostic box to determine the blink code.

The fault code will be displayed as two sets offlashes with each set separated by a 1 secondpause.

Active fault: 1-8 flashes, 1second pause, 1-6flashes, 4 second pause. Code will be repeateduntil ignition is switched off.

Stored fault: 1-8 flashes, 1second pause, 1-6flashes, 4 second pause. Displays all stored faultsonce then stops blinking.

AIR SYSTEM EMERGENCYFILL

!!! CAUTION !!!

THE AIR SUPPLIED MUST BE CLEANAND DRY. THE PRESSURE SHOULD

NOT EXCEED 135 PSI.

If the coach airpressure is lowand the enginecannot beoperated, the airsystem may befilled from anexternal sourceby attaching an

air hose to the nipple behind the front bumper. Toopen the front bumper, see "Spare Wheel & Tire".

PUSH-STARTING

Note that the engine can NOT be started by pushingor towing the coach.

ABS WARNING LIGHT ISILLUMINATED

Read trouble codes before calling for assistance.Proceed as follows:

1. Turn ignition key on.

2. Press and hold the diagnostic switch for onesecond. The diagnostic switch is located in thediagnostic box in R.H. console of dashboard.

3. Count the flashes of the "ABS" warning lamp inthe diagnostic box to determine the blink code.

The fault code will be displayed as two sets offlashes with each set separated by a 1 secondpause.

Active fault: 1-8 flashes, 1second pause, 1-6flashes, 4 second pause. Code will be repeateduntil ignition is switched off.

Stored fault: 1-8 flashes, 1second pause, 1-6flashes, 4 second pause. Displays all stored faultsonce then stops blinking.

AIR SYSTEM EMERGENCYFILL

!!! CAUTION !!!

THE AIR SUPPLIED MUST BE CLEANAND DRY. THE PRESSURE SHOULD

NOT EXCEED 135 PSI.

If the coach airpressure is lowand the enginecannot beoperated, the airsystem may befilled from anexternal source

by attaching an air hose to the nipple behind thefront bumper. To open the front bumper, see"Spare Wheel & Tire".

PUSH-STARTING

Note that the engine can NOT be started by pushingor towing the coach.

F04694

OP

ER

AT

ING

IN

ST

RU

CT

ION

SO

PE

RA

TIN

G I

NS

TR

UC

TIO

NS

Upd

ate

B_O

GB

02A

RU

pdat

e B

_OG

B02

AR



C2045

C2045

F03645

F02558

Reinforced cross-member to lift up frontof coach

LIFTING AND TOWING THECOACH WITH A TOW TRUCK

Before towing a disabled vehicle, both drive axlehalf shafts should be withdrawn or the propellershaft removed.

!!! CAUTION !!!

FAILURE TO WITHDRAW THE DRIVEAXLE HALF SHAFTS OR REMOVE

THE PROPELLER SHAFT MAY CAUSESEVERE TRANSMISSION DAMAGE.

If drive axle half shafts have been removed,suitably seal off the wheel hub openings to preventloss of lubricant and entry of dirt. Refer to "ParkingBrake Emergency Release" earlier in this sectionto mechanically release parking brake.

The coach can be lifted and towed by a tow truckequipped with a lifting beam.

Place the forks of the lifting system only:

• under the reinforced cross-member when liftingthe front of the coach or...

• under the anchor points when lifting the rear.

Lifting and towing can now commence. Anchor points to lift up rear of coach

F03645

F02558

Reinforced cross-member to lift up frontof coach

LIFTING AND TOWING THECOACH WITH A TOW TRUCK

Before towing a disabled vehicle, both drive axlehalf shafts should be withdrawn or the propellershaft removed.

!!! CAUTION !!!

FAILURE TO WITHDRAW THE DRIVEAXLE HALF SHAFTS OR REMOVE

THE PROPELLER SHAFT MAY CAUSESEVERE TRANSMISSION DAMAGE.

If drive axle half shafts have been removed,suitably seal off the wheel hub openings to preventloss of lubricant and entry of dirt. Refer to "ParkingBrake Emergency Release" earlier in this sectionto mechanically release parking brake.

The coach can be lifted and towed by a tow truckequipped with a lifting beam.

Place the forks of the lifting system only:

• under the reinforced cross-member when liftingthe front of the coach or...

• under the anchor points when lifting the rear.

Lifting and towing can now commence. Anchor points to lift up rear of coach

Update B

_OG

B02A

RU

pdate B_O

GB

02AR

OP

ER

AT

ING

INS

TR

UC

TIO

NS

OP

ER

AT

ING

INS

TR

UC

TIO

NS



C2045

C2045

Front bumper release lever

!!! CAUTION !!!

NO TOWING OPERATION, WHICH INANY WAY IS NOT SAFE FOR THE

TOWING VEHICLE, OPERATOR, POSSIBLEBYSTANDERS OR OTHER MOTORISTS,

SHOULD BE ATTEMPTED.

FOLLOW ALL FEDERAL AND STATE LAWSAPPLICABLE TO VEHICLES IN TOW.

TIRE INFLATION

The air system emergency fill nipple can also beused to inflate the tires:

1. Clamp the tire inflation hose connector to thetire valve.

2. Press the other end of the hose to the "airsystem emergency fill" nipple behind the frontbumper.

3. If necessary, start the engine so that thecompressor can charge the air system. Themaximum tire pressure that can be obtained inthis way is the air system operating pressure.

SPARE WHEEL & TIRE

!!! CAUTION !!!

NEVER STORE OTHER OBJECTS THANTHE SPARE WHEEL IN THE SPARE WHEEL

COMPARTMENT SINCE THEY CANINTERFERE WITH THE STEERING LINKAGE

MECHANISM.

The spare wheel is carried behind the frontbumper.

To take out the spare wheel:

1. Turn bumper release lever located in thecompartment in front of L.H. front wheel.

F04697

Front bumper release lever

!!! CAUTION !!!

NO TOWING OPERATION, WHICH INANY WAY IS NOT SAFE FOR THE

TOWING VEHICLE, OPERATOR, POSSIBLEBYSTANDERS OR OTHER MOTORISTS,

SHOULD BE ATTEMPTED.

FOLLOW ALL FEDERAL AND STATE LAWSAPPLICABLE TO VEHICLES IN TOW.

TIRE INFLATION

The air system emergency fill nipple can also beused to inflate the tires:

1. Clamp the tire inflation hose connector to thetire valve.

2. Press the other end of the hose to the "airsystem emergency fill" nipple behind the frontbumper.

3. If necessary, start the engine so that thecompressor can charge the air system. Themaximum tire pressure that can be obtained inthis way is the air system operating pressure.

SPARE WHEEL & TIRE

!!! CAUTION !!!

NEVER STORE OTHER OBJECTS THANTHE SPARE WHEEL IN THE SPARE WHEEL

COMPARTMENT SINCE THEY CANINTERFERE WITH THE STEERING LINKAGE

MECHANISM.

The spare wheel is carried behind the frontbumper.

To take out the spare wheel:

1. Turn bumper release lever located in thecompartment in front of L.H. front wheel.

F04697

OP

ER

AT

ING

IN

ST

RU

CT

ION

SO

PE

RA

TIN

G I

NS

TR

UC

TIO

NS

Upd

ate

B_O

GB

02A

RU

pdat

e B

_OG

B02

AR



C2045

C2045

F04860

2. From outside of coach, release safety latch (seephoto above).

3. Push bumper fully down.

4. Loosen spare wheel securing belt and pull outspare wheel on its rollers.

5. Change wheel - see next heading forinstructions - and stow defective road wheelinside spare wheel compartment.

6. To close spare wheel compartment, swingbumper upwards and press firmly to ensureproper double locking.

After having mounted the spare wheel, tire inflationpressure must be checked and, if necessary,corrected as soon as possible.The inflation pressures are mentioned on thevehicle identification plate in the stepwell of theentrance door.

TO CHANGE A ROAD WHEEL

Before attempting to jack the coach:

• Direct all passengers to disembark;

• Apply the parking brake;• Securely chock those road wheels that will

remain on the ground.

Only use the hydraulic jack (VH No.10583382)supplied with your coach.

Location of front bumper safety latch

F04860

2. From outside of coach, release safety latch (seephoto above).

3. Push bumper fully down.

4. Loosen spare wheel securing belt and pull outspare wheel on its rollers.

5. Change wheel - see next heading forinstructions - and stow defective road wheelinside spare wheel compartment.

6. To close spare wheel compartment, swingbumper upwards and press firmly to ensureproper double locking.

After having mounted the spare wheel, tire inflationpressure must be checked and, if necessary,corrected as soon as possible.The inflation pressures are mentioned on thevehicle identification plate in the stepwell of theentrance door.

TO CHANGE A ROAD WHEEL

Before attempting to jack the coach:

• Direct all passengers to disembark;

• Apply the parking brake;• Securely chock those road wheels that will

remain on the ground.

Only use the hydraulic jack (VH No.10583382)supplied with your coach.

Location of front bumper safety latch

Update B

_OG

B02A

RU

pdate B_O

GB

02AR

OP

ER

AT

ING

INS

TR

UC

TIO

NS

OP

ER

AT

ING

INS

TR

UC

TIO

NS



C2045

C2045

Necessary equipment for lifting front or tagwheel

1 .Lifting bracket2.Set of wooden blocks

A: Jack supporting blockB: Axle supporting block

3.Hydraulic jack(VH No. 10583382)

T03584

!!! CAUTION !!!

DO NOT GET UNDER THE COACH WHENIT IS SUPPORTED ONLY BY A JACK.

ENSURE THAT THE JACK BASE ISFIRMLY SEATED ON LEVEL GROUND.

TO REMOVE THE WHEEL

If installed, remove the "RADOLID" wheel nut

caps with a socket wrench by turning them to the

left until they can be removed. Clean the exposed

portion of each wheel bolt with a stiff brush, then

loosen all wheel nuts approx. half a turn.

NOTE

All road wheels on this coach haveright-hand threads.

To remove a front or tag wheel

A special wheel lifting bracket (Van Hool PartNo.619900160 for steel wheels; No. 10627455 for

Alcoa forged aluminum wheels) is supplied in thecoach tool kit. This bracket mounts on the wheelnut bolts and the front of the bracket then servesas a support for the jack.The method of using wheel lifting bracket inconjunction with wooden blocks and hydraulicjack is obvious from the diagram on next page.

Necessary equipment for lifting front or tagwheel

1 .Lifting bracket2.Set of wooden blocks

A: Jack supporting blockB: Axle supporting block

3.Hydraulic jack(VH No. 10583382)

T03584

!!! CAUTION !!!

DO NOT GET UNDER THE COACH WHENIT IS SUPPORTED ONLY BY A JACK.

ENSURE THAT THE JACK BASE ISFIRMLY SEATED ON LEVEL GROUND.

TO REMOVE THE WHEEL

If installed, remove the "RADOLID" wheel nut

caps with a socket wrench by turning them to the

left until they can be removed. Clean the exposed

portion of each wheel bolt with a stiff brush, then

loosen all wheel nuts approx. half a turn.

NOTE

All road wheels on this coach haveright-hand threads.

To remove a front or tag wheel

A special wheel lifting bracket (Van Hool PartNo.619900160 for steel wheels; No. 10627455 for

Alcoa forged aluminum wheels) is supplied in thecoach tool kit. This bracket mounts on the wheelnut bolts and the front of the bracket then servesas a support for the jack.The method of using wheel lifting bracket inconjunction with wooden blocks and hydraulicjack is obvious from the diagram on next page.

OP

ER

AT

ING

IN

ST

RU

CT

ION

SO

PE

RA

TIN

G I

NS

TR

UC

TIO

NS

Upd

ate

B_O

GB

02A

RU

pdat

e B

_OG

B02

AR



C2045

C2045

T03579

Operating sequence to change a front or tag wheel

T03579

Operating sequence to change a front or tag wheel

Update B

_OG

B02A

RU

pdate B_O

GB

02AR

OP

ER

AT

ING

INS

TR

UC

TIO

NS

OP

ER

AT

ING

INS

TR

UC

TIO

NS



C2045

C2045

1. Remove the two top and bottom wheel nuts.

2. Install lifting bracket on to the free wheel bolts.

!!! CAUTION !!!

THE LIFTING BRACKET MUST BE NUTTED UP AGAINST THE WHEEL USING:

••••• FOUR ORDINARY M22X1.5 NUTS IN CASEOF A STEEL WHEEL; NOT THE FLANGED

WHEEL NUTS WHICH PROVIDEINSUFFICIENT SCREW THREADENGAGEMENT ON THE STUDS.

••••• FOUR MODIFIED WHEEL NUTS(VH NO. 10627683) IN CASE OF AN ALCOA

ALUMINUM WHEEL.

3. If necessary, move the coach until the liftingbracket is vertical.

!!! CAUTION !!!

ONLY A SLIGHT DEVIATION FROMVERTICAL CAN BE OVERCOME WHEN

JACKING UP THE BRACKET. A LARGER

AMOUNT OF MISALIGNMENT MAY CAUSETHE JACK TO SLIP AWAY DURING THE

LIFTING PROCESS.

4. Apply the parking brake and chock the wheelswhich will remain on the ground in order toprevent the coach from moving.

5. Place the jack on wooden block A as indicatedin the figure and raise wheel until woodenblock B can be introduced under the steeringknuckle carrier (hub carrier on tag axle).Besure there is a space of approx. 2 inchesbetween tire flank and block. Otherwise, thespare wheel cannot be installed properly.The side of block B with the metal tag "THIS

SIDE UP FOR FRONT AXLE" must be up whenchanging a front wheel.The side of block B with the metal tag "THIS

SIDE UP FOR TAG AXLE" must be up whenchanging a tag wheel.

6. Lower steering knuckle carrier(hub carrier ontag axle) onto block B.

7. Remove jack and change wheel.

1. Remove the two top and bottom wheel nuts.

2. Install lifting bracket on to the free wheel bolts.

!!! CAUTION !!!

THE LIFTING BRACKET MUST BE NUTTED UP AGAINST THE WHEEL USING:

••••• FOUR ORDINARY M22X1.5 NUTS IN CASEOF A STEEL WHEEL; NOT THE FLANGED

WHEEL NUTS WHICH PROVIDEINSUFFICIENT SCREW THREADENGAGEMENT ON THE STUDS.

••••• FOUR MODIFIED WHEEL NUTS(VH NO. 10627683) IN CASE OF AN ALCOA

ALUMINUM WHEEL.

3. If necessary, move the coach until the liftingbracket is vertical.

!!! CAUTION !!!

ONLY A SLIGHT DEVIATION FROMVERTICAL CAN BE OVERCOME WHEN

JACKING UP THE BRACKET. A LARGER

AMOUNT OF MISALIGNMENT MAY CAUSETHE JACK TO SLIP AWAY DURING THE

LIFTING PROCESS.

4. Apply the parking brake and chock the wheelswhich will remain on the ground in order toprevent the coach from moving.

5. Place the jack on wooden block A as indicatedin the figure and raise wheel until woodenblock B can be introduced under the steeringknuckle carrier (hub carrier on tag axle).Besure there is a space of approx. 2 inchesbetween tire flank and block. Otherwise, thespare wheel cannot be installed properly.The side of block B with the metal tag "THIS

SIDE UP FOR FRONT AXLE" must be up whenchanging a front wheel.The side of block B with the metal tag "THIS

SIDE UP FOR TAG AXLE" must be up whenchanging a tag wheel.

6. Lower steering knuckle carrier(hub carrier ontag axle) onto block B.

7. Remove jack and change wheel.

OP

ER

AT

ING

IN

ST

RU

CT

ION

SO

PE

RA

TIN

G I

NS

TR

UC

TIO

NS

Upd

ate

B_O

GB

02A

RU

pdat

e B

_OG

B02

AR



C2045

C2045

Detail of jacking point on drive axle suspensionbeam

T03581

Jacking points on drive axle suspension beams

T03582

To remove a drive wheel in case ofone flat tirePosition the jacks under the suspension beamjacking points forward and rearward of the wheel.Then raise jacks until tires are clear off theground. Install a safety supporting block under theaxle. Remove wheelnuts and wheel.

Detail of jacking point on drive axle suspensionbeam

T03581

Jacking points on drive axle suspension beams

T03582

To remove a drive wheel in case ofone flat tirePosition the jacks under the suspension beamjacking points forward and rearward of the wheel.Then raise jacks until tires are clear off theground. Install a safety supporting block under theaxle. Remove wheelnuts and wheel.

Update B

_OG

B02A

RU

pdate B_O

GB

02AR

OP

ER

AT

ING

INS

TR

UC

TIO

NS

OP

ER

AT

ING

INS

TR

UC

TIO

NS



C2045

C2045

T00042

TO FIT THE SPARE WHEEL1. Clean hub pilot and wheel disc center hole.

Smear pilot lightly with "Never-Seez".

2. Clean wheel bolts with a steel brush and applya drop of oil to bolt-end threads. Also apply asingle drop of oil between wheel nut and itscaptive washer.

3. Locate spare wheel on hub and fit, but do notyet tighten the wheel nuts.

4. Raise jack(s) so that block B can be removed.

5. For front wheel: repeat the whole "To removea front wheel" process but this time "from highto low".For drive wheel: lower wheel to ground.

6. Tighten wheelnuts evenly inseveral steps,going round inthe sequenceshown in figureuntil a finaltorque of 427 to456 ft.lbf isreached.

7. If fitted, install the "RADOLID" wheel nut caps asfollows:

a. Place wheel nut cap loosely over wheel nut.

!!! CAUTION !!!

USE ONLY A SOCKET WRENCH INNEXT STEP. NO OTHER TYPES OF

WRENCHES ARE ALLOWED.

b. Using a socket wrench, turn wheel nut cap to theright until a light snap-effect is felt.

CHASSIS FRAME JACKINGPOINTS

When it is necessary to raise the coach by usingjacks under the chassis frame, locate the jack(s)solely under the points marked with arrows in theillustrations on the following page; otherwisedistortion or other damage to chassis sections mayresult.

!!! CAUTION !!!

NEVER RELY ON THE JACK(S) ALONETO SUPPORT THE VEHICLE. IF NEEDED

TO GET UNDER THE RAISED COACH,ALWAYS FIT ADDITIONAL SUPPORTING

STANDS OR TIMBER PACKING TO REDUCETHE RISK OF PERSONAL INJURY.

T00042

TO FIT THE SPARE WHEEL1. Clean hub pilot and wheel disc center hole.

Smear pilot lightly with "Never-Seez".

2. Clean wheel bolts with a steel brush and applya drop of oil to bolt-end threads. Also apply asingle drop of oil between wheel nut and itscaptive washer.

3. Locate spare wheel on hub and fit, but do notyet tighten the wheel nuts.

4. Raise jack(s) so that block B can be removed.

5. For front wheel: repeat the whole "To removea front wheel" process but this time "from highto low".For drive wheel: lower wheel to ground.

6. Tighten wheelnuts evenly inseveral steps,going round inthe sequenceshown in figureuntil a finaltorque of 427 to456 ft.lbf isreached.

7. If fitted, install the "RADOLID" wheel nut caps asfollows:

a. Place wheel nut cap loosely over wheel nut.

!!! CAUTION !!!

USE ONLY A SOCKET WRENCH INNEXT STEP. NO OTHER TYPES OF

WRENCHES ARE ALLOWED.

b. Using a socket wrench, turn wheel nut cap to theright until a light snap-effect is felt.

CHASSIS FRAME JACKINGPOINTS

When it is necessary to raise the coach by usingjacks under the chassis frame, locate the jack(s)solely under the points marked with arrows in theillustrations on the following page; otherwisedistortion or other damage to chassis sections mayresult.

!!! CAUTION !!!

NEVER RELY ON THE JACK(S) ALONETO SUPPORT THE VEHICLE. IF NEEDED

TO GET UNDER THE RAISED COACH,ALWAYS FIT ADDITIONAL SUPPORTING

STANDS OR TIMBER PACKING TO REDUCETHE RISK OF PERSONAL INJURY.

OP

ER

AT

ING

IN

ST

RU

CT

ION

SO

PE

RA

TIN

G I

NS

TR

UC

TIO

NS

Upd

ate

B_O

GB

02A

RU

pdat

e B

_OG

B02

AR



C2045

C2045

F03645F02558F02559

Chassis frame jacking points

T03399

F03645F02558F02559

Chassis frame jacking points

T03399

Update B

_OG

B02A

RU

pdate B_O

GB

02AR

OP

ER

AT

ING

INS

TR

UC

TIO

NS

OP

ER

AT

ING

INS

TR

UC

TIO

NS



C2045

C2045

mal

T03790

Climate control override switch (in HVACjunction box)

CLIMATE CONTROL OVERRIDE

In the event the climate control system electronicsfail, an override switch may be used to obtainmanual control over the coach interior heating/cooling. The switch is located in the HVACjunction box. The override switch has threepositions: "Normal", "Override Heating" and"Override Cooling".

Placing the switch in the "Override heating"position will provide continuous heating as long as

the climate control on/off switch on the R.H. lowerconsole is "on". Placing the switch in the"Override Cooling" position will provide continuouscooling as long as the climate control on/offswitch on the R.H. lower console is "on". Airtemperature control is now achieved by switchingon and off the climate control on/off switch.

Overriding the automatic control is merely atemporary solution. Have the system checked assoon as possible.

JUMP STARTING

The instructions below must be followed,otherwise personal injury or property damage mayresult.

!!! CAUTION !!!

DO NOT SMOKE NEAR BATTERIES.BATTERIES GIVE OFF A GAS, WHICH IS

FLAMMABLE AND EXPLOSIVE.

Overrideheating

Overridecooling

Climaoperation Service

mal

T03790

Climate control override switch (in HVACjunction box)

CLIMATE CONTROL OVERRIDE

In the event the climate control system electronicsfail, an override switch may be used to obtainmanual control over the coach interior heating/cooling. The switch is located in the HVACjunction box. The override switch has threepositions: "Normal", "Override Heating" and"Override Cooling".

Placing the switch in the "Override heating"position will provide continuous heating as long as

the climate control on/off switch on the R.H. lowerconsole is "on". Placing the switch in the"Override Cooling" position will provide continuouscooling as long as the climate control on/offswitch on the R.H. lower console is "on". Airtemperature control is now achieved by switchingon and off the climate control on/off switch.

Overriding the automatic control is merely atemporary solution. Have the system checked assoon as possible.

JUMP STARTING

The instructions below must be followed,otherwise personal injury or property damage mayresult.

!!! CAUTION !!!

DO NOT SMOKE NEAR BATTERIES.BATTERIES GIVE OFF A GAS, WHICH IS

FLAMMABLE AND EXPLOSIVE.

Overrideheating

Overridecooling

Climaoperation Service

OP

ER

AT

ING

IN

ST

RU

CT

ION

SO

PE

RA

TIN

G I

NS

TR

UC

TIO

NS

Upd

ate

B_O

GB

02A

RU

pdat

e B

_OG

B02

AR



C2045

C2045

TO LESSEN THE RISK OF INJURY IN CASEAN EXPLOSION DOES OCCUR, WEAR EYE

PROTECTION OR SHIELD YOUR EYES,WHEN WORKING NEAR ANY BATTERY.DO NOT LEAN OVER THE BATTERIES.

THIS COACH HAS TWO 12-VOLTBATTERIES CONNECTED IN SERIES TOPROVIDE POWER TO THE NEGATIVE

GROUND ELECTRICAL SYSTEM. MAKESURE THE OTHER VEHICLE ALSO HAS A

NEGATIVE GROUND ELECTRICAL SYSTEMOF SUFFICIENT CAPACITY TO START

THE VEHICLE. IF UNSURE OF THE OTHERVEHICLE'S VOLTAGE (OR IF THE

VOLTAGE AND/OR GROUND ON THEOTHER VEHICLE ARE DIFFERENT FROMYOUR COACH), DO NOT TRY TO JUMP

START AS PERSONAL INJURY ORSEVERE DAMAGE TO ELECTRIC ANDELECTRONIC PARTS MAY RESULT.

CHECK BATTERY FLUID LEVEL.(DO NOT CHECK WITH AN OPEN FLAMEAND DO NOT SMOKE.) ADD CLEAN OR

DISTILLED WATER BEFORE JUMPSTARTING. DO NOT ALLOW BATTERY

FLUID TO CONTACT EYES, SKIN, FABRIC,OR PAINTED SURFACES BECAUSE

BATTERY FLUID IS A CORROSIVE ACID.FLUSH ANY CONTACTED AREA WITH

WATER IMMEDIATELY ANDTHOROUGHLY. ALSO GET MEDICAL

HELP, IF EYES ARE AFFECTED.

JUMPER CABLE SIZE: MINIMUM 3/0 AWG.

TO CONNECT BOOSTER BATTERYCABLES

1. First:

• apply the parking brake;• place the transmission in neutral;• turn off the engine;• turn off the ignition;• switch off the master switch;• turn off all electrical accessories.

Make sure that these conditions are met onboth vehicles when you jump start with anothervehicle.

TO LESSEN THE RISK OF INJURY IN CASEAN EXPLOSION DOES OCCUR, WEAR EYE

PROTECTION OR SHIELD YOUR EYES,WHEN WORKING NEAR ANY BATTERY.DO NOT LEAN OVER THE BATTERIES.

THIS COACH HAS TWO 12-VOLTBATTERIES CONNECTED IN SERIES TOPROVIDE POWER TO THE NEGATIVE

GROUND ELECTRICAL SYSTEM. MAKESURE THE OTHER VEHICLE ALSO HAS A

NEGATIVE GROUND ELECTRICAL SYSTEMOF SUFFICIENT CAPACITY TO START

THE VEHICLE. IF UNSURE OF THE OTHERVEHICLE'S VOLTAGE (OR IF THE

VOLTAGE AND/OR GROUND ON THEOTHER VEHICLE ARE DIFFERENT FROMYOUR COACH), DO NOT TRY TO JUMP

START AS PERSONAL INJURY ORSEVERE DAMAGE TO ELECTRIC ANDELECTRONIC PARTS MAY RESULT.

CHECK BATTERY FLUID LEVEL.(DO NOT CHECK WITH AN OPEN FLAMEAND DO NOT SMOKE.) ADD CLEAN OR

DISTILLED WATER BEFORE JUMPSTARTING. DO NOT ALLOW BATTERY

FLUID TO CONTACT EYES, SKIN, FABRIC,OR PAINTED SURFACES BECAUSE

BATTERY FLUID IS A CORROSIVE ACID.FLUSH ANY CONTACTED AREA WITH

WATER IMMEDIATELY ANDTHOROUGHLY. ALSO GET MEDICAL

HELP, IF EYES ARE AFFECTED.

JUMPER CABLE SIZE: MINIMUM 3/0 AWG.

TO CONNECT BOOSTER BATTERYCABLES

1. First:

• apply the parking brake;• place the transmission in neutral;• turn off the engine;• turn off the ignition;• switch off the master switch;• turn off all electrical accessories.

Make sure that these conditions are met onboth vehicles when you jump start with anothervehicle.

Update B

_OG

B02A

RU

pdate B_O

GB

02AR

OP

ER

AT

ING

INS

TR

UC

TIO

NS

OP

ER

AT

ING

INS

TR

UC

TIO

NS



C2045

C2045

F04693

Terminals for jump starting in enginecompartment

1. Positive terminal2. Ground stud

2. Disconnect the wires from the GND (ground)terminal of the battery equalizer. Do not allowthis cable to touch any other connection onthe equalizer because the other terminals areconnected to the batteries.

3. Connect the first jumper cable from thepositive terminal on the charged battery(identified by a red collar, "+" or "P" on thepost or clamp) to terminal (1). To connect the

cable to terminal (1), first pull the spring-loadedprotective cover back.

4. Connect one end of the second cable to thegrounded negative ("-", black, blue or "N")terminal of the charged battery. Connect theother end to the ground stud (2) for jumpstarting on the vehicle being started.DO NOT connect directly to the negative postof the discharged battery. Do not connect itwith or attach it near pulleys, fans, or otherparts that will move when the engine is started.

5. Start the engine of the vehicle with thedischarged batteries.

6. Let the engine idle for a few minutes so thatthe voltage of the batteries can equal. This willreduce the formation of sparks whendisconnecting the jumper cables.

TO DISCONNECT BOOSTERBATTERY CABLES

1. Take care that the clamps from one jumpercable do not inadvertently touch the clampson the other jumper cable, disconnect thejumper lead from the ground stud (2) on thevehicle being started.

F04693

Terminals for jump starting in enginecompartment

1. Positive terminal2. Ground stud

2. Disconnect the wires from the GND (ground)terminal of the battery equalizer. Do not allowthis cable to touch any other connection onthe equalizer because the other terminals areconnected to the batteries.

3. Connect the first jumper cable from thepositive terminal on the charged battery(identified by a red collar, "+" or "P" on thepost or clamp) to terminal (1). To connect the

cable to terminal (1), first pull the spring-loadedprotective cover back.

4. Connect one end of the second cable to thegrounded negative ("-", black, blue or "N")terminal of the charged battery. Connect theother end to the ground stud (2) for jumpstarting on the vehicle being started.DO NOT connect directly to the negative postof the discharged battery. Do not connect itwith or attach it near pulleys, fans, or otherparts that will move when the engine is started.

5. Start the engine of the vehicle with thedischarged batteries.

6. Let the engine idle for a few minutes so thatthe voltage of the batteries can equal. This willreduce the formation of sparks whendisconnecting the jumper cables.

TO DISCONNECT BOOSTERBATTERY CABLES

1. Take care that the clamps from one jumpercable do not inadvertently touch the clampson the other jumper cable, disconnect thejumper lead from the ground stud (2) on thevehicle being started.

OP

ER

AT

ING

IN

ST

RU

CT

ION

SO

PE

RA

TIN

G I

NS

TR

UC

TIO

NS

Upd

ate

B_O

GB

02A

RU

pdat

e B

_OG

B02

AR



C2045

C2045

2. Remove the remaining end of the negativejumper cable from the booster battery.

3. Remove one end of the remaining jumpercable from the positive (red) terminal (1) onthe vehicle being started, then remove theother end of the same cable from the positiveterminal of the booster battery.

4. Reconnect wires onto the GND (ground)terminal of the battery equalizer.

NOTE

Always check the battery equalizercircuit breaker after jump starting

the vehicle.

MANUAL WHEELCHAIR LIFTOPERATION

Refer to the wheelchair lift manufacturer's bookletsupplied with your coach.

2. Remove the remaining end of the negativejumper cable from the booster battery.

3. Remove one end of the remaining jumpercable from the positive (red) terminal (1) onthe vehicle being started, then remove theother end of the same cable from the positiveterminal of the booster battery.

4. Reconnect wires onto the GND (ground)terminal of the battery equalizer.

NOTE

Always check the battery equalizercircuit breaker after jump starting

the vehicle.

MANUAL WHEELCHAIR LIFTOPERATION

Refer to the wheelchair lift manufacturer's bookletsupplied with your coach.

Update B

_OG

B02A

RU

pdate B_O

GB

02AR

OP

ER

AT

ING

INS

TR

UC

TIO

NS

OP

ER

AT

ING

INS

TR

UC

TIO

NS



C2045

C2045

Upd

ate

1_O

GB

03A

FU

pdat

e 1_

OG

B03

AF

AC

CE

SS

OR

IES

AC

CE

SS

OR

IES



C2045

C2045

ACCESSORIES

CLIMATE CONTROL

Driver's compartment ............................................................................................................ page 3Passenger compartment heating/ventilation and air conditioning .......................................... page 4

COMBUSTION HEATER ..................................................................................................... page 5

Operation with digital timer ................................................................................................... page 7

LAVATORY ......................................................................................................................... page 8

WHEELCHAIR LIFT (OPTIONAL)

To deploy the wheelchair lift system ..................................................................................... page 10

To shut off the wheelchair lift system .................................................................................... page 10

Emergency procedure .......................................................................................................... page 11

ACCESSORIES

CLIMATE CONTROL

Driver's compartment ............................................................................................................ page 3Passenger compartment heating/ventilation and air conditioning .......................................... page 4

COMBUSTION HEATER ..................................................................................................... page 5

Operation with digital timer ................................................................................................... page 7

LAVATORY ......................................................................................................................... page 8

WHEELCHAIR LIFT (OPTIONAL)

To deploy the wheelchair lift system ..................................................................................... page 10

To shut off the wheelchair lift system .................................................................................... page 10

Emergency procedure .......................................................................................................... page 11

AC

CE

SS

OR

IES

Update 1_O

GB

03AF

Update 1_O

GB

03AF

DATE 09/2003

PAGE 2

PAGE 2

AC

CE

SS

OR

IES

SECTION 3DATE 09/2003

SECTION 3

C2045

C2045

WHEELCHAIR RESTRAINT SYSTEM

Pre-boarding recommendations ............................................................................................ page 12

Securing the chair ................................................................................................................ page 13

Securing the passenger ....................................................................................................... page 16

Warnings ............................................................................................................................. page 19

WHEELCHAIR RESTRAINT SYSTEM

Pre-boarding recommendations ............................................................................................ page 12

Securing the chair ................................................................................................................ page 13

Securing the passenger ....................................................................................................... page 16

Warnings ............................................................................................................................. page 19

Upd

ate

1_O

GB

03A

FU

pdat

e 1_

OG

B03

AF

AC

CE

SS

OR

IES

AC

CE

SS

OR

IES



C2045

C2045

CLIMATE CONTROL

DRIVER'S COMPARTMENT

DRIVER'S DEFROSTER/HEATERThe front-end defroster/heater operatesindependently of the passenger compartmenttemperature control system. It is used to heat thedriver's compartment and to demist or defrost thewindshield. Warm air is ducted to slots at thebase of the windshield, and to adjustable outletson the dashboard and in the footwell.

Air flap control switch:

• fresh air: depress upper part ofswitch

• recirculated air: depress lower partof switch

To operate the defroster/heater:

1. If accelerated warm-up or windshield defrostingis required, depress lower part of air flap controlswitch to obtain inside air recirculation.

2. Set rotary knob to adjust heat of airoutput. Turn clockwise to raise,counterclockwise to lower thetemperature.

3. Set blower switches for bloweroperation. The defroster/heatercontains two blowers which areactivated each with a separateswitch. Each of the two switcheshas three positions: off/low speed/high speed. With one switch youcan control the air flow to thewindshield, with the other the airflow to the footwell and the dashoutlets.

4. Adjust air outlets as required.

CLIMATE CONTROL

DRIVER'S COMPARTMENT

DRIVER'S DEFROSTER/HEATERThe front-end defroster/heater operatesindependently of the passenger compartmenttemperature control system. It is used to heat thedriver's compartment and to demist or defrost thewindshield. Warm air is ducted to slots at thebase of the windshield, and to adjustable outletson the dashboard and in the footwell.


• fresh air: depress upper part ofswitch

• recirculated air: depress lower partof switch

To operate the defroster/heater:

1. If accelerated warm-up or windshield defrostingis required, depress lower part of air flap controlswitch to obtain inside air recirculation.

2. Set rotary knob to adjust heat of airoutput. Turn clockwise to raise,counterclockwise to lower thetemperature.

3. Set blower switches for bloweroperation. The defroster/heatercontains two blowers which areactivated each with a separateswitch. Each of the two switcheshas three positions: off/low speed/high speed. With one switch youcan control the air flow to thewindshield, with the other the airflow to the footwell and the dashoutlets.

4. Adjust air outlets as required.

AC

CE

SS

OR

IES

Update 1_O

GB

03AF

Update 1_O

GB

03AF

DATE 09/2003

PAGE 4

PAGE 4

AC

CE

SS

OR

IES


SECTION 3

C2045

C2045

DRIVER'S AIR CONDITIONINGThe driver's A/C will be automatically activatedwhen the passenger's climate control switch is onand the A/C system is in operation.To control the temperature in the driver's area, turnthe rotary knob:

• clockwise to raise thetemperature

• counterclockwise to lower thetemperature

PASSENGER COMPARTMENTHEATING, VENTILATION ANDAIR-CONDITIONINGThe heating, ventilation and air conditioningsystem (HVAC) of the passengers compartmentis a fully automatic system with the exception ofthe fresh air flaps.

You can set the interiortemperature with rotary knob if:

• engine is running

• climate control on/off switchis in the "ON" position

Once the temperature has been selected, thesystem automatically selects one of the fiveoperating modes:

• Cooling high: Blowers at high speed, full airconditioning

• Cooling low: Blowers at low speed, reducedair conditioning

• Reheat: Blowers at low speed, reduced airconditioning, hot water circulates through theroof heaters only

• Ventilation: Blowers at low speed, air condition-ing off, hot water off.

• Heating: Blowers at low speed, air conditoningoff, hot water circulates through roof and floorheaters. The floor heating elements are of theradiant type.

The blowers in the roof will force the air throughthe adjustable air outlets above the passengerseats and the side windows, through the holes in

DRIVER'S AIR CONDITIONINGThe driver's A/C will be automatically activatedwhen the passenger's climate control switch is onand the A/C system is in operation.To control the temperature in the driver's area, turnthe rotary knob:

• clockwise to raise thetemperature

• counterclockwise to lower thetemperature

PASSENGER COMPARTMENTHEATING, VENTILATION ANDAIR-CONDITIONINGThe heating, ventilation and air conditioningsystem (HVAC) of the passengers compartment isa fully automatic system with the exception of thefresh air flaps.

You can set the interiortemperature with rotary knob if:

• engine is running

• climate control on/off switchis in the "ON" position

Once the temperature has been selected, thesystem automatically selects one of the fiveoperating modes:

• Cooling high: Blowers at high speed, full airconditioning

• Cooling low: Blowers at low speed, reducedair conditioning

• Reheat: Blowers at low speed, reduced airconditioning, hot water circulates through theroof heaters only

• Ventilation: Blowers at low speed, air condition-ing off, hot water off.

• Heating: Blowers at low speed, air conditoningoff, hot water circulates through roof and floorheaters. The floor heating elements are of theradiant type.

The blowers in the roof will force the air throughthe adjustable air outlets above the passengerseats and the side windows, through the holes in

Upd

ate

1_O

GB

03A

FU

pdat

e 1_

OG

B03

AF

AC

CE

SS

OR

IES

AC

CE

SS

OR

IES



C2045

C2045

F04685

Air outlets above passenger seats

the lower edge (aisle side) of the roof duct andthrough several other air outlets in the passengerscompartment.


• fresh air: depress upper part ofswitch.

• recirculated air: depress lower partof switch.

With the system operating while the vehicle isparked, the engine must run on fast idle in order toprovide efficient power to the batteries and therefrigeration system.

NOTE

It is recommended to leave the freshair flaps in the open position at all

times except when the systemefficiency is affected by extreme

outside temperatures. It is also helpfulto temporarily close the fresh air flaps

for rapid cooling and heating.

the lower edge (aisle side) of the roof duct andthrough several other air outlets in the passengerscompartment.

Air flap control switch

• fresh air: depress upper part ofswitch.

• recirculated air: depress lower partof switch.

With the system operating while the vehicle isparked, the engine must run on fast idle in order toprovide efficient power to the batteries and therefrigeration system.

NOTE

It is recommended to leave the freshair flaps in the open position at all

times except when the systemefficiency is affected by extreme

outside temperatures. It is also helpfulto temporarily close the fresh air flaps

for rapid cooling and heating.t

F04685

Air outlets above passenger seats

AC

CE

SS

OR

IES

Update 1_O

GB

03AF

Update 1_O

GB

03AF

DATE 09/2003

PAGE 6

PAGE 6

AC

CE

SS

OR

IES


SECTION 3

C2045

C2045

Climate control panel (optional)

1. Temperature increase button: After pushingthe button, the interior temperature setpoint isincreased with one °F. Standard setpoint is65°F. When the button is pushed for aprolonged time, the setpoint will increaseevery 1/2 second.

2. Temperature indication: The red display willindicate setpoint(standard), interiortemperature or outside temperature.

3. Outside temperature button: After pushingthe button, the outside temperature isdisplayed for 10 seconds, afterwards thesetpoint is indicated.

4. Interior temperature button: After pushingthe button, the interior temperature isdisplayed for 10 seconds, afterwards thesetpoint is indicated.

5. A/C on/fail indicator: The upper led willilluminate when the A/C system is on.The lower led will illuminate whenever there isa problem with the air conditioning system. Inthis event, the system must be checked assoon as possible.

6. Temperature decrease button: After pushingthe button, the interior temperature setpoint isdecreased with one °F. Standard setpoint is65°F. When the button is pushed for aprolonged time, the setpoint will decreaseevery 1/2 second.

T03814

1. Temperature increase button2. Temperature indication3. Outside temperature button4. Interior temperature button5. AC on/fail indicator6. Temperature decrease button

Climate control panel (optional)

1. Temperature increase button: After pushingthe button, the interior temperature setpoint isincreased with one °F. Standard setpoint is65°F. When the button is pushed for aprolonged time, the setpoint will increaseevery 1/2 second.

2. Temperature indication: The red display willindicate setpoint(standard), interiortemperature or outside temperature.

3. Outside temperature button: After pushingthe button, the outside temperature isdisplayed for 10 seconds, afterwards thesetpoint is indicated.

4. Interior temperature button: After pushingthe button, the interior temperature isdisplayed for 10 seconds, afterwards thesetpoint is indicated.

5. A/C on/fail indicator: The upper led willilluminate when the A/C system is on.The lower led will illuminate whenever there isa problem with the air conditioning system. Inthis event, the system must be checked assoon as possible.

6. Temperature decrease button: After pushingthe button, the interior temperature setpoint isdecreased with one °F. Standard setpoint is65°F. When the button is pushed for aprolonged time, the setpoint will decreaseevery 1/2 second.

T03814

1. Temperature increase button2. Temperature indication3. Outside temperature button4. Interior temperature button5. AC on/fail indicator6. Temperature decrease button

Upd

ate

1_O

GB

03A

FU

pdat

e 1_

OG

B03

AF

AC

CE

SS

OR

IES

AC

CE

SS

OR

IES



C2045

C2045

COMBUSTION HEATER

The combustion heater compartment is located inthe front of the left drive wheel.

It operates on diesel fuel and is designed topreheat the engine cooling system for coldweather starting and to supplement engine heatfor the vehicle heating system.

Combustion heater indicator light (green)


The heater is operated in two ways:

• Preheating:

By programming the digital timer oroperating the on/off switch located onthe dashboard. Once the heater isswitched "on" and the coolanttemperature is cool enough, the heaterwill heat and circulate the coolant

throughout the engine and the interior heatingsystem. The heater will continue to operate andmaintain water temperature for a maximum of onehour from the time it was switched "ON".

••••• Supplemental engine heat:

Automatically when the HVAC unit is in theHEATING or VENTILATION mode.

!! CAUTION !!!

DO NOT OPERATE THE COMBUSTION

HEATER IN CONFINED AREAS UNLESS IT

IS CONNECTED TO A PROPER EXHAUST

REMOVING SYSTEM.


HEATER WHILE FUELLING OR NEAR A

SOURCE OF FUEL.

COMBUSTION HEATER EXHAUST GASES

ARE DANGEROUS TO PEOPLE AND

PRESENT A FIRE HAZARD.

NOTE

It is not necessary to switch onthe master switch or ignition switch to

operate the combustion heater.

COMBUSTION HEATER

The combustion heater compartment is located inthe front of the left drive wheel.

It operates on diesel fuel and is designed topreheat the engine cooling system for coldweather starting and to supplement engine heatfor the vehicle heating system.

Combustion heater indicator light (green)


The heater is operated in two ways:

• Preheating:

By programming the digital timer oroperating the on/off switch located onthe dashboard. Once the heater isswitched "on" and the coolanttemperature is cool enough, the heaterwill heat and circulate the coolant

throughout the engine and the interior heatingsystem. The heater will continue to operate andmaintain water temperature for a maximum of onehour from the time it was switched "ON".

••••• Supplemental engine heat:

Automatically when the HVAC unit is in theHEATING or VENTILATION mode.

!! CAUTION !!!


HEATER IN CONFINED AREAS UNLESS IT

IS CONNECTED TO A PROPER EXHAUST

REMOVING SYSTEM.


HEATER WHILE FUELLING OR NEAR A

SOURCE OF FUEL.

COMBUSTION HEATER EXHAUST GASES

ARE DANGEROUS TO PEOPLE AND

PRESENT A FIRE HAZARD.

NOTE

It is not necessary to switch onthe master switch or ignition switch to

operate the combustion heater.

AC

CE

SS

OR

IES

Update 1_O

GB

03AF

Update 1_O

GB

03AF

DATE 09/2003

PAGE 8

PAGE 8

AC

CE

SS

OR

IES


SECTION 3

C2045

C2045

OPERATION WITH DIGITALTIMER(OPTIONAL)

OPERATION WITH DIGITALTIMER(OPTIONAL)

Upd

ate

1_O

GB

03A

FU

pdat

e 1_

OG

B03

AF

AC

CE

SS

OR

IES

AC

CE

SS

OR

IES



C2045

C2045

LAVATORY

F04141

The lavatory compartment is located at the rightrear of the coach. It is standard equipped with achemical toilet, wet napkin dispenser, wastepaper container and mirror.

The compartment flood light will illuminate withthe master/ignition switch in the second position.With the engine running the ventilation fan willstart to run at low speed. Locking the door frominside will turn the ventilation fan to high speed,illuminate the compartment roof lights andilluminate the occupied light.

This light will come on, when thewaste holding tank is nearly full.

LAVATORY

F04141

The lavatory compartment is located at the rightrear of the coach. It is standard equipped with achemical toilet, wet napkin dispenser, wastepaper container and mirror.

The compartment flood light will illuminate withthe master/ignition switch in the second position.With the engine running the ventilation fan willstart to run at low speed. Locking the door frominside will turn the ventilation fan to high speed,illuminate the compartment roof lights andilluminate the occupied light.

This light will come on, when thewaste holding tank is nearly full.

AC

CE

SS

OR

IES

Update 1_O

GB

03AF

Update 1_O

GB

03AF

DATE 09/2003

PAGE 10

PAGE 10

AC

CE

SS

OR

IES


SECTION 3

C2045

C2045

WHEELCHAIR LIFT(OPTIONAL)

TO DEPLOY THE WHEELCHAIRLIFT SYSTEM

1. Park the coach on a level surface with thetransmission in neutral, apply the parkingbrake and leave the engine running (shut downthe engine if required by local law).

2. Make sure both of the lift doors are properlyclosed.

3. Press the "LIFT POWER" switch once..

• The system is now switched on.• The indicator lights next to the "LIFT

POWER" switch come on.• The drive and tag axle service brakes areactivated (interlock).• The wheelchair lift system is enabled;• The lift can be deployed.

4. Deploy the lift according to the OEM operatinginstructions supplied with the coach (see liftmanual in lift door pocket).

TO SHUT OFF THEWHEELCHAIR LIFT SYSTEM

1. Stow the lift carefully according to the OEMoperating instructions supplied with the coach(see lift manual in lift door pocket).

2. Close the lift doors.

F05963

"Lift Power" switch

WHEELCHAIR LIFT(OPTIONAL)

TO DEPLOY THE WHEELCHAIRLIFT SYSTEM

1. Park the coach on a level surface with thetransmission in neutral, apply the parkingbrake and leave the engine running (shut downthe engine if required by local law).

2. Make sure both of the lift doors are properlyclosed.

3. Press the "LIFT POWER" switch once..

• The system is now switched on.• The indicator lights next to the "LIFT

POWER" switch come on.• The drive and tag axle service brakes areactivated (interlock).• The wheelchair lift system is enabled;• The lift can be deployed.

4. Deploy the lift according to the OEM operatinginstructions supplied with the coach (see liftmanual in lift door pocket).

TO SHUT OFF THE WHEEL-CHAIR LIFT SYSTEM

1. Stow the lift carefully according to the OEMoperating instructions supplied with the coach(see lift manual in lift door pocket).

2. Close the lift doors.

F05963

"Lift Power" switch

Upd

ate

1_O

GB

03A

FU

pdat

e 1_

OG

B03

AF

AC

CE

SS

OR

IES

AC

CE

SS

OR

IES



C2045

C2045

3. With the parking brake still applied, press the"LIFT POWER" switch on the instrument panelonce.• The system is now switched off.• The indicator lights next to the switch go out.• The interlock is released.• The wheelchair lift system is disabled.• The lift cannot be deployed anymore.

4. It is now safe to drive the coach.

EMERGENCY PROCEDURE

!!! CAUTION !!!

PARKING BRAKE MUST BE APPLIED ANDTRANSMISSION IN NEUTRAL.

When the lift system fails to become activatedbecause of a malfunctioning "LIFT POWER" switch orlift door microswitch, throwing the RL53 switch inthe main junction box (see figure) may put it inoperation.

NOTE:

THE "LIFT POWER" SWITCH CANNOT BESWITCHED ON OR OFF IF:

• THE PARKING BRAKE IS RELEASED.• THE LIFT IS NOT PROPERLY STOWED.

• THE LIFT DOORS ARE OPEN.

F05964

Lift interlock system override switch on relayRL53

3. With the parking brake still applied, press the"LIFT POWER" switch on the instrument panelonce.• The system is now switched off.• The indicator lights next to the switch go out.• The interlock is released.• The wheelchair lift system is disabled.• The lift cannot be deployed anymore.

4. It is now safe to drive the coach.

EMERGENCY PROCEDURE

!!! CAUTION !!!

PARKING BRAKE MUST BE APPLIED ANDTRANSMISSION IN NEUTRAL.

When the lift system fails to become activatedbecause of a malfunctioning "LIFT POWER" switch orlift door microswitch, throwing the RL53 switch inthe main junction box (see figure) may put it inoperation.

NOTE:

THE "LIFT POWER" SWITCH CANNOT BESWITCHED ON OR OFF IF:

• THE PARKING BRAKE IS RELEASED.• THE LIFT IS NOT PROPERLY STOWED.

• THE LIFT DOORS ARE OPEN.

F05964

Lift interlock system override switch on relayRL53

AC

CE

SS

OR

IES

Update 1_O

GB

03AF

Update 1_O

GB

03AF

DATE 09/2003

PAGE 12

PAGE 12

AC

CE

SS

OR

IES


SECTION 3

C2045

C2045

NOTE:

THE COACH CANNOT BE MOVED IF:

• THE "LIFT POWER" SWITCH IS INTHE "ON" POSITION.

• THE LIFT IS NOT PROPERLY STOWED.

WHEELCHAIRRESTRAINT

SYSTEM

PRE-BOARDINGRECOMMENDATIONS

• Inspect and prepare all your restraint systembelts.

• Be sensitive to your passenger• Be careful in handling the wheelchair• Explain to your passenger what you are doing

to make them feel comfortable with theprocess.

• List of belts for each passenger and chairlocation:-two front wheelchair tiedowns-two rear wheelchair tiedowns-one upper torso belt occupant tiedown-one pelvic belt occupant tiedown

NOTE:

DO NOT ALTER ANY OF THE RESTRAINTSYSTEM BELTS OR COMPONENTS.

DO NOT INTERCHANGE BELTS FROM ONEWHEELCHAIR POSITION TO ANOTHER.ALWAYS KEEP BELTS TOGETHER AS A

COMPLETE KIT.

NOTE:

THE COACH CANNOT BE MOVED IF:

• THE "LIFT POWER" SWITCH IS INTHE "ON" POSITION.

• THE LIFT IS NOT PROPERLY STOWED.

WHEELCHAIRRESTRAINT

SYSTEM

PRE-BOARDINGRECOMMENDATIONS

• Inspect and prepare all your restraint systembelts.

• Be sensitive to your passenger• Be careful in handling the wheelchair• Explain to your passenger what you are doing

to make them feel comfortable with theprocess.

• List of belts for each passenger and chairlocation:-two front wheelchair tiedowns-two rear wheelchair tiedowns-one upper torso belt occupant tiedown-one pelvic belt occupant tiedown

NOTE:

DO NOT ALTER ANY OF THE RESTRAINTSYSTEM BELTS OR COMPONENTS.

DO NOT INTERCHANGE BELTS FROM ONEWHEELCHAIR POSITION TO ANOTHER.ALWAYS KEEP BELTS TOGETHER AS A

COMPLETE KIT.

Upd

ate

1_O

GB

03A

FU

pdat

e 1_

OG

B03

AF

AC

CE

SS

OR

IES

AC

CE

SS

OR

IES



C2045

C2045

SECURING THE CHAIR

1. Position wheelchair

Wheel the chair into a forward facing positioncentering the chair squarely on all four corners ofthe tiedown anchorage points. The front and rearbelts, when fastened, should create anglesapproximately as shown in figure 1.

Turn off power on electric chairs and release chairbrakes.

NOTE:

THE "X" IN EACH OF THE FIGURESINDICATES A TIEDOWN ANCHORAGE POINT.

Figure 1: Preferred angles and locations oftiedown straps from wheelchair securementpoints to vehicle anchor points. Fronttiedowns should be angled out for lateralstability when possible. D= 12"

SECURING THE CHAIR

1. Position wheelchair

Wheel the chair into a forward facing positioncentering the chair squarely on all four corners ofthe tiedown anchorage points. The front and rearbelts, when fastened, should create anglesapproximately as shown in figure 1.

Turn off power on electric chairs and release chairbrakes.

NOTE:

THE "X" IN EACH OF THE FIGURESINDICATES A TIEDOWN ANCHORAGE POINT.

Figure 1: Preferred angles and locations oftiedown straps from wheelchair securementpoints to vehicle anchor points. Fronttiedowns should be angled out for lateralstability when possible. D= 12"

AC

CE

SS

OR

IES

Update 1_O

GB

03AF

Update 1_O

GB

03AF

DATE 09/2003

PAGE 14

PAGE 14

AC

CE

SS

OR

IES


SECTION 3

C2045

C2045

2. Secure the two front belts

Attach the front belts by connecting the chairhook to a solid frame member of the chair asshown in figure 2. Connect the opposite end to theappropriate tiedown anchorage point. Belt anglesfor the front belts should be maintained as shownin figure 1.

T06081

T06082

Figure 2

Figure 3

If necessary, pull the loose end of the belt untilsnug and connect velcro tabs (if applicable) tokeep excess belting off the floor as shown infigure 3.

2. Secure the two front belts

Attach the front belts by connecting the chairhook to a solid frame member of the chair asshown in figure 2. Connect the opposite end to theappropriate tiedown anchorage point. Belt anglesfor the front belts should be maintained as shownin figure 1.

T06081

T06082

Figure 2

Figure 3

If necessary, pull the loose end of the belt untilsnug and connect velcro tabs (if applicable) tokeep excess belting off the floor as shown infigure 3.

Upd

ate

1_O

GB

03A

FU

pdat

e 1_

OG

B03

AF

AC

CE

SS

OR

IES

AC

CE

SS

OR

IES



C2045

C2045

3. Secure the two rear belts

Attach rear belts by connecting the chair hook toa solid frame member close to the point where thechair back and cushion meet as shown in figure 4.

Attach the opposite end to the appropriate tiedownanchorage point. Belt angles for the rear beltsshould be maintained as shown in figure 1.

T06083

T06084

Figure 4

Figure 5

If necessary, with the buckle open, pull the looseend of the belt until snug. While holding the looseend with one hand, close the lever of the clampdown until it locks and connect velcro (ifappicable) to keep excess belting off the floor asshown in figure 5. Check that the belts are tightand the chair is secure enough so that it does nothave any movement back and forth... now applythe chair brake.

NOTE:

FRONT AND REAR BELT TENSION ISESSENTIAL TO FIRM SECUREMENT OFCHAIR. FINAL TENSIONING IN CHAIR

SECUREMENT SYSTEM IS PROVIDED BYREAR BUCKLES.

3. Secure the two rear belts

Attach rear belts by connecting the chair hook toa solid frame member close to the point where thechair back and cushion meet as shown in figure 4.

Attach the opposite end to the appropriate tiedownanchorage point. Belt angles for the rear beltsshould be maintained as shown in figure 1.

T06083

T06084

Figure 4

Figure 5

If necessary, with the buckle open, pull the looseend of the belt until snug. While holding the looseend with one hand, close the lever of the clampdown until it locks and connect velcro (ifappicable) to keep excess belting off the floor asshown in figure 5. Check that the belts are tightand the chair is secure enough so that it does nothave any movement back and forth... now applythe chair brake.

NOTE:

FRONT AND REAR BELT TENSION ISESSENTIAL TO FIRM SECUREMENT OF

CHAIR. FINAL TENSIONING IN CHAIRSECUREMENT SYSTEM IS PROVIDED BY

REAR BUCKLES.

AC

CE

SS

OR

IES

Update 1_O

GB

03AF

Update 1_O

GB

03AF

DATE 09/2003

PAGE 16

PAGE 16

AC

CE

SS

OR

IES


SECTION 3

C2045

C2045

SECURING THE PASSENGER

4. Attach the occupant tiedowns

Pass the loose ends of the pelvic belt around theoccupant and downward toward the rearwheelchair tiedowns. Connect the loose ends ofthe pelvic belt to the appropriate connectors onthe rear wheelchair tiedowns as shown in figure 6.

NOTE:

PELVIC BELT SHOULD PASS BETWEEN THEGAP IN THE SIDE PANELS AND THE SEAT,OR BETWEEN THE GAP IN THE SEAT AND

THE BACK REST.MAKE SURE BOTH SIDES OF THE PELVIC

BELT ARE SECURELY FASTENED.

T06083 Figure 6

SECURING THE PASSENGER

4. Attach the occupant tiedowns

Pass the loose ends of the pelvic belt around theoccupant and downward toward the rearwheelchair tiedowns. Connect the loose ends ofthe pelvic belt to the appropriate connectors onthe rear wheelchair tiedowns as shown in figure 6.

NOTE:

PELVIC BELT SHOULD PASS BETWEEN THEGAP IN THE SIDE PANELS AND THE SEAT,OR BETWEEN THE GAP IN THE SEAT AND

THE BACK REST.MAKE SURE BOTH SIDES OF THE PELVIC

BELT ARE SECURELY FASTENED.

T06083 Figure 6

Upd

ate

1_O

GB

03A

FU

pdat

e 1_

OG

B03

AF

AC

CE

SS

OR

IES

AC

CE

SS

OR

IES



C2045

C2045

Belt should bear upon the bony structure of thebody and should be worn low across the front ofthe pelvis with junction between the lap andshoulder belts located near the passenger's hip.Belt angle should be approximately within thezones shown in figure 7. The belt should beadjusted as firmly as possible consistent withuser comfort. Ensure that belt is not twisted.

NOTE:

NEVER SITUATE THE PELVIC BELT OVERTHE ABDOMINAL AREA OR ARMREST AS

SHOWN IN FIGURE 8.

Figure 7

Figure 8

Belt should bear upon the bony structure of thebody and should be worn low across the front ofthe pelvis with junction between the lap andshoulder belts located near the passenger's hip.Belt angle should be approximately within thezones shown in figure 7. The belt should beadjusted as firmly as possible consistent withuser comfort. Ensure that belt is not twisted.

NOTE:

NEVER SITUATE THE PELVIC BELT OVERTHE ABDOMINAL AREA OR ARMREST AS

SHOWN IN FIGURE 8.

Figure 7

Figure 8

AC

CE

SS

OR

IES

Update 1_O

GB

03AF

Update 1_O

GB

03AF

DATE 09/2003

PAGE 18

PAGE 18

AC

CE

SS

OR

IES


SECTION 3

C2045

C2045

5. Attach the upper torso belt

If necessary, connect the upper torso belt to eitherthe left or right pin of the pelvic belt (this dependson which side of the vehicle the chair is located -i.e. right hand pin if the chair is on the left sideand left hand pin if the chair is on the right side)as shown in the figure 9.

T06083 Figure 9

T06083 Figure 10

Pull adjustment snugly (see figure 10). Uppertorso belt should be adjusted as firmly as possibleconsistent with upper comfort. Ensure that belt isnot twisted.

NOTE:

UPPER TORSO SHOULD LIE ACROSS THEMID POINT OF THE SHOULDER AND TRAVEL

UPWARD AND REARWARD FROM THATPOINT TO ENSURE THAT DOWNWARDFORCES ON THE SPINE ARE AVOIDED.

5. Attach the upper torso belt

If necessary, connect the upper torso belt to eitherthe left or right pin of the pelvic belt (this dependson which side of the vehicle the chair is located -i.e. right hand pin if the chair is on the left sideand left hand pin if the chair is on the right side)as shown in the figure 9.

T06083 Figure 9

T06083 Figure 10

Pull adjustment snugly (see figure 10). Uppertorso belt should be adjusted as firmly as possibleconsistent with upper comfort. Ensure that belt isnot twisted.

NOTE:

UPPER TORSO SHOULD LIE ACROSS THEMID POINT OF THE SHOULDER AND TRAVEL

UPWARD AND REARWARD FROM THATPOINT TO ENSURE THAT DOWNWARDFORCES ON THE SPINE ARE AVOIDED.

Upd

ate

1_O

GB

03A

FU

pdat

e 1_

OG

B03

AF

AC

CE

SS

OR

IES

AC

CE

SS

OR

IES



C2045

C2045

WARNINGS

• Occupant restraints should not be held awayfrom the body by wheelchair components or partssuch as the wheelchair armrests or wheels (seefigure 8).

• Never rely on the chair's own lap belt unless it isQ'Straint approved or strength is confirmed.

• Make sure belts are kept clean and off the floorand stored in Wall Pouch.

• Make sure you use your own driver's seat belt.

• The "Restraint" system should be used inaccordance with these instructions.

· The "Restraint" system has been dynamicallytested with an ATD restrained by both pelvic (lap)and upper torso (shoulder) belts. Use of only apelvic belt may comprise the safety of thepassenger.

WARNINGS

• Occupant restraints should not be held awayfrom the body by wheelchair components or partssuch as the wheelchair armrests or wheels (seefigure 8).

• Never rely on the chair's own lap belt unless it isQ'Straint approved or strength is confirmed.

• Make sure belts are kept clean and off the floorand stored in Wall Pouch.

• Make sure you use your own driver's seat belt.

• The "Restraint" system should be used inaccordance with these instructions.

· The "Restraint" system has been dynamicallytested with an ATD restrained by both pelvic (lap)and upper torso (shoulder) belts. Use of only apelvic belt may comprise the safety of thepassenger.

AC

CE

SS

OR

IES

Update 1_O

GB

03AF

Update 1_O

GB

03AF

DATE 09/2003

PAGE 20

PAGE 20

AC

CE

SS

OR

IES


SECTION 3

C2045

C2045

MA

INT

EN

AN

CE

MA

INT

EN

AN

CE

Upd

ate_

A_O

GB

04A

GU

pdat

e_A

_OG

B04

AG

PAGE 1DATE 10/2004


SECTION 4

C2045

C2045

!!! CAUTION !!!

THIS SECTION COVERS COMMON MAINTENANCE THAT MAY NEED TO BE DONE WHILE

THE COACH IS AWAY FROM AN AUTHORIZED SERVICE CENTER OR THE OPERATOR'S

LOCATION. THESE PROCEDURES ARE PROVIDED AS BASIC GUIDELINES ONLY, AND DO

NOT TAKE THE PLACE OF MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES AS DESCRIBED WITHIN THE

APPROPRIATE MAINTENANCE MANUALS FOR THE COACH OR COMPONENTS.

WHEN WORKING WITH OILS, COOLANTS OR OTHER LIQUIDS, BE ESPECIALLY

WATCHFUL FOR BURN DANGERS. IF POSSIBLE, ALLOW THE COACH TO COOL OFF

FOR SEVERAL HOURS BEFORE CONDUCTING MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES.

!!! CAUTION !!!

THIS SECTION COVERS COMMON MAINTENANCE THAT MAY NEED TO BE DONE WHILE

THE COACH IS AWAY FROM AN AUTHORIZED SERVICE CENTER OR THE OPERATOR'S

LOCATION. THESE PROCEDURES ARE PROVIDED AS BASIC GUIDELINES ONLY, AND DO

NOT TAKE THE PLACE OF MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES AS DESCRIBED WITHIN THE

APPROPRIATE MAINTENANCE MANUALS FOR THE COACH OR COMPONENTS.

WHEN WORKING WITH OILS, COOLANTS OR OTHER LIQUIDS, BE ESPECIALLY

WATCHFUL FOR BURN DANGERS. IF POSSIBLE, ALLOW THE COACH TO COOL OFF

FOR SEVERAL HOURS BEFORE CONDUCTING MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES.

MA

INT

EN

AN

CE

MA

INT

EN

AN

CE

Update_A

_OG

B04A

GU

pdate_A_O

GB

04AG


DATE 10/2004PAGE 2 SECTION 4C2045

C2045

MAINTENANCE

ENGINE

To check engine oil level ............................................................................................... page 5To check coolant level ................................................................................................... page 8To drain (primary) fuel filter (Cummins and Caterpillar engines) ...................................... page 10To inspect drive belts ..................................................................................................... page 10To inspect crankcase breather tube (Cummins engine only) .......................................... page 11

AIR CLEANER

To check condition ........................................................................................................ page 12Dump valve .................................................................................................................... page 12To change air-cleaner element ....................................................................................... page 12

WT B500 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

To check fluid level with dipstick .................................................................................... page 15To check fluid level with push-button selector ................................................................ page 17

POWER STEERING SYSTEM

To check fluid level ........................................................................................................ page 20

MAINTENANCE

ENGINE

To check engine oil level ............................................................................................... page 5To check coolant level ................................................................................................... page 8To drain (primary) fuel filter (Cummins and Caterpillar engines) ...................................... page 10To inspect drive belts ..................................................................................................... page 10To inspect crankcase breather tube (Cummins engine only) .......................................... page 11

AIR CLEANER

To check condition ........................................................................................................ page 12Dump valve .................................................................................................................... page 12To change air-cleaner element ....................................................................................... page 12

WT B500 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

To check fluid level with dipstick .................................................................................... page 15To check fluid level with push-button selector ................................................................ page 17



MA

INT

EN

AN

CE

MA

INT

EN

AN

CE

Upd

ate_

A_O

GB

04A

GU

pdat

e_A

_OG

B04

AG

PAGE 3DATE 10/2004


SECTION 4

C2045

C2045

TIRES ............................................................................................................................... page 21

To check tire inflation pressure ...................................................................................... page 21

To inspect tires.............................................................................................................. page 22

ROAD WHEELS

To check wheel nut tightening torque............................................................................. page 22

SUSPENSION

To check normal body ground clearance ....................................................................... page 23

To check shock absorbers ............................................................................................ page 23

BATTERIES

To check battery fluid level ............................................................................................ page 24

To check battery cables ................................................................................................ page 24

WINDSHIELD WASHER


TIRES ............................................................................................................................... page 21

To check tire inflation pressure ...................................................................................... page 21

To inspect tires.............................................................................................................. page 22

ROAD WHEELS

To check wheel nut tightening torque............................................................................. page 22

SUSPENSION

To check normal body ground clearance ....................................................................... page 23

To check shock absorbers ............................................................................................ page 23

BATTERIES

To check battery fluid level ............................................................................................ page 24

To check battery cables ................................................................................................ page 24

WINDSHIELD WASHER


MA

INT

EN

AN

CE

MA

INT

EN

AN

CE

Update_A

_OG

B04A

GU

pdate_A_O

GB

04AG



C2045

TOILET

To drain the toilet ........................................................................................................... page 26To fill the toilet ............................................................................................................... page 26To flush ......................................................................................................................... page 27To operate the toilet in cold weather .............................................................................. page 27To clean the interior of the lavatory compartment ........................................................... page 29

WASTE HOLDING TANK .................................................................................................. page 29

APPEARANCE CARE

Coach exterior ............................................................................................................... page 23Coach interior ................................................................................................................ page 33

TOILET

To drain the toilet ........................................................................................................... page 26To fill the toilet ............................................................................................................... page 26To flush ......................................................................................................................... page 27To operate the toilet in cold weather .............................................................................. page 27To clean the interior of the lavatory compartment ........................................................... page 29

WASTE HOLDING TANK .................................................................................................. page 29

APPEARANCE CARE

Coach exterior ............................................................................................................... page 23Coach interior ................................................................................................................ page 33

MA

INT

EN

AN

CE

MA

INT

EN

AN

CE

Upd

ate_

A_O

GB

04A

GU

pdat

e_A

_OG

B04

AG

PAGE 5DATE 10/2004


SECTION 4

C2045

C2045

F04393

T03003

ENGINE

TO CHECK ENGINE OIL LEVEL

Cummins engine

Check the oil level daily.

The coach must be on level ground during the oillevel checking. Otherwise the measurement maybe inaccurate.

Wait at least five minutes after shutting off theengine before checking the oil. This gives the oilthe time to drain to the oil pan.

Never operate the engine with the oil level belowthe "L" (low) mark or above the "H" (high) markon the dipstick.

If necessary, add oil until it reaches the "H" (high)mark on the dipstick. The difference between the"L" (low) mark and the "H" (high) mark on thedipstick amounts to 2 U.S. gallons. For oilrecommendations, see "Lubricants and Fluids"Section.

ENGINE

TO CHECK ENGINE OIL LEVEL

Cummins engine



Wait at least five minutes after shutting off theengine before checking the oil. This gives the oilthe time to drain to the oil pan.

T03003

Never operate the engine with the oil level belowthe "L" (low) mark or above the "H" (high) mark onthe dipstick.

If necessary, add oil until it reaches the "H" (high)mark on the dipstick. The difference between the"L" (low) mark and the "H" (high) mark on thedipstick amounts to 2 U.S. gallons. For oilrecommendations, see "Lubricants and Fluids"Section.

Dipstick

Engine oilfiller tube

F04393

Dipstick


MA

INT

EN

AN

CE

MA

INT

EN

AN

CE

Update_A

_OG

B04A

GU

pdate_A_O

GB

04AG



C2045

F02925




Wait at least twenty minutes after shutting off thewarm engine before checking the oil. This givesthe oil the time to drain to the oil pan.

Never operate the engine with the oil level belowthe "L" (low) mark or above the "F" (full) mark onthe dipstick.

If necessary, add oil until it reaches the "F" (full)mark on the dipstick. The difference between the"L" (low) mark and the "F" (full) mark on thedipstick amounts to 6 U.S. Qts. For oilrecommendations, see "Lubricants and Fluids"Section.




Wait at least twenty minutes after shutting off thewarm engine before checking the oil. This givesthe oil the time to drain to the oil pan.

Never operate the engine with the oil level belowthe "L" (low) mark or above the "F" (full) mark onthe dipstick.

If necessary, add oil until it reaches the "F" (full)mark on the dipstick. The difference between the"L" (low) mark and the "F" (full) mark on thedipstick amounts to 6 U.S. Qts. For oilrecommendations, see "Lubricants and Fluids"Section.

DDEC IV

Dipstick


DDEC IV with EGR and DDEC V

Dipstick


F02925DDEC IV

Dipstick


DDEC IV with EGR and DDEC V

Dipstick


MA

INT

EN

AN

CE

MA

INT

EN

AN

CE

Upd

ate_

A_O

GB

04A

GU

pdat

e_A

_OG

B04

AG

PAGE 7DATE 10/2004


SECTION 4

C2045

C2045

Caterpillar engine


Perform this check with the engine stopped.

1. Maintain the oil level between the "ADD" markand "FULL" mark on the dipstick. Do not fill thecrankcase above "FULL" mark.

!!! CAUTION !!!

ENGINE DAMAGE CAN OCCUR IF THECRANKCASE IS FILLED ABOVE THE "FULL"

MARK ON THE DIPSTICK.

IF THE OIL LEVEL IS ABOVE THE "FULL"MARK ON THE DIPSTICK, DRAIN SOME OF

THE OIL IMMEDIATELY.

2. Remove the oil filler cap and add oil, ifnecessary.For oil recommendations, see"Lubricants and Fluids" Section. Do not fill thecrankcase above the "FULL" mark on thedipstick. Clean the oil filler cap. Install the oilfiller cap.

1. Dipstick2. Engine oil filler tube

Caterpillar engine


Perform this check with the engine stopped.

1. Maintain the oil level between the "ADD" markand "FULL" mark on the dipstick. Do not fill thecrankcase above "FULL" mark.

!!! CAUTION !!!

ENGINE DAMAGE CAN OCCUR IF THECRANKCASE IS FILLED ABOVE THE "FULL"

MARK ON THE DIPSTICK.

IF THE OIL LEVEL IS ABOVE THE "FULL"MARK ON THE DIPSTICK, DRAIN SOME OF

THE OIL IMMEDIATELY.

2. Remove the oil filler cap and add oil, ifnecessary.For oil recommendations, see"Lubricants and Fluids" Section. Do not fill thecrankcase above the "FULL" mark on thedipstick. Clean the oil filler cap. Install the oilfiller cap.

1. Dipstick2. Engine oil filler tube

MA

INT

EN

AN

CE

MA

INT

EN

AN

CE

Update_A

_OG

B04A

GU

pdate_A_O

GB

04AG



C2045

T03340

TEMP.

TO CHECK COOLANT LEVEL

!!! CAUTION !!!

NEVER REMOVE THE SURGE TANK FILLER

CAP, IF THE COOLANT TEMPERATURE

IS ABOVE 120°F. COOLANT AND

STEAM MAY BE BLOWN OUT,

POSSIBLY CAUSING PERSONAL INJURY.

IF THE FILLER CAP MUST BE OPENED

WHILE THE ENGINE IS HOT, TURN IT

CAREFULLY TO THE LEFT UNTIL THE

FIRST STOP AND LET THE PRESSURE

ESCAPE. THEN TURN TO THE SECOND

STOP AND REMOVE THE CAP.

DO NOT ADD COLD COOLANT WHEN

THE ENGINE IS HOT. ENGINE CASTINGS

MAY BE DAMAGED. ALLOW THE ENGINE

TO COOL TO BELOW 120°F BEFORE

ADDING COOLANT.

TO CHECK COOLANT LEVEL

!!! CAUTION !!!

NEVER REMOVE THE SURGE TANK FILLER

CAP, IF THE COOLANT TEMPERATURE

IS ABOVE 120°F. COOLANT AND

STEAM MAY BE BLOWN OUT,

POSSIBLY CAUSING PERSONAL INJURY.

IF THE FILLER CAP MUST BE OPENED

WHILE THE ENGINE IS HOT, TURN IT

CAREFULLY TO THE LEFT UNTIL THE

FIRST STOP AND LET THE PRESSURE

ESCAPE. THEN TURN TO THE SECOND

STOP AND REMOVE THE CAP.

DO NOT ADD COLD COOLANT WHEN

THE ENGINE IS HOT. ENGINE CASTINGS

MAY BE DAMAGED. ALLOW THE ENGINE

TO COOL TO BELOW 120°F BEFORE

ADDING COOLANT.

T03340

TEMP.

MA

INT

EN

AN

CE

MA

INT

EN

AN

CE

Upd

ate_

A_O

GB

04A

GU

pdat

e_A

_OG

B04

AG

PAGE 9DATE 10/2004


SECTION 4

C2045

C2045

T05203

The coolant level must be checked daily.

With the engine cold, check whether the coolantlevel is between the "MIN" and "MAX" indicatorson the surge tank. If coolant level drops below the"MIN" indicator, "Engine Protection System" willderate the engine power.

As necessary, fill the system until the coolantlevel is to the "MAX" indicator using:

• for Cummins engine: ethelyne form of"Fleetguard Compleat";

• for Detroit Diesel engine: water mixed with"Power Cool" (= fully formulated, inhibitedethylene glycol-base anti-freeze).

• for Caterpillar: water mixed with CaterpillarDEAC (= fully formulated, inhibited ethyleneglycol-base anti-freeze).

Do not add plain water. Otherwise theanti-freeze/SCA (supplemental coolant additives)solution in the cooling system will beprogressively diluted, causing a reduction of frostand corrosion prevention properties.1. Filler cap

2. Surge tank3. Low coolant level sensor

T04157

MIN

MAX

4. Pressure relief cap5. Gauge glass

The coolant level must be checked daily.

With the engine cold, check whether the coolantlevel is between the "MIN" and "MAX" indicatorson the surge tank. If coolant level drops below the"MIN" indicator, "Engine Protection System" willderate the engine power.

T05203

1. Filler cap2. Surge tank3. Low coolant level sensor

4. Pressure relief cap5. Gauge glass

As necessary, fill the system until the coolantlevel is to the "MAX" indicator using:

• for Cummins engine: ethelyne form of"Fleetguard Compleat";

• for Detroit Diesel engine: water mixed with"Power Cool" (= fully formulated, inhibitedethylene glycol-base anti-freeze).

• for Caterpillar: water mixed with CaterpillarDEAC (= fully formulated, inhibited ethyleneglycol-base anti-freeze).

Do not add plain water. Otherwise theanti-freeze/SCA (supplemental coolant additives)solution in the cooling system will beprogressively diluted, causing a reduction of frostand corrosion prevention properties.

T04157

MIN

MAX

MA

INT

EN

AN

CE

MA

INT

EN

AN

CE

Update_A

_OG

B04A

GU

pdate_A_O

GB

04AG



C2045

T02644

T00222

TO DRAIN (PRIMARY) FUEL FILTER(Cummins and Caterpillar engines)Drain the fuel filter daily. Shut off the engine. Useyour hand to open the drain valve. Turn the valvecounterclockwise approx. 1 ½ to 2 turns untildraining occurs. Drain the filter until clear fuelemerges from it.

When closing the valve, do not overtighten it.Overtightening may damage the threads. Turn thevalve clockwise to close. Dispose of the drainedwater in accordance with local environmentalregulations.

TO INSPECT DRIVE BELTS

Visually inspect the belts every day for cracks andexcessive wear.

V-belts

Change the V-belts, if they look frayed (worn) or ifyou notice one of the following defects (see figureopposite):

1. Cracks in sides or bottom.2. Soft, sticky sides, sometimes flaking.Swollen

profile (rubber affected by grease or oil).3. Glazed (burned) sides.4. Cuts or tears.

TO DRAIN (PRIMARY) FUEL FILTER(Cummins and Caterpillar engines)Drain the fuel filter daily. Shut off the engine. Useyour hand to open the drain valve. Turn the valvecounterclockwise approx. 1 ½ to 2 turns untildraining occurs. Drain the filter until clear fuelemerges from it.

When closing the valve, do not overtighten it.Overtightening may damage the threads. Turnthe valve clockwise to close. Dispose of thedrained water in accordance with localenvironmental regulations.

TO INSPECT DRIVE BELTSVisually inspect the belts every day for cracks andexcessive wear.

V-belts

Change the V-belts, if they look frayed (worn) or ifyou notice one of the following defects (see figureopposite):

1. Cracks in sides or bottom.2. Soft, sticky sides, sometimes flaking.Swollen

profile (rubber affected by grease or oil).3. Glazed (burned) sides.4. Cuts or tears.

T02644

T00222

MA

INT

EN

AN

CE

MA

INT

EN

AN

CE

Upd

ate_

A_O

GB

04A

GU

pdat

e_A

_OG

B04

AG

PAGE 11DATE 10/2004


SECTION 4

C2045

C2045

T02643

T03004

V-ribbed belt

Check V-ribbed belt for intersecting cracks.Transverse (across the belt width) cracks areacceptable. Longitudinal (direction of belt length)cracks intersecting with transverse cracks are notacceptable. Replace the belt, if it is frayed or haspieces of material missing.

TO INSPECT CRANKCASEBREATHER TUBE(Cummins engine only)

Check the crankcase breather tube daily duringcold weather operations for ice buildup, whichcould obstruct the tube.

If an ice buildup is present, remove the breathertube and clear the obstruction.

V-ribbed belt

Check V-ribbed belt for intersecting cracks.Transverse (across the belt width) cracks areacceptable. Longitudinal (direction of belt length)cracks intersecting with transverse cracks are notacceptable. Replace the belt, if it is frayed or haspieces of material missing.

TO INSPECT CRANKCASEBREATHER TUBE(Cummins engine only)

Check the crankcase breather tube daily duringcold weather operations for ice buildup, whichcould obstruct the tube.

If an ice buildup is present, remove the breathertube and clear the obstruction.

T02643

T03004

MA

INT

EN

AN

CE

MA

INT

EN

AN

CE

Update_A

_OG

B04A

GU

pdate_A_O

GB

04AG



C2045

T02406

Air-cleaner restriction indicator

1. Reset button2. Window

AIR CLEANERTO CHECK CONDITION

Check the condition of the air cleaner elementdaily by observing the restriction indicator. If ared plunger appears in window (2) with the engineoff, the air cleaner element should be replaced assoon as possible. After the element has beenreplaced, push the reset button (1) to release thered plunger.

DUMP VALVE

The cleaner is equipped with a rubber dumpvalve. While the engine is running, this valveautomatically expels dirt collected in the aircleaner dust pan. From time to time, squeeze thevalve body by hand in order to prevent the valveslit from sticking shut due to the presence ofmoisture in the air.

TO CHANGE AIR-CLEANERELEMENT

Change the air-cleaner element when therestriction indicator shows red plunger afterengine shutdown. Regardless of restrictionindication, the element should be discarded afterone year.

To change the element:

1. Stop the engine. Release toggle clips (4) andremove dust pan (3).

2. Gently pull element (2) off the outlet tube andout of housing (1). Avoid knocking theelement against the housing. The element fitstightly over the outlet tube, creating the critical

AIR CLEANERTO CHECK CONDITION

Check the condition of the air cleaner elementdaily by observing the restriction indicator. If ared plunger appears in window (2) with the engineoff, the air cleaner element should be replaced assoon as possible. After the element has beenreplaced, push the reset button (1) to release thered plunger.

DUMP VALVE

The cleaner is equipped with a rubber dumpvalve. While the engine is running, this valveautomatically expels dirt collected in the aircleaner dust pan. From time to time, squeeze thevalve body by hand in order to prevent the valve slitfrom sticking shut due to the presence of moisturein the air.

TO CHANGE AIR-CLEANERELEMENT

Change the air-cleaner element when therestriction indicator shows red plunger after engineshutdown. Regardless of restriction indication, theelement should be discarded after one year.

To change the element:

1. Stop the engine. Release toggle clips (4) andremove dust pan (3).

2. Gently pull element (2) off the outlet tube andout of housing (1). Avoid knocking theelement against the housing. The element fitstightly over the outlet tube, creating the criticalseal on the inside diameter of the air cleaner

T02406

Air-cleaner restriction indicator

1. Reset button2. Window

MA

INT

EN

AN

CE

MA

INT

EN

AN

CE

Upd

ate_

A_O

GB

04A

GU

pdat

e_A

_OG

B04

AG

PAGE 13DATE 10/2004


SECTION 4

C2045

C2045

T03580

seal on the inside diameter of the air cleanerend cap. The element should be removedgently to reduce the amount of dust dislodged.There will be some initial resistance, similar tobreaking the seal on a jar. Gently twist theelement clockwise and counterclockwise todisengage the seal.

3. Check the old element. This could help youdetect foreign material on the sealing surfacethat is causing leakage. A streak of dust on theclean air side of the element is the tell-tale sign.If it exists, be sure the cause is removed beforeinstalling a new element.

4. Always clean the inside of the air cleanerhousing and outlet tube with a clean, damp cloth.Dirt accidentally transferred to the inside of theoutlet tube will reach the engine and cause wear.Be careful not to damage the element sealingarea on the tube.

5. Inspect the new element for damage. Alwayslook for possible shipping or handling damage.Pay particular attention to the inside of theopen end (the sealing area). Check for cuts,etc. Do not install a damaged element.

end cap. The element should be removedgently to reduce the amount of dust dislodged.There will be some initial resistance, similar tobreaking the seal on a jar. Gently twist theelement clockwise and counterclockwise todisengage the seal.

3. Check the old element. This could help youdetect foreign material on the sealing surfacethat is causing leakage. A streak of dust on theclean air side of the element is the tell-tale sign.If it exists, be sure the cause is removed beforeinstalling a new element.

4. Always clean the inside of the air cleanerhousing and outlet tube with a clean, damp cloth.Dirt accidentally transferred to the inside of theoutlet tube will reach the engine and cause wear.Be careful not to damage the element sealingarea on the tube.

5. Inspect the new element for damage. Alwayslook for possible shipping or handling damage.Pay particular attention to the inside of theopen end (the sealing area). Check for cuts,etc. Do not install a damaged element.

T03580

MA

INT

EN

AN

CE

MA

INT

EN

AN

CE

Update_A

_OG

B04A

GU

pdate_A_O

GB

04AG



C2045

6. Install new element. The radial seal area is onthe inside of the open end of the element. Thiscritical sealing area will stretch slightly, adjustitself and distribute the sealing pressure evenlyonto the outlet tube as the element is installed.To complete a tight seal, apply firm pressure atthe outer rim of the element, not the flexiblecenter. Due to its unique design, coverpressure is not necessary to compress theelement seal.

7. Install dust cover so that dump valve (5) isdownward and close toggle clips (4).

6. Install new element. The radial seal area is onthe inside of the open end of the element. Thiscritical sealing area will stretch slightly, adjustitself and distribute the sealing pressure evenlyonto the outlet tube as the element is installed.To complete a tight seal, apply firm pressure atthe outer rim of the element, not the flexiblecenter. Due to its unique design, coverpressure is not necessary to compress theelement seal.

7. Install dust cover so that dump valve (5) isdownward and close toggle clips (4).

MA

INT

EN

AN

CE

MA

INT

EN

AN

CE

Upd

ate_

A_O

GB

04A

GU

pdat

e_A

_OG

B04

AG

PAGE 15DATE 10/2004


SECTION 4

C2045

C2045

F04684

F04684

F04392

Location of transmission fill tube (1)and dipstick (2) on a coach withCummins engine


TO CHECK FLUID LEVEL WITHDIPSTICK

!!! CAUTION !!!

WHEN CHECKING THE FLUID LEVEL,MAKE SURE THAT THE TRANSMISSION ISIN NEUTRAL, THAT THE PARKING BRAKE

HAS BEEN PROPERLY ENGAGED ANDTHAT THE WHEELS HAVE BEEN CHOCKED.

IGNORING THESE PRECAUTIONS MAYLEAD TO UNEXPECTED SUDDEN COACH

MOVEMENT.

Clean the area around the end of the fill tube andthe dipstick tube before removing the cap and thedipstick. This will help prevent dirt or foreignmatter from entering the fluid system, which maycause damage to the transmision.

Location of transmission fill tube (1)and dipstick (2) on a coach with DetroitDiesel engine


TO CHECK FLUID LEVEL WITHDIPSTICK

!!! CAUTION !!!

WHEN CHECKING THE FLUID LEVEL,MAKE SURE THAT THE TRANSMISSION ISIN NEUTRAL, THAT THE PARKING BRAKE

HAS BEEN PROPERLY ENGAGED ANDTHAT THE WHEELS HAVE BEEN CHOCKED.

IGNORING THESE PRECAUTIONS MAYLEAD TO UNEXPECTED SUDDEN COACH

MOVEMENT.

Clean the area around the end of the fill tube andthe dipstick tube before removing the cap and thedipstick. This will help prevent dirt or foreignmatter from entering the fluid system, which maycause damage to the transmision.

Location of transmission fill tube (1)and dipstick (2) on a coach withCummins engine

Location of transmission fill tube (1)and dipstick (2) on a coach with DetroitDiesel engine

F04392

MA

INT

EN

AN

CE

MA

INT

EN

AN

CE

Update_A

_OG

B04A

GU

pdate_A_O

GB

04AG



C2045

T02645

Cold fluid level check

Cold check

The purpose of the Cold Check is to determinewhether the transmission contains enough fluid tobe operated safely until a Hot Check can becarried out.

1. If the engine has been shut down for anextended time, park the coach on a levelsurface and apply the parking brake.

2. Run the engine for at least 1 minute. Shift toDrive and operate the engine for 30 secondsat 1,000 - 1,500 rpm; then shift to Reverse toclear the hydraulic system of air. Then shift toNeutral and allow the engine to idle.

3. Having wiped the dipstick clean, check thefluid level. If the fluid on the dipstick isbetween the COLD ADD and the COLD FULLmarker, the level is satisfactory. If the fluidlevel is not within this area, add or drain fluiduntil the correct level is reached.

4. Perform a Hot Check at the first opportunityafter normal operating temperature (160°F-200°F) has been reached.

!!! CAUTION !!!

FLUID LEVEL CHECK CANNOT BEACCURATE UNLESS THE ENGINE IS IDLINGIN NEUTRAL, THE TRANSMISSION FLUID ISAT THE PROPER TEMPERATURE AND THE

COACH IS ON A LEVEL SURFACE.

Cold check

The purpose of the Cold Check is to determinewhether the transmission contains enough fluid tobe operated safely until a Hot Check can becarried out.

1. If the engine has been shut down for anextended time, park the coach on a levelsurface and apply the parking brake.

2. Run the engine for at least 1 minute. Shift toDrive and operate the engine for 30 secondsat 1,000 - 1,500 rpm; then shift to Reverse toclear the hydraulic system of air. Then shift toNeutral and allow the engine to idle.

3. Having wiped the dipstick clean, check thefluid level. If the fluid on the dipstick isbetween the COLD ADD and the COLD FULLmarker, the level is satisfactory. If the fluidlevel is not within this area, add or drain fluiduntil the correct level is reached.

4. Perform a Hot Check at the first opportunityafter normal operating temperature (160°F-200°F) has been reached.

!!! CAUTION !!!

FLUID LEVEL CHECK CANNOT BEACCURATE UNLESS THE ENGINE IS IDLINGIN NEUTRAL, THE TRANSMISSION FLUID ISAT THE PROPER TEMPERATURE AND THE

COACH IS ON A LEVEL SURFACE.

T02645

Cold fluid level check

MA

INT

EN

AN

CE

MA

INT

EN

AN

CE

Upd

ate_

A_O

GB

04A

GU

pdat

e_A

_OG

B04

AG

PAGE 17DATE 10/2004


SECTION 4

C2045

C2045

T02646

Hot fluid level check

Hot check

As temperature increase causes the fluid level torise, the fluid must be hot to ensure accuratechecking.

1. Drive coach until engine is at operatingtemperature.

2. Park the coach on a level surface and shift toNeutral. Apply the parking brake and allow theengine to run at low idle.

3. Having wiped the dipstick clean, check thefluid level. The safe operating level isanywhere within the area ranging from theHOT ADD to the HOT FULL marker on the

dipstick.

4. If the level is not within this area, add or drainfluid as necessary until the level is within the

right area. DO NOT OVERFILL!

TO CHECK FLUID LEVEL WITHPUSH-BUTTON SELECTOR

The transmission has an oil level sensor, whichprovides you with an indication of the fluid levelthrough the shift selector.

NOTE

The pushbutton selector can displayone character at a time.

Hot check

As temperature increase causes the fluid level torise, the fluid must be hot to ensure accuratechecking.

1. Drive coach until engine is at operatingtemperature.

2. Park the coach on a level surface and shift toNeutral. Apply the parking brake and allow theengine to run at low idle.

3. Having wiped the dipstick clean, check thefluid level. The safe operating level isanywhere within the area ranging from theHOT ADD to the HOT FULL marker on the

dipstick.

4. If the level is not within this area, add or drainfluid as necessary until the level is within the

right area. DO NOT OVERFILL!

TO CHECK FLUID LEVEL WITHPUSH-BUTTON SELECTOR

The transmission has an oil level sensor, whichprovides you with an indication of the fluid levelthrough the shift selector.

NOTE

The pushbutton selector can displayone character at a time.

T02646

Hot fluid level check

MA

INT

EN

AN

CE

MA

INT

EN

AN

CE

Update_A

_OG

B04A

GU

pdate_A_O

GB

04AG



C2045

T05126

Push-button selector

1. Park the coach on a level surface, shift toN (Neutral) and apply the parking brake.

2. Press the up and down arrow buttons oncesimultaneously.

3. The fluid level check may be delayed until thefollowing conditions are met:

• fluid temperature above 140°F and below 220°F;

• transmission in neutral;

• coach stationary for approx. two minutes to allow the fluid to settle;

• engine at idle;

• transmission output shaft is stopped.

The indication of a delayed fluid level check isa "-" in the display window followed by anumerical display.

Correct Fluid Level: "o,L" is displayed ("o,L"represents "Fluid (Oil) Level Check Mode"),followed by "o,K". The "o,K" display indicatesthe fluid is within the correct fluid level zone.The sensor display and the transmissiondipstick may not agree exactly because the oillevel sensor compensates for fluidtemperature.

Low Fluid Level: "o,L" is displayed ("o,L"represents "Fluid (Oil) Level Check Mode"),followed by "Lo" ("Lo" represents "Low OilLevel") and the number of quarts thetransmission fluid is low. Example: "2"indicates two additional quarts of fluid will bringthe fluid level within the middle of the "oK"zone.

High Fluid Level: "o,L" is displayed ("o,L"represents "Fluid (Oil) Level Check Mode"),followed by "HI" ("HI" represents "High Oil

1. Park the coach on a level surface, shift toN (Neutral) and apply the parking brake.

2. Press the up and down arrow buttons oncesimultaneously.

3. The fluid level check may be delayed until thefollowing conditions are met:

• fluid temperature above 140°F and below 220°F;

• transmission in neutral;

• coach stationary for approx. two minutes to allow the fluid to settle;

• engine at idle;

• transmission output shaft is stopped.

The indication of a delayed fluid level check isa "-" in the display window followed by anumerical display.

Correct Fluid Level: "o,L" is displayed ("o,L"represents "Fluid (Oil) Level Check Mode"),followed by "o,K". The "o,K" display indicatesthe fluid is within the correct fluid level zone.The sensor display and the transmissiondipstick may not agree exactly because the oillevel sensor compensates for fluidtemperature.

Low Fluid Level: "o,L" is displayed ("o,L"represents "Fluid (Oil) Level Check Mode"),followed by "Lo" ("Lo" represents "Low OilLevel") and the number of quarts thetransmission fluid is low. Example: "2"indicates two additional quarts of fluid willbring the fluid level within the middle of the"oK" zone.

High Fluid Level: "o,L" is displayed ("o,L"represents "Fluid (Oil) Level Check Mode"),followed by "HI" ("HI" represents "High Oil

T05126

Push-button selector

MA

INT

EN

AN

CE

MA

INT

EN

AN

CE

Upd

ate_

A_O

GB

04A

GU

pdat

e_A

_OG

B04

AG

PAGE 19DATE 10/2004


SECTION 4

C2045

C2045

Level") and the number of quarts thetransmission fluid is overfilled. Example: "1"indicates one quart of fluid above the fulltransmission level.

Invalid for display: "o,L" is displayed ("o,L"represents "Fluid (Oil) Level Check Mode"),followed by "-" and a numerical display. Thenumerical display is a fault code and indicatesconditions are not proper to receive the fluidlevel information, or that there is a systemmalfunction. The fault codes that may beencountered are shown in the table below.

!!! CAUTION !!!

LOW OR HIGH FLUID LEVEL CAN CAUSEOVERHEATING AND IRREGULAR SHIFTPATTERNS. THESE CONDITIONS CANDAMAGE THE TRANSMISSION IF NOT

CORRECTED.

NOTE

Sensor failure display should bereported to a Van Hool or Allison

service center in your area.

5. To exit the fluid level display mode, press anyrange button on the pushbutton shift selector.

DISPLAY

o,L,-,0,X

o,L,-,5,0

o,L,-,5,9

o,L,-,6,5

o,L,-,7,0

o,L,-,7,9

o,L,-,8,9

o,L,-,9,5

CAUSE OF CODE

Settling time too short

Engine speed (rpm) too low

Engine speed (rpm) too high

Neutral must be selected

Sump fluid temperature too low

Sump fluid temperature too high

Output shaft rotation

Sensor failure

Level") and the number of quarts thetransmission fluid is overfilled. Example: "1"indicates one quart of fluid above the fulltransmission level.

Invalid for display: "o,L" is displayed ("o,L"represents "Fluid (Oil) Level Check Mode"),followed by "-" and a numerical display. Thenumerical display is a fault code and indicatesconditions are not proper to receive the fluidlevel information, or that there is a systemmalfunction. The fault codes that may beencountered are shown in the table below.

!!! CAUTION !!!

LOW OR HIGH FLUID LEVEL CAN CAUSEOVERHEATING AND IRREGULAR SHIFTPATTERNS. THESE CONDITIONS CANDAMAGE THE TRANSMISSION IF NOT

CORRECTED.

NOTE

Sensor failure display should bereported to a Van Hool or Allison

service center in your area.

5. To exit the fluid level display mode, press anyrange button on the pushbutton shift selector.

DISPLAY

o,L,-,0,X

o,L,-,5,0

o,L,-,5,9

o,L,-,6,5

o,L,-,7,0

o,L,-,7,9

o,L,-,8,9

o,L,-,9,5

CAUSE OF CODE

Settling time too short

Engine speed (rpm) too low

Engine speed (rpm) too high

Neutral must be selected

Sump fluid temperature too low

Sump fluid temperature too high

Output shaft rotation

Sensor failure

MA

INT

EN

AN

CE

MA

INT

EN

AN

CE

Update_A

_OG

B04A

GU

pdate_A_O

GB

04AG



C2045


TO CHECK FLUID LEVEL

NOTE

Cleanliness is important. Make sure nodirt enters the fluid reservoir. Clean off

all dirt before opening the reservoir.

1. Check the fluid level with warm engine, at idlespeed.

2. The level is correct when fluid reaches theMAX mark on reservoir housing.

3. If necessary, add fluid until the level reachesthe MAX mark on the reservoir housing. For

recommended fluid, see "Lubricants andFluids" section.

Power steering reservoir behind rearmostright outside access door

T03291



NOTE

Cleanliness is important. Make sure nodirt enters the fluid reservoir. Clean off

all dirt before opening the reservoir.

1. Check the fluid level with warm engine, at idlespeed.

2. The level is correct when fluid reaches theMAX mark on reservoir housing.

3. If necessary, add fluid until the level reachesthe MAX mark on the reservoir housing. Forrecommended fluid, see "Lubricants andFluids" section.

Power steering reservoir behind rearmostright outside access door

T03291

MA

INT

EN

AN

CE

MA

INT

EN

AN

CE

Upd

ate_

A_O

GB

04A

GU

pdat

e_A

_OG

B04

AG

PAGE 21DATE 10/2004


SECTION 4

C2045

C2045

T00242

TIRES

!!! CAUTION !!!

NO TIRES OF SIZES OR CONSTRUCTIONTYPES OTHER THAN THE ORIGINAL ONES

ARE TO BE FITTED WITHOUT PRIORCONSENT BY VAN HOOL. NEVER FIT TIRESWITH LOWER LOAD OR SPEED RATINGS.

TO CHECK TIRE INFLATIONPRESSURE

Check the inflation pressure of each tire every dayand adjust, if necessary. Correct pressure willprolong tire durability. Underinflation, however,will cause increased fuel consumption and tireoverheating. If tire pressure is too high, the rideand road holding qualities of the vehicle will beimpaired.Use an accurate pressure gauge. The inflationpressures for the standard tires (Goodyear315/80 R22.5 and Firestone 315/80 R22.5) are

mentioned on the vehicle identification plate in thestepwell of the entrance door. Pressure valuesapply to cold tires, i.e. after at least 1 hour ofstandstill. If pressure has dropped more than itnormally does, remove and inspect the tire todetermine the cause.

If your coach is equipped with other tires than thestandard ones, follow the instructions of the tiremanufacturer in relation to the maximum speed,maximum load and inflation pressures.

TIRES

!!! CAUTION !!!

NO TIRES OF SIZES OR CONSTRUCTIONTYPES OTHER THAN THE ORIGINAL ONES

ARE TO BE FITTED WITHOUT PRIORCONSENT BY VAN HOOL. NEVER FIT TIRESWITH LOWER LOAD OR SPEED RATINGS.

TO CHECK TIRE INFLATIONPRESSURE

Check the inflation pressure of each tire every dayand adjust, if necessary. Correct pressure willprolong tire durability. Underinflation, however,will cause increased fuel consumption and tireoverheating. If tire pressure is too high, the rideand road holding qualities of the vehicle will beimpaired.Use an accurate pressure gauge. The inflationpressures for the standard tires (Goodyear315/80 R22.5 and Firestone 315/80 R22.5) are

mentioned on the vehicle identification plate in thestepwell of the entrance door. Pressure valuesapply to cold tires, i.e. after at least 1 hour ofstandstill. If pressure has dropped more than itnormally does, remove and inspect the tire todetermine the cause.

If your coach is equipped with other tires than thestandard ones, follow the instructions of the tiremanufacturer in relation to the maximum speed,maximum load and inflation pressures.

T00242

MA

INT

EN

AN

CE

MA

INT

EN

AN

CE

Update_A

_OG

B04A

GU

pdate_A_O

GB

04AG



C2045

T00237

430 to 450 ft.lbf

TO INSPECT TIRESRemove sharp stones and other foreign bodiesfrom the tire tread. They may cause damage inthe long run.

Replace the tire, if you encounter one of thefollowing signs of damage:

• Bumps, bulges or knots;• Tread cuts, snags or side wall cracks deep

enough to expose cords;• Visible body cords.

Also pay attention to the tread wear patterns.

T00244

ROAD WHEELS

TO CHECK WHEEL NUT TORQUE

Visually check for loose wheel nuts daily.Properwheel nut tightening torque is 430 to 450 ft.lbf.

NOTE

All wheels of the coach have right-handthreads. Whenever a wheel has beenremoved, the wheel nuts should be

checked after 25 miles and after the next50 miles. Tighten the nuts on a daily

basis until the wheel is properly seated.

TO INSPECT TIRESRemove sharp stones and other foreign bodiesfrom the tire tread. They may cause damage inthe long run.

Replace the tire, if you encounter one of thefollowing signs of damage:

• Bumps, bulges or knots;• Tread cuts, snags or side wall cracks deep

enough to expose cords;• Visible body cords.

Also pay attention to the tread wear patterns.

ROAD WHEELS

TO CHECK WHEEL NUT TORQUE

Visually check for loose wheel nuts daily.Properwheel nut tightening torque is 430 to 450 ft.lbf.

NOTE

All wheels of the coach have right-handthreads. Whenever a wheel has beenremoved, the wheel nuts should be

checked after 25 miles and after the next50 miles. Tighten the nuts on a daily

basis until the wheel is properly seated.

T00244

T00237

430 to 450 ft.lbf

MA

INT

EN

AN

CE

MA

INT

EN

AN

CE

Upd

ate_

A_O

GB

04A

GU

pdat

e_A

_OG

B04

AG

PAGE 23DATE 10/2004


SECTION 4

C2045

C2045

T00251

SUSPENSION

TO CHECK NORMAL BODY GROUNDCLEARANCE

Before commencing daily service, with the vehiclestationary and normal air pressure in the system,visually check that normal body ground clearanceis maintained at both sides of the coach.

TO CHECK SHOCK ABSORBERS

Every week, check front and rear suspensionshock absorbers for:• cracked or pulverised rubber washers of top and

bottom mountings;• dents in the shock body;• signs of oil leaks.

SUSPENSION

TO CHECK NORMAL BODY GROUNDCLEARANCE

Before commencing daily service, with the vehiclestationary and normal air pressure in the system,visually check that normal body ground clearanceis maintained at both sides of the coach.

T00251

TO CHECK SHOCK ABSORBERS

Every week, check front and rear suspensionshock absorbers for:• cracked or pulverised rubber washers of top and

bottom mountings;• dents in the shock body;• signs of oil leaks.

MA

INT

EN

AN

CE

MA

INT

EN

AN

CE

Update_A

_OG

B04A

GU

pdate_A_O

GB

04AG



C2045

F04258

BATTERIES

T00268

TO CHECK BATTERY FLUID LEVEL

!!! CAUTION !!!

BATTERIES CONTAIN SULFURIC ACID,WHICH IS HIGHLY CORROSIVE ANDMAY CAUSE BODILY INJURY AND

EQUIPMENT DAMAGE.

The level should reach the bottom of the vent capopening. Use clean or distilled water.

TO CHECK BATTERY CABLES

!!! CAUTION !!!

WHEN REMOVING OR INSTALLINGBATTERY CABLES, ALWAYS REMOVE

GROUND CABLE FIRST AND RECONNECTGROUND CABLE LAST TO AVOIDDANGEROUS SHORT CIRCUITS.

The batteries are located in the compartmentbehind the L.H. tag wheel

BATTERIES

TO CHECK BATTERY FLUID LEVEL

!!! CAUTION !!!

BATTERIES CONTAIN SULFURIC ACID,WHICH IS HIGHLY CORROSIVE AND

MAY CAUSE BODILY INJURY ANDEQUIPMENT DAMAGE.

The level should reach the bottom of the vent capopening. Use clean or distilled water.

TO CHECK BATTERY CABLES

!!! CAUTION !!!

WHEN REMOVING OR INSTALLINGBATTERY CABLES, ALWAYS REMOVE

GROUND CABLE FIRST AND RECONNECTGROUND CABLE LAST TO AVOIDDANGEROUS SHORT CIRCUITS.

F04258

The batteries are located in the compartmentbehind the L.H. tag wheel

T00268

MA

INT

EN

AN

CE

MA

INT

EN

AN

CE

Upd

ate_

A_O

GB

04A

GU

pdat

e_A

_OG

B04

AG

PAGE 25DATE 10/2004


SECTION 4

C2045

C2045

Check to make sure cable connections are ingood condition, tight and free of corrosion.

T03796

Windshield washer tank

T00266

WINDSHIELD WASHER


The windshield washer tank is located in the com-partment in front of the L.H. front wheel..

Fill the tank with a proper mixture of clean water andfreeze protection liquid.

Check to make sure cable connections are ingood condition, tight and free of corrosion.

WINDSHIELD WASHER


The windshield washer tank is located in the com-partment in front of the L.H. front wheel..

Fill the tank with a proper mixture of clean water andfreeze protection liquid.

T00266

T03796

Windshield washer tank

MA

INT

EN

AN

CE

MA

INT

EN

AN

CE

Update_A

_OG

B04A

GU

pdate_A_O

GB

04AG



C2045

TOILET

TO DRAIN THE TOILETThe toilet must be drained when the liquid levelreaches the "DUMP LEVEL" on gauge glass (3).

A manually operated slide dump valve is providedat the bottom of the toilet to drain the toilet. Thedump valve is accessible through the enginecompartment.

To drain the toilet:

1. Unlock dump valve handle (4).

2. Pull dump valve handle(4). This dumpscontents of toilet in waste holding tank.

3. To rinse toilet tank: connect a external watersource to coupling (2) and open "TOILETTANK RINSING + FILLING" cock (1). Closecock (1) when toilet tank is rinsed.

4. Close the dump valve, by pushing its handlecompletely, if toilet is empty. Relock valve (4).

TO FILL THE TOILET

1. Connect a external water source to coupling(2).

2. Open " TOILET TANK RINSING + FILLING "cock (1) until water reaches the "FILL LEVEL"on gauge glass (3).

TOILET

TO DRAIN THE TOILETThe toilet must be drained when the liquid levelreaches the "DUMP LEVEL" on gauge glass (3).

A manually operated slide dump valve is providedat the bottom of the toilet to drain the toilet. Thedump valve is accessible through the enginecompartment.

To drain the toilet:

1. Unlock dump valve handle (4).

2. Pull dump valve handle(4). This dumpscontents of toilet in waste holding tank.

3. To rinse toilet tank: connect a external watersource to coupling (2) and open "TOILETTANK RINSING + FILLING" cock (1). Closecock (1) when toilet tank is rinsed.

4. Close the dump valve, by pushing its handlecompletely, if toilet is empty. Relock valve (4).

TO FILL THE TOILET

1. Connect a external water source to coupling(2).

2. Open " TOILET TANK RINSING + FILLING "cock (1) until water reaches the "FILL LEVEL"on gauge glass (3).

T05572

Lavatory service compartment located at theright in the engine compartment

1. "TOILET TANK RINSING + FILLING" cock2. Exterior water source coupling3. Gauge glass4. Toilet dump valve handle

DUMP LEVEL

FILL LEVEL

T05572

Lavatory service compartment located at theright in the engine compartment

1. "TOILET TANK RINSING + FILLING" cock2. Exterior water source coupling3. Gauge glass4. Toilet dump valve handle

DUMP LEVEL

FILL LEVEL

MA

INT

EN

AN

CE

MA

INT

EN

AN

CE

Upd

ate_

A_O

GB

04A

GU

pdat

e_A

_OG

B04

AG

PAGE 27DATE 10/2004


SECTION 4

C2045

C2045

F04772

3. Press the flush button and add the properamount of toilet chemical through the bowl.

TO FLUSH

Depress flush button located above the toilet.

TO OPERATE THE TOILET IN COLDWEATHER

In cold weather protect the toilet from freezing so asto avoid damage to certain toilet parts.

Table 1

Tankvolume

gallons

346810121620

Weight (in lbs) of CaCl2 required in

tank to protect to temperature of

10°F

45.38

10.513162127

30°F

0.60.81.31.82.22.53.54.2

20°F

2.83.55.57.59111518

0°F

56.510

13.517202733

Table 2

25%

+10°F

33%

0°F

40%

-12°F

50%

-34°F

% of antifreezerequired in tank

Protects to

3. Press the flush button and add the properamount of toilet chemical through the bowl.

TO FLUSH

Depress flush button located above the toilet.

TO OPERATE THE TOILET IN COLDWEATHER

In cold weather protect the toilet from freezing so asto avoid damage to certain toilet parts.

Tankvolume

gallons

346810121620

Weight (in lbs) of CaCl2 required in

tank to protect to temperature of

10°F

45.38

10.513162127

30°F

0.60.81.31.82.22.53.54.2

20°F

2.83.55.57.59111518

0°F

56.510

13.517202733

Table 2

25%

+10°F

33%

0°F

40%

-12°F

50%

-34°F

% of antifreezerequired in tank

Protects to

Flush button

F04772

Flush button

Table 1

MA

INT

EN

AN

CE

MA

INT

EN

AN

CE

Update_A

_OG

B04A

GU

pdate_A_O

GB

04AG



C2045

The toilet chemical will freeze below 30°F.

The first way to protect the toilet assembly in coldweather is to use an anti-freeze solution such asCalcium Chloride (CaCl

2) in the toilet tank.

Depending upon the expected average lowtemperature and the expected accumulation ofwaste in the toilet tank between draining, chargethe toilet according to table 1. The quantity ofCalcium Chloride should never exceed 20 percentby weight. Therefore, the tank contents cannot bekept from freezing below 0°F. Further, theCalcium Chloride must be added in amountsproportional to the amount of waste in the tank toavoid exceeding a 20 percent concentration in thelower temperature protection range.Another way to protect the toilet assembly, shouldit be exposed to extremely cold temperatures; is touse Ethylene Glycol as an anti-freeze solution inthe toilet tank.

Based on the expected average low temperatureand the quantity of waste in the toilet tank, chargethe toilet assembly according to table 2.

!!! CAUTION !!!

ETHYLENE AND PROPYLENE GLYCOL ARETOXIC SUBSTANCES. DO NOT SWALLOW

OR INHALE. THEY CAN IRRITATE THEEYES. IF THE SUBSTANCE HAS BEEN

SWALLOWED, HAVE A FIRST-AIDASSISTANT MAKE THE

VICTIM VOMIT (PROVIDED HE/SHE ISCONSCIOUS). IN CASE OF INHALATION,BRING THE VICTIM INTO THE OPEN AIR.

CALL A DOCTOR IN BOTH CASES. IF EYESHAVE BEEN AFFECTED, RINSE THEM

THOROUGHLY WITH PLENTY OF WATER. CON-SULT A PHYSICIAN IN CASE OF

EYE IRRITATION.

The toilet chemical will freeze below 30°F.

The first way to protect the toilet assembly in coldweather is to use an anti-freeze solution such asCalcium Chloride (CaCl

2) in the toilet tank.

Depending upon the expected average low tempera-ture and the expected accumulation of waste in thetoilet tank between draining, charge the toilet ac-cording to table 1. The quantity of Calcium Chlorideshould never exceed 20 percent by weight. There-fore, the tank contents cannot be kept from freezingbelow 0°F. Further, the Calcium Chloride must beadded in amounts proportional to the amount ofwaste in the tank to avoid exceeding a 20 percentconcentration in the lower temperature protectionrange.Another way to protect the toilet assembly, should itbe exposed to extremely cold temperatures; is to useEthylene Glycol as an anti-freeze solution in the toilettank.

Based on the expected average low temperatureand the quantity of waste in the toilet tank, charge thetoilet assembly according to table 2.

!!! CAUTION !!!

ETHYLENE AND PROPYLENE GLYCOL ARETOXIC SUBSTANCES. DO NOT SWALLOW

OR INHALE. THEY CAN IRRITATE THEEYES. IF THE SUBSTANCE HAS BEEN

SWALLOWED, HAVE A FIRST-AIDASSISTANT MAKE THE

VICTIM VOMIT (PROVIDED HE/SHE ISCONSCIOUS). IN CASE OF INHALATION,BRING THE VICTIM INTO THE OPEN AIR.

CALL A DOCTOR IN BOTH CASES. IF EYESHAVE BEEN AFFECTED, RINSE THEM

THOROUGHLY WITH PLENTY OF WATER. CON-SULT A PHYSICIAN IN CASE OF

EYE IRRITATION.

MA

INT

EN

AN

CE

MA

INT

EN

AN

CE

Upd

ate_

A_O

GB

04A

GU

pdat

e_A

_OG

B04

AG

PAGE 29DATE 10/2004


SECTION 4

C2045

C2045

F04775

TO CLEAN THE INTERIOR OF THELAVATORY COMPARTMENT

To avoid unintentionally drainage of waste waterwhen cleaning the lavatory compartment withwater, a shut-off valve with a red handle is installedin the lavatory floor drain hose. The valve isaccessible through the luggage compartment doorbehind the right tag wheel and is labeled"RESTROOM FLOOR DRAIN".

Restroom floor drain shut-off valve

WASTE HOLDING TANKThe waste holding tank is located behind theengine compartment side-door, at the right of thecoach.

A manually operated slide dump valve is providedat the bottom of the tank to drain the tank.

To drain the tank:

1. Position the coach so that the waste holdingtank outlet is over a receptable or sewer inletor other facilities to comply with local healthregulations.

2. Unlock dump valve handle.

3. Pull dump valve handle.

4. Return the handle to its original position whenthe waste holding tank is empty. relock dumpvalve.

TO CLEAN THE INTERIOR OF THELAVATORY COMPARTMENT

To avoid unintentionally drainage of waste waterwhen cleaning the lavatory compartment withwater, a shut-off valve with a red handle is installedin the lavatory floor drain hose. The valve isaccessible through the luggage compartment doorbehind the right tag wheel and is labeled"RESTROOM FLOOR DRAIN".

WASTE HOLDING TANKThe waste holding tank is located behind theengine compartment side-door, at the right of thecoach.

A manually operated slide dump valve is providedat the bottom of the tank to drain the tank.

To drain the tank:

1. Position the coach so that the waste holdingtank outlet is over a receptable or sewer inletor other facilities to comply with local healthregulations.

2. Unlock dump valve handle.

3. Pull dump valve handle.

4. Return the handle to its original position whenthe waste holding tank is empty. relock dumpvalve.

F04775

Restroom floor drain shut-off valve

MA

INT

EN

AN

CE

MA

INT

EN

AN

CE

Update_A

_OG

B04A

GU

pdate_A_O

GB

04AG



C2045

APPEARANCE CARE

!!! CAUTION !!!

WHEN USING CLEANING AGENTS OROTHER CHEMICALS, FOLLOW THE

MANUFACTURER'S ADVICE.

COACH EXTERIOR

Paint

General instructions for washing

• Wash the body thoroughly with plenty ofpreferably soft water.

• Only use non-abrasive, non-corrosive fluidcleaning agents. Always use the quantitiesindicated by the manufacturer of the cleaningagent.

• Always pre-wash the coach with clean water toremove any sand that might damage the finishduring the complete wash. Use a soft brushwithout applying any pressure.

• To actually wash the vehicle, use a sponge or asoft car brush with a rubber or soft syntheticbody.

• Soak dried insects with a special agentavailable in retail before removing them.

• Rinse the body thoroughly with soft water.Soap residue may damage the paint finish overtime.

• After rinsing, the body can be dried with achamois.

To wash with an automatic washing facility

NOTE

Before having the coach cleaned in anautomatic washing facility, remove theside mirrors, close the ventilation flaps

and switch off the HVAC system.

APPEARANCE CARE

!!! CAUTION !!!

WHEN USING CLEANING AGENTS OROTHER CHEMICALS, FOLLOW THE

MANUFACTURER'S ADVICE.

COACH EXTERIOR

Paint

General instructions for washing

• Wash the body thoroughly with plenty ofpreferably soft water.

• Only use non-abrasive, non-corrosive fluidcleaning agents. Always use the quantitiesindicated by the manufacturer of the cleaningagent.

• Always pre-wash the coach with clean water toremove any sand that might damage the finishduring the complete wash. Use a soft brushwithout applying any pressure.

• To actually wash the vehicle, use a sponge or asoft car brush with a rubber or soft synthetic body.

• Soak dried insects with a special agentavailable in retail before removing them.

• Rinse the body thoroughly with soft water.Soap residue may damage the paint finish overtime.

• After rinsing, the body can be dried with achamois.

To wash with an automatic washing facility

NOTE

Before having the coach cleaned in anautomatic washing facility, remove theside mirrors, close the ventilation flaps

and switch off the HVAC system.

MA

INT

EN

AN

CE

MA

INT

EN

AN

CE

Upd

ate_

A_O

GB

04A

GU

pdat

e_A

_OG

B04

AG

PAGE 31DATE 10/2004


SECTION 4

C2045

C2045

To remove the side mirror:

1. Disconnect power plug.

2. Pull up and remove mirror and arm.

To wash with high-pressure cleaners

• High-pressure cleaners remove dirt, but not thegreasy film on the vehicle body. To remove thisfilm, a brush or a sponge are still necessary.

• Keep the hand wand nozzle at least one footaway from the paint and do not aim the wand at aparticular spot for too long. Otherwise, if thewater is warm, you risk driving the dirt into thepaint.

!!! CAUTION !!!

WHEN USING A HIGH-PRESSURECLEANING FACILITY, KEEP THE

TEMPERATURE BELOW 150°F ANDWATER PRESSURE BELOW 700 PSI.

To remove tar

• Remove tar spots with a special agent or withdenatured alcohol. Apply the cleaning agent witha soft cloth and rub the affected spots lightly. Donot press too hard to prevent scratching the finishwith particles of sand that may be stuck in the tar.

• After having removed the tar, wash and rinsethe treated spots.

To wax-coat the paint

• It is a good idea to wax-coat your vehicle afterwinter with a liquid, non-corrosive polish.Previously wash and dry the vehicle bodythoroughly.

• In order to restore the original gloss of worn orspotted paint, a light rubber compound or polishmay be used. Rub evenly and not too long on aparticular spot to prevent the paint from becomingtoo thin. Apply a layer of fixing wax immediatelyafter treatment with cleaner.

To remove the side mirror:

1. Disconnect power plug.

2. Pull up and remove mirror and arm.

To wash with high-pressure cleaners

• High-pressure cleaners remove dirt, but not thegreasy film on the vehicle body. To remove thisfilm, a brush or a sponge are still necessary.

• Keep the hand wand nozzle at least one footaway from the paint and do not aim the wand at aparticular spot for too long. Otherwise, if thewater is warm, you risk driving the dirt into thepaint.

!!! CAUTION !!!

WHEN USING A HIGH-PRESSURECLEANING FACILITY, KEEP THE

TEMPERATURE BELOW 150°F ANDWATER PRESSURE BELOW 700 PSI.

To remove tar

• Remove tar spots with a special agent or withdenatured alcohol. Apply the cleaning agent witha soft cloth and rub the affected spots lightly. Donot press too hard to prevent scratching the finishwith particles of sand that may be stuck in the tar.

• After having removed the tar, wash and rinsethe treated spots.

To wax-coat the paint

• It is a good idea to wax-coat your vehicle afterwinter with a liquid, non-corrosive polish.Previously wash and dry the vehicle bodythoroughly.

• In order to restore the original gloss of worn orspotted paint, a light rubber compound or polishmay be used. Rub evenly and not too long on aparticular spot to prevent the paint from becomingtoo thin. Apply a layer of fixing wax immediatelyafter treatment with cleaner.

MA

INT

EN

AN

CE

MA

INT

EN

AN

CE

Update_A

_OG

B04A

GU

pdate_A_O

GB

04AG



C2045

!!! CAUTION !!!

DO NOT TREAT METALLIC PAINT WITH ANORDINARY CLEANER, AS THE PAINT

MAY DULL AS A RESULT OF THIS.

Coach understructure

• Once a year, after winter, the vehicleunderstructure has to be cleaned and inspected.

• First wash the understructure with a handwand to remove all the mud and salt. The watershould not contain any detergents or oilderivatives as these attack the rust-preventivelayer. The hand wand pressure should notexceed 700 psi.

• When the understructure is clean, check formissing areas of undercoating protection. Oncethe under-structure is completely dry, spray theaffected areas with a high-quality rust-preventiveagent such as KATCHUTEX WAX (from ADSChemicals) and DINITROL METALLIC.

NOTE

If you have to spray rust-preventiveliquid near compressed-air apparatus,

first seal all openings or dampers.

Measures against corrosion

• Make sure the vehicle is always parked underthe best possible conditions.

• Pay strict attention to the understructuremaintenance instructions mentioned above.

• After each wash, check the body paint forcracks and damage due to road chippings.Cover interrupted areas as quickly as possiblewith paint to prevent corrosion from spreadingunder the paint.

• Have any accident damage repaired as quicklyas possible to prevent corrosion.

• As soon as corroded areas are spotted, takeevery precaution to prevent the corrosion from

!!! CAUTION !!!

DO NOT TREAT METALLIC PAINT WITH ANORDINARY CLEANER, AS THE PAINTMAY DULL AS A RESULT OF THIS.

Coach understructure

• Once a year, after winter, the vehicleunderstructure has to be cleaned and inspected.

• First wash the understructure with a hand wandto remove all the mud and salt. The water shouldnot contain any detergents or oil derivatives asthese attack the rust-preventive layer. The handwand pressure should not exceed 700 psi.

• When the understructure is clean, check formissing areas of undercoating protection. Oncethe under-structure is completely dry, spray theaffected areas with a high-quality rust-preventiveagent such as KATCHUTEX WAX (from ADSChemicals) and DINITROL METALLIC.

NOTE

If you have to spray rust-preventiveliquid near compressed-air apparatus,

first seal all openings or dampers.

Measures against corrosion

• Make sure the vehicle is always parked underthe best possible conditions.

• Pay strict attention to the understructuremaintenance instructions mentioned above.

• After each wash, check the body paint forcracks and damage due to road chippings.Cover interrupted areas as quickly as possiblewith paint to prevent corrosion from spreadingunder the paint.

• Have any accident damage repaired as quicklyas possible to prevent corrosion.

• As soon as corroded areas are spotted, takeevery precaution to prevent the corrosion from

MA

INT

EN

AN

CE

MA

INT

EN

AN

CE

Upd

ate_

A_O

GB

04A

GU

pdat

e_A

_OG

B04

AG

PAGE 33DATE 10/2004


SECTION 4

C2045

C2045

spreading. Do not put off repair for more than3 months, otherwise the affected component willbe completely beyond saving.

• Every 2 years, the frame tubes located entirelyor partly under floor level should be injected witha high-quality rust-preventive liquid for hollowspaces such as TECTYL or DINITROLPENETRANT. The body posts are open at thebottom; holes have been drilled in the horizontaltubes that have to be treated.

To clean anodized aluminium

• Clean anodized aluminium parts with neutral,non-abrasive synthetic agents (certainly not withchrome polish or products containing sodium,ammonia, chlorohydric acid or phosphoric acid).

• Never treat stubborn stains with steel wool.The extremely thin protective layer will bescrubbed off and the aluminium will oxidize. Ifnecessary, use a non-abrasive polyamide woolenscrub pad (e.g. 3M Scotch Brite dish scourer).

• Rinse the aluminium abundantly to remove allcleaning agent.

To clean chromed parts

• Wash chromed parts with soapy water andrinse abundantly.

• Polish chromed parts in poor state.

• Protect chromed parts during the cold seasonby treating them with a special protective waxavailable in retail.

COACH INTERIOR

To clean leatherette

• Clean the leatherette from time to time withlukewarm soapy water and rinse with a mixture ofwater and a bit of vinegar.

• Stubborn spots can be removed with denaturedalcohol. Before treating large areas, always test asmall area for discoloration.

• To keep the leatherette supple, sponge it witha mixture of 3 U.S. Qts of water, 1 pint of milkand a handful of kitchen salt. Do not rinse. Drywith a chamois. Wring the chamois regularly.

spreading. Do not put off repair for more than3 months, otherwise the affected component willbe completely beyond saving.

• Every 2 years, the frame tubes located entirelyor partly under floor level should be injected witha high-quality rust-preventive liquid for hollowspaces such as TECTYL or DINITROLPENETRANT. The body posts are open at thebottom; holes have been drilled in the horizontaltubes that have to be treated.

To clean anodized aluminium

• Clean anodized aluminium parts with neutral,non-abrasive synthetic agents (certainly not withchrome polish or products containing sodium,ammonia, chlorohydric acid or phosphoric acid).

• Never treat stubborn stains with steel wool.The extremely thin protective layer will bescrubbed off and the aluminium will oxidize. Ifnecessary, use a non-abrasive polyamide woolenscrub pad (e.g. 3M Scotch Brite dish scourer).

• Rinse the aluminium abundantly to remove allcleaning agent.

To clean chromed parts

• Wash chromed parts with soapy water andrinse abundantly.

• Polish chromed parts in poor state.

• Protect chromed parts during the cold seasonby treating them with a special protective waxavailable in retail.

COACH INTERIOR

To clean leatherette

• Clean the leatherette from time to time withlukewarm soapy water and rinse with a mixture ofwater and a bit of vinegar.

• Stubborn spots can be removed withdenatured alcohol. Before treating large areas,always test a small area for discoloration.

• To keep the leatherette supple, sponge it witha mixture of 3 U.S. Qts of water, 1 pint of milkand a handful of kitchen salt. Do not rinse. Drywith a chamois. Wring the chamois regularly.

MA

INT

EN

AN

CE

MA

INT

EN

AN

CE

Update_A

_OG

B04A

GU

pdate_A_O

GB

04AG



C2045

To clean moquette upholstery

• Clean the seat upholstery weekly with avacuum cleaner.

• If necessary, moquette can be cleaned with asolution of mild soap in cold water. This soapsolution must be applied in small doses with asponge or a soft brush. Rub with the grain of thefabric. Remove the soap solution with a damp,clean cloth or sponge. Then rub the treated areaseveral times with a dry cloth. Subsequently rubthe still moist moquette with a fairly hard brush.Finally, when the upholstery is dry, rub it onceagain with the grain of the fabric.

• The look of the moquette seats can berevitalized by steaming. Put a damp cloth over theseat upholstery and press it with a hot iron. Thesteam will penetrate the fabric fibers and makethem stand upright again.

To remove stains from fabric upholstery

• Deal with stains as quickly as possible. Oncethey dry or oxidize, they will be much harder toremove.

• Use a reputable cleaning agent available inretail, appropriate for the nature of the stain and

harmless to the fabric (check on packaging). Alsoregular household agents may be used. Consult afabric stain reference list to find out what agent ismost appropriate.

• If the nature of the stain is unknown, first treatit with a solution of water and detergent. If thestain persists, use a dry cleaning agent once thefabric has completely dried again.

• Use only white cloths or paper kitchen towels toapply the cleaning agent.

• Fresh coffee or cocoa stains are not hard toremove. Just rub them with a solution ofdetergent and lukewarm water. When the stainshave dried, however, it is practically impossible toremove them.

• Felt-tip marker stains can only be removedwith alcohol, felt pen stains with trichlorethylene,and nail polish with acetone.

• Remove chewing gum by freezing it with aspray, smashing it and scraping it off.

• Always test chemical cleaning agents on asmall non-obtrusive area to check fordiscoloration or damage.

To clean moquette upholstery

• Clean the seat upholstery weekly with avacuum cleaner.

• If necessary, moquette can be cleaned with asolution of mild soap in cold water. This soapsolution must be applied in small doses with asponge or a soft brush. Rub with the grain of thefabric. Remove the soap solution with a damp,clean cloth or sponge. Then rub the treated areaseveral times with a dry cloth. Subsequently rubthe still moist moquette with a fairly hard brush.Finally, when the upholstery is dry, rub it onceagain with the grain of the fabric.

• The look of the moquette seats can berevitalized by steaming. Put a damp cloth over theseat upholstery and press it with a hot iron. Thesteam will penetrate the fabric fibers and makethem stand upright again.

To remove stains from fabric upholstery

• Deal with stains as quickly as possible. Oncethey dry or oxidize, they will be much harder toremove.

• Use a reputable cleaning agent available inretail, appropriate for the nature of the stain and

harmless to the fabric (check on packaging). Alsoregular household agents may be used. Consult afabric stain reference list to find out what agent ismost appropriate.

• If the nature of the stain is unknown, first treatit with a solution of water and detergent. If thestain persists, use a dry cleaning agent once thefabric has completely dried again.

• Use only white cloths or paper kitchen towelsto apply the cleaning agent.

• Fresh coffee or cocoa stains are not hard toremove. Just rub them with a solution of detergentand lukewarm water. When the stains have dried,however, it is practically impossible to removethem.

• Felt-tip marker stains can only be removedwith alcohol, felt pen stains with trichlorethylene,and nail polish with acetone.

• Remove chewing gum by freezing it with aspray, smashing it and scraping it off.

• Always test chemical cleaning agents on asmall non-obtrusive area to check fordiscoloration or damage.

MA

INT

EN

AN

CE

MA

INT

EN

AN

CE

Upd

ate_

A_O

GB

04A

GU

pdat

e_A

_OG

B04

AG

PAGE 35DATE 10/2004


SECTION 4

C2045

C2045

• Ventilate the vehicle interior well while usingchemical agents.

To wash crepe headrest covers

• Do not use softener as this will deteriorate thecovers.

• Use a mild washing powder in warm water(approx. 86°F). Rinse well in clean water anddrip dry (do not wring). Do not use bleach.

To clean ABS plastic parts

!!! CAUTION !!!

SOLVENTS LIKE TERPENTINE, PAINTTHINNER, TRICHLORETHYLENE OR

DRY-CLEANING NAPHTA CAN DAMAGEABS PLASTIC.

• Sponge ABS plastic with a solution of warmwater and soap. Use a soft brush and apply onlylittle pressure to remove stubborn stains.

• Ventilate the vehicle interior well while usingchemical agents.

To wash crepe headrest covers

• Do not use softener as this will deteriorate thecovers.

• Use a mild washing powder in warm water(approx. 86°F). Rinse well in clean water anddrip dry (do not wring). Do not use bleach.

To clean ABS plastic parts

!!! CAUTION !!!

SOLVENTS LIKE TERPENTINE, PAINTTHINNER, TRICHLORETHYLENE OR

DRY-CLEANING NAPHTA CAN DAMAGEABS PLASTIC.

• Sponge ABS plastic with a solution of warmwater and soap. Use a soft brush and apply onlylittle pressure to remove stubborn stains.

• Restore the original lustre of ABS parts using aspecial product available in retail.

!!! CAUTION !!!

DO NOT APPLY POLISH ON THESTEERING WHEEL OR ON ABS SEATS ASTHEY WOULD BECOME TOO SLIPPERY.

To clean perspex plastic panels

!!! CAUTION !!!

SOLVENTS LIKE TERPENTINE, PAINTTHINNER, TRICHLORETHYLENE ORDRY-CLEANING NAPHTA ATTACK

PERSPEX PLASTIC.

• Never rub perspex plastic, when it is dry.

• Wash the panel thoroughly, then dry it with aperfectly clean chamois. After washing, apply anantistatic polish.

• Minor scratches can be removed with a specialpolish available in retail.

• Restore the original lustre of ABS parts using aspecial product available in retail.

!!! CAUTION !!!

DO NOT APPLY POLISH ON THESTEERING WHEEL OR ON ABS SEATS ASTHEY WOULD BECOME TOO SLIPPERY.

To clean perspex plastic panels

!!! CAUTION !!!

SOLVENTS LIKE TERPENTINE, PAINTTHINNER, TRICHLORETHYLENE ORDRY-CLEANING NAPHTA ATTACK

PERSPEX PLASTIC.

• Never rub perspex plastic, when it is dry.

• Wash the panel thoroughly, then dry it with aperfectly clean chamois. After washing, apply anantistatic polish.

• Minor scratches can be removed with a specialpolish available in retail.

MA

INT

EN

AN

CE

MA

INT

EN

AN

CE

Update_A

_OG

B04A

GU

pdate_A_O

GB

04AG



C2045

To check/clean safety belts

• Replace the belt, in case of mechanism failureor, if the fabric is torn or frayed.

• If necessary, hand-wash the seat belt in asolution of warm water and neutral soap. Do notwash the buckles! Rinse thoroughly and let dry(out of the sun).

• Do not strain the belt while it is wet. This couldbe detrimental to the fabric strength. For thesame reason, never bleach or dye the seat beltfabric.

To check/clean safety belts

• Replace the belt, in case of mechanism failureor, if the fabric is torn or frayed.

• If necessary, hand-wash the seat belt in asolution of warm water and neutral soap. Do notwash the buckles! Rinse thoroughly and let dry(out of the sun).

• Do not strain the belt while it is wet. This couldbe detrimental to the fabric strength. For thesame reason, never bleach or dye the seat beltfabric.

AP

PE

ND

ICE

SA

PP

EN

DIC

ES

Upd

ate

B_O

GB

05A

FU

pdat

e B

_OG

B05

AF



C2045

C2045

APPENDICESLUBRICANTS AND FLUIDS

ENGINE LUBRICATING OIL RECOMMENDATIONS

Cummins engine ............................................................................................................. page 4Detroit Diesel engine ....................................................................................................... page 5Caterpillar engine ............................................................................................................ page 5

FUEL RECOMMENDATIONS


COOLANT RECOMMENDATIONS


AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID RECOMMENDATIONS

Allison WTB500(R) .......................................................................................................... page 12ZF Astronic ..................................................................................................................... page 12

DRIVE AXLE OIL RECOMMENDATIONS ........................................................................... page 13

Oil viscosity recommendations ........................................................................................ page 13

APPENDICESLUBRICANTS AND FLUIDS

ENGINE LUBRICATING OIL RECOMMENDATIONS






AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID RECOMMENDATIONS

Allison WTB500(R) .......................................................................................................... page 12ZF Astronic ..................................................................................................................... page 12

DRIVE AXLE OIL RECOMMENDATIONS ........................................................................... page 13

Oil viscosity recommendations ........................................................................................ page 13

AP

PE

ND

ICE

S

Update B

_OG

B05A

FU

pdate B_O

GB

05AF

AP

PE

ND

ICE

S



C2045

POWER STEERING FLUID RECOMMENDATIONS ............................................................ page 13

CONVERSION FACTORS ............................................................................... page 14

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM (non-mùltiplexed vehicles)

FUSES

Mega® fuses .................................................................................................................... page 16Maxifuses ....................................................................................................................... page 16Autofuses ........................................................................................................................ page 17

CIRCUIT BREAKERS .......................................................................................................... page 17

In main junction box ........................................................................................................ page 17In ISM/DDEC junction box ............................................................................................... page 20

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM (multiplexed vehicles)

FUSES


POWER STEERING FLUID RECOMMENDATIONS ............................................................ page 13

CONVERSION FACTORS ............................................................................... page 14

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM (non-mùltiplexed vehicles)

FUSES



In main junction box ........................................................................................................ page 17In ISM/DDEC junction box ............................................................................................... page 20

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM (multiplexed vehicles)

FUSES


AP

PE

ND

ICE

SA

PP

EN

DIC

ES

Upd

ate

B_O

GB

05A

FU

pdat

e B

_OG

B05

AF



C2045

C2045


In main junction box ........................................................................................................ page 24In toilet compartment junction box ................................................................................... page 26In front junction box ......................................................................................................... page 26


In main junction box ........................................................................................................ page 24In toilet compartment junction box ................................................................................... page 26In front junction box ......................................................................................................... page 26

AP

PE

ND

ICE

S

Update B

_OG

B05A

FU

pdate B_O

GB

05AF

AP

PE

ND

ICE

S



C2045

LUBRICANTS AND FLUIDS

ENGINE LUBRICATING OILRECOMMENDATIONS

Cummins engine

Engine sump capacity (without oil filter:

Max. level ................... 9 U.S. gallonsMin. level .................... 7 U.S. gallons

The use of high-quality engine lubricating oils andappropriate oil drain and filter change intervals arecritical factors in maintaining engine performanceand durability.

ISM01-engine: Cummins Inc. recommends theuse of a high-quality 15W-40 multiviscosity heavy-duty engine oil that meets the requirements ofCummins Engineering Specification CES 20071 orCES 20076. American Petroleum Institute (API)specification CH-4 can be used as an alternativeto CES 20071.

ISM02-engine: Cummins Inc. recommends theuse of a high-quality 15W-40 multiviscosity heavy-duty engine oil that meets the requirements of

Cummins Engineering Specifications CES 20078or CES 20076. The oil grades CC, CD, CE, CF, orCG have been obsoleted by API and must not beused.

Synthetic engine oils, API category III, arerecommended for use in Cummins enginesoperating in ambient temperature conditionsconsistently below -13°F. Above this temperature,petroleum-based multigrade lubricants arerecommended. Synthetic 0W-30 oils that meetAPI category III can be used in operations wherethe ambient temperature never exceeds 32°F.Multiviscosity oils rated 0W-30 do not offer thesame level of protection against fuel dilution as dohigher multigrade oils. Higher cylinder wear can beexperienced when using 0W-30 oils in high-loadsituations.

For further details and an explanation of enginelubricating oils for Cummins engines, refer toCummins Engine Oil Recommendations, BulletinNo.3810340.

Oil viscosity should be chosen according to thetypical climate conditions experienced by theuser. Use of 15W-40 is recommended for the best

LUBRICANTS AND FLUIDS

ENGINE LUBRICATING OILRECOMMENDATIONS

Cummins engine

Engine sump capacity (without oil filter):

Max. level ................... 9 U.S. gallonsMin. level .................... 7 U.S. gallons

The use of high-quality engine lubricating oils andappropriate oil drain and filter change intervals arecritical factors in maintaining engine performanceand durability.

ISM01-engine: Cummins Inc. recommends theuse of a high-quality 15W-40 multiviscosity heavy-duty engine oil that meets the requirements ofCummins Engineering Specification CES 20071 orCES 20076. American Petroleum Institute (API)specification CH-4 can be used as an alternativeto CES 20071.

ISM02-engine: Cummins Inc. recommends theuse of a high-quality 15W-40 multiviscosity heavy-duty engine oil that meets the requirements of

Cummins Engineering Specifications CES 20078or CES 20076. The oil grades CC, CD, CE, CF, orCG have been obsoleted by API and must not beused.

Synthetic engine oils, API category III, arerecommended for use in Cummins enginesoperating in ambient temperature conditionsconsistently below -13°F. Above this temperature,petroleum-based multigrade lubricants arerecommended. Synthetic 0W-30 oils that meetAPI category III can be used in operations wherethe ambient temperature never exceeds 32°F.Multiviscosity oils rated 0W-30 do not offer thesame level of protection against fuel dilution as dohigher multigrade oils. Higher cylinder wear can beexperienced when using 0W-30 oils in high-loadsituations.

For further details and an explanation of enginelubricating oils for Cummins engines, refer toCummins Engine Oil Recommendations, BulletinNo.3810340.

Oil viscosity should be chosen according to thetypical climate conditions experienced by theuser. Use of 15W-40 is recommended for the best

AP

PE

ND

ICE

SA

PP

EN

DIC

ES

Upd

ate

B_O

GB

05A

FU

pdat

e B

_OG

B05

AF



C2045

C2045

engine durability at higher ambient temperature.For temperature or cold conditions, 10W-30 or5W-30 viscosity can be used for easier starting,improved oil flow, and improved fuel economy.

!!! CAUTION !!!

THE USE OF A SYNTHETIC BASE OIL DOESNOT JUSTIFY EXTENDED OIL CHANGEINTERVALS. EXTENDED OIL CHANGE

INTERVALS CAN DECREASE ENGINE LIFEDUE TO FACTORS SUCH AS CORROSION,

DEPOSITS AND WEAR.


Engine oil pan capacity (without oil filters):

• Full mark ...........................32 U.S. Qts• Low mark ..........................26 U.S. Qts

Total oil capacity of the engine: 40 U.S. Qts to thefull mark (with oil filters installed and filters and oilgalleries charged).

Detroit Diesel recommend the use of a highquality SAE 15W-40 oil meeting API performanceclassification:

• CH-4 or equivalent for engines without ExhaustGas Recirculation

• CI-4 or equivalent for engines with Exhaust GasRecirculation (Engine models: 6067MK2E,6067MV2E)

T02716

engine durability at higher ambient temperature.For temperature or cold conditions, 10W-30 or5W-30 viscosity can be used for easier starting,improved oil flow, and improved fuel economy.

!!! CAUTION !!!

THE USE OF A SYNTHETIC BASE OIL DOESNOT JUSTIFY EXTENDED OIL CHANGEINTERVALS. EXTENDED OIL CHANGE

INTERVALS CAN DECREASE ENGINE LIFEDUE TO FACTORS SUCH AS CORROSION,

DEPOSITS AND WEAR.


Engine oil pan capacity (without oil filters):

• Full mark ...........................32 U.S. Qts• Low mark ..........................26 U.S. Qts

Total oil capacity of the engine: 40 U.S. Qts to thefull mark (with oil filters installed and filters and oilgalleries charged).

Detroit Diesel recommend the use of a highquality SAE 15W-40 oil meeting API performanceclassification:

• CH-4 or equivalent for engines without ExhaustGas Recirculation

• CI-4 or equivalent for engines with Exhaust GasRecirculation (Engine models: 6067MK2E,6067MV2E)

T02716

AP

PE

ND

ICE

S

Update B

_OG

B05A

FU

pdate B_O

GB

05AF

AP

PE

ND

ICE

S



C2045

Caterpillar engine

Engine oil pan capacity (without oil filter):

• Full mark .............................................• Low mark ............................................

Caterpillar recommend the use of API CI-4 oil thatmeets the Caterpillar requirements.

The proper viscosity grade of oil is determined bythe minimum ambient temperature during coldengine start-up, and the maximum ambienttemperature during engine operation (refer to table).

SAE 0W-20SAE 0W-30SAE 0W-40SAE 5W-30SAE 5W-40SAE 10W-30SAE 10W-40SAE 15W-40

-40°F-40°F-40°F-22°F-22°F0°F0°F15°F

50°F86°F104°F86°F122°F104°F122°F122°F

Viscosity GradeMinimum

temperatureMaximum

temperature

Caterpillar engine

Engine oil pan capacity (without oil filter):

• Full mark .............................................• Low mark ............................................

Caterpillar recommend the use of API CI-4 oil thatmeets the Caterpillar requirements.

The proper viscosity grade of oil is determined bythe minimum ambient temperature during coldengine start-up, and the maximum ambienttemperature during engine operation (refer to table).

SAE 0W-20SAE 0W-30SAE 0W-40SAE 5W-30SAE 5W-40SAE 10W-30SAE 10W-40SAE 15W-40

-40°F-40°F-40°F-22°F-22°F0°F0°F15°F

50°F86°F104°F86°F122°F104°F122°F122°F

Viscosity GradeMinimum

temperatureMaximum

temperature

AP

PE

ND

ICE

SA

PP

EN

DIC

ES

Upd

ate

B_O

GB

05A

FU

pdat

e B

_OG

B05

AF



C2045

C2045


Fuel tank capacity: 120 or 245 U.S. gallons.

Cummins engine

!!! CAUTION !!!

DO NOT MIX GASOLINE, ALCOHOL, ORGASOHOL WITH DIESEL FUEL. THIS

MIXTURE CAN CAUSE AN EXPLOSION.

DUE TO THE PRECISE TOLERANCES OFDIESEL INJECTION SYSTEMS, IT IS

EXTREMELY IMPORTANT THAT THE FUELBE KEPT CLEAN AND FREE OF DIRT OR

WATER. DIRT OR WATER IN THE SYSTEMMAY CAUSE SEVERE DAMAGE TO BOTH

THE FUEL INJECTION PUMP AND THEFUEL INJECTORS.

Cummins Engine Company, Inc., recommend theuse of ASTM No. 2D diesel fuel. The use of No.2D diesel fuel will result in optimum engineperformance. At operating temperatures below32°F, acceptable performance can be obtained byusing blends of No. 2D diesel and No. 1D diesel.

NOTE

LIGHTER FUELS CAN REDUCE FUELECONOMY.

The viscocity of the fuel must be kept above1.3 cST at 104°F to provide adequate fuel systemlubrication.


!!! CAUTION !!!

THE FUEL USED MUST BE CLEAN,COMPLETELY DISTILLED, STABLE, AND

NON-CORROSIVE.

Fuel must meet the properties of ASTMdesignation D 975 (grades 1-D and 2-D).

NOTE

DO NOT USE FUEL WITH SULFUR CONTENTABOVE 0.05 MASS PERCENT FOR DETROIT

DIESEL EGR ENGINES.


Fuel tank capacity: 120 or 245 U.S. gallons.

Cummins engine

!!! CAUTION !!!

DO NOT MIX GASOLINE, ALCOHOL, ORGASOHOL WITH DIESEL FUEL. THIS

MIXTURE CAN CAUSE AN EXPLOSION.

DUE TO THE PRECISE TOLERANCES OFDIESEL INJECTION SYSTEMS, IT IS

EXTREMELY IMPORTANT THAT THE FUELBE KEPT CLEAN AND FREE OF DIRT OR

WATER. DIRT OR WATER IN THE SYSTEMMAY CAUSE SEVERE DAMAGE TO BOTH

THE FUEL INJECTION PUMP AND THEFUEL INJECTORS.

Cummins Engine Company, Inc., recommend theuse of ASTM No. 2D diesel fuel. The use of No.2D diesel fuel will result in optimum engineperformance. At operating temperatures below32°F, acceptable performance can be obtained byusing blends of No. 2D diesel and No. 1D diesel.

NOTE

LIGHTER FUELS CAN REDUCE FUELECONOMY.

The viscocity of the fuel must be kept above1.3 cST at 104°F to provide adequate fuel systemlubrication.


!!! CAUTION !!!

THE FUEL USED MUST BE CLEAN,COMPLETELY DISTILLED, STABLE, AND

NON-CORROSIVE.

Fuel must meet the properties of ASTMdesignation D 975 (grades 1-D and 2-D).

NOTE

DO NOT USE FUEL WITH SULFUR CONTENTABOVE 0.05 MASS PERCENT FOR DETROIT

DIESEL EGR ENGINES.

AP

PE

ND

ICE

S

Update B

_OG

B05A

FU

pdate B_O

GB

05AF

AP

PE

ND

ICE

S



C2045

Caterpillar engine

Caterpillar recommend that all distillate diesel fuel,including ULSD fuel (ie fuel containing 15 ppm orless sulfur using ASTM D2622 or DIN 51400) meetthe requirements of the Caterpillar Specificationsfor Distillate Diesel Fuel.In North America, diesel fuel that is identified asNo.1-D or No. 2-D in "ASTM D975" generally meetthe specifications.

NOTE

OPERATING WITH FUELS THAT DO NOTMEET CATERPILLAR'S RECOMMENDATIONS

CAN CAUSE THE FOLLOWING EFFECTS:STARTING DIFFICULTY, POOR COMBUSTION,

DEPOSITS IN THE FUEL INJECTORS,REDUCED SERVICE LIFE OF THE FUEL

SYSTEM, DEPOSITS IN THE COMBUSTIONCHAMBER, AND REDUCED SERVICE LIFE OF

THE ENGINE.

NOTE

REFER TO SPECIAL PUBLICATION,SEBU6385, "CATERPILLAR ON-HIGHWAY

DIESEL TRUCK ENGINE FLUIDSRECOMMENDATIONS" FOR THE

CATERPILLAR SPECIFICATIONS FORDISTILLATE FUEL AND FOR ADDITIONALINFORMATION THAT RELATES TO FUEL

FOR YOUR ENGINE.

Caterpillar engine

Caterpillar recommend that all distillate diesel fuel,including ULSD fuel (ie fuel containing 15 ppm orless sulfur using ASTM D2622 or DIN 51400) meetthe requirements of the Caterpillar Specificationsfor Distillate Diesel Fuel.In North America, diesel fuel that is identified asNo.1-D or No. 2-D in "ASTM D975" generally meetthe specifications.

NOTE

OPERATING WITH FUELS THAT DO NOTMEET CATERPILLAR'S RECOMMENDATIONS

CAN CAUSE THE FOLLOWING EFFECTS:STARTING DIFFICULTY, POOR COMBUSTION,

DEPOSITS IN THE FUEL INJECTORS,REDUCED SERVICE LIFE OF THE FUEL

SYSTEM, DEPOSITS IN THE COMBUSTIONCHAMBER, AND REDUCED SERVICE LIFE

OF THE ENGINE.

NOTE

REFER TO SPECIAL PUBLICATION,SEBU6385, "CATERPILLAR ON-HIGHWAY

DIESEL TRUCK ENGINE FLUIDSRECOMMENDATIONS" FOR THE

CATERPILLAR SPECIFICATIONS FORDISTILLATE FUEL AND FOR ADDITIONALINFORMATION THAT RELATES TO FUEL

FOR YOUR ENGINE.

AP

PE

ND

ICE

SA

PP

EN

DIC

ES

Upd

ate

B_O

GB

05A

FU

pdat

e B

_OG

B05

AF



C2045

C2045


Engine cooling and heating systemcapacity: ........................ approx. 26 U.S. gallons.

Cummins engine

Cummins Engine company, Inc., recommends theuse of fully formulated antifreeze or coolantcontaining a precharge of Supplemental CoolantAdditives (SCA). The antifreeze must meet thespecifications outlined in The MaintenanceCouncil (TMC) Recommended Practice RP 329.The use of fully formulated antifreeze or coolantsignificantly simplifies cooling systemmaintenance. Copies of TMC specifications canbe obtained through Cummins Engine Company.

Fully formulated antifreeze contains balancedamounts of antifreeze, SCA, and bufferingcompounds, but does NOT contain 50% water.Fully formulated coolant contains balancedamounts of antifreeze, SCA, and bufferingcompounds already premixed 50/50 withdeionized water.Cummins Engine Company recommended fullyformulated coolant: Fleetguard Compleat (ethelyneglycol form).

Good quality water

Fully formulated antifreeze must be mixed withgood quality water at a 50/50 ratio (40 to 60percent working range). Good quality water isimportant for cooling system performance.Excessive levels of calcium and magnesiumcontribute to scaling problems, and excessivelevels of chlorides and sulfates cause coolingsystem corrosion. Water added to the fullyformulated antifreeze must meet specificationsgiven in the chart below.

MAX. LIMIT

170 ppm

40 ppm

100 ppm

MINERAL

CalciumMagnesium

Chloride

Sulfate

Supplemental coolant additive (SCA)

Fully formulated products contain SCA and arerequired to protect the cooling system fromfouling, solder blooming, and general corrosion.


Engine cooling and heating systemcapacity: ........................ approx. 26 U.S. gallons.

Cummins engine

Cummins Engine company, Inc., recommends theuse of fully formulated antifreeze or coolantcontaining a precharge of Supplemental CoolantAdditives (SCA). The antifreeze must meet thespecifications outlined in The MaintenanceCouncil (TMC) Recommended Practice RP 329.The use of fully formulated antifreeze or coolantsignificantly simplifies cooling systemmaintenance. Copies of TMC specifications canbe obtained through Cummins Engine Company.

Fully formulated antifreeze contains balancedamounts of antifreeze, SCA, and bufferingcompounds, but does NOT contain 50% water.Fully formulated coolant contains balancedamounts of antifreeze, SCA, and bufferingcompounds already premixed 50/50 withdeionized water.Cummins Engine Company recommended fullyformulated coolant: Fleetguard Compleat (ethelyneglycol form).

Good quality water

Fully formulated antifreeze must be mixed withgood quality water at a 50/50 ratio (40 to 60percent working range). Good quality water isimportant for cooling system performance.Excessive levels of calcium and magnesiumcontribute to scaling problems, and excessivelevels of chlorides and sulfates cause coolingsystem corrosion. Water added to the fullyformulated antifreeze must meet specificationsgiven in the chart below.

MAX. LIMIT

170 ppm

40 ppm

100 ppm

MINERAL

CalciumMagnesium

Chloride

Sulfate

Supplemental coolant additive (SCA)

Fully formulated products contain SCA and arerequired to protect the cooling system fromfouling, solder blooming, and general corrosion.

AP

PE

ND

ICE

S

Update B

_OG

B05A

FU

pdate B_O

GB

05AF

AP

PE

ND

ICE

S



C2045

The recommended concentration level of DCA 4 is1.5 units per U.S. gallon. The DCA 4 concentra-tion must never exceed 3.0 units per U.S. gallonnor fall below 1.2 units per U.S. gallon.


!!! CAUTION !!!

LONG LIFE COOLANT WITH NITRITE ISNOT SUITABLE FOR USE INDETROIT DIESEL ENGINES.

Water requirements

Distilled or de-ionized water which eliminates theadverse effects of minerals in tap water ispreferred. High levels of dissolved chlorides,sulfates, magnesium, and calcium in some tapwater causes scale deposits, sludge depositsand/or corrosion. These deposits have beenshown to result in water pump failures and poorheat transfer, resulting in over-heating. If tap wateris used, the mineral content in the water must bebelow the maximum allowable limits shown in thetable.

Antifreeze

Use genuine Detroit Diesel "Power Cool". DetroitDiesel part number 23512138.

Antifreeze must be used in any climate for bothfreeze and boiling point protection. Detroit Dieselrecommend a 50 % "Power Cool" antifreeze /water solution in most climates. Concentrationsover 67 % are not recommended because of thepoor heat transfer, reduced freeze protection andpossible silicate dropout. An antifreezeconcentration below 33 % offers too little freezeand/or corrosion protection and is notrecommended.

Maximum allowable limits for mineralsin water

Parts permillion

40100340

170

Grains pergallon

2.55.820

10

•••••Chlorides•••••Sulfates•••••Total dissolved solids•••••Total hardness

magnesium &calcium

The recommended concentration level of DCA 4 is1.5 units per U.S. gallon. The DCA 4 concentra-tion must never exceed 3.0 units per U.S. gallonnor fall below 1.2 units per U.S. gallon.


!!! CAUTION !!!

LONG LIFE COOLANT WITH NITRITE ISNOT SUITABLE FOR USE INDETROIT DIESEL ENGINES.

Water requirements

Distilled or de-ionized water which eliminates theadverse effects of minerals in tap water ispreferred. High levels of dissolved chlorides,sulfates, magnesium, and calcium in some tapwater causes scale deposits, sludge depositsand/or corrosion. These deposits have beenshown to result in water pump failures and poorheat transfer, resulting in over-heating. If tap wateris used, the mineral content in the water must bebelow the maximum allowable limits shown in thetable.

Antifreeze

Use genuine Detroit Diesel "Power Cool". DetroitDiesel part number 23512138.

Antifreeze must be used in any climate for bothfreeze and boiling point protection. Detroit Dieselrecommend a 50 % "Power Cool" antifreeze /water solution in most climates. Concentrationsover 67 % are not recommended because of thepoor heat transfer, reduced freeze protection andpossible silicate dropout. An antifreezeconcentration below 33 % offers too little freezeand/or corrosion protection and is notrecommended.

Maximum allowable limits for mineralsin water

Parts permillion

40100340

170

Grains pergallon

2.55.820

10

•••••Chlorides•••••Sulfates•••••Total dissolved solids•••••Total hardness

magnesium &calcium

AP

PE

ND

ICE

SA

PP

EN

DIC

ES

Upd

ate

B_O

GB

05A

FU

pdat

e B

_OG

B05

AF



C2045

C2045

Supplemental Coolant Additives (SCA)

Nitrite concentration is an indication of the SCAconcentration in the coolant. Nitrite test kits andtest strips are available from authorized DetroitDiesel service outlets. The coolant must be testedfor required inhibitor levels at the intervals shownin the Maintenance Manual. SCA levels must bewithin the ranges shown in the table.Maintenance dosage of SCA must only be addedif nitrite concentration is less than 800 PPM. Ifnitrite concentration is higher than 800 PPM, donot add additional SCA. Penray NALCOOL® 3000is the recommended SCA for all Detroit Dieselengines.

SCA concentration limitations

Minimum PPM

125800200500

8.0

Maximum PPM

5002,4007502500

10.5

Boron (B)Nitrite (NO

2)

Nitrates (NO3)

Silicon (Si)Phosphorous (P)pH

Caterpillar engine

!!! CAUTION !!!

VAN HOOL DOES NOT RECOMMENDTHE USE OF LONG LIFE COOLANTS DUE TO

COMPLAINTS IN THE FIELD.

Water requirements

Distilled or de-ionized water is recommended foruse in cooling systems. Do not use hard tap wateror salt softened tap water. If distilled water or de-ionized water is not available, use water thatmeets the minimum requirements that are listed inthe following table.

Caterpillar recommendedwater quality limits

Parts permillion

40100340170

Grains pergallon

2.45.92010

•••••Chloride•••••Sulfate•••••Total solids•••••Total water hardness•••••Acidity 5.5 pH to 9.0 pH


Nitrite concentration is an indication of the SCAconcentration in the coolant. Nitrite test kits andtest strips are available from authorized DetroitDiesel service outlets. The coolant must be testedfor required inhibitor levels at the intervals shownin the Maintenance Manual. SCA levels must bewithin the ranges shown in the table.Maintenance dosage of SCA must only be addedif nitrite concentration is less than 800 PPM. Ifnitrite concentration is higher than 800 PPM, donot add additional SCA. Penray NALCOOL® 3000is the recommended SCA for all Detroit Dieselengines.

SCA concentration limitations

Minimum PPM

125800200500

8.0

Maximum PPM

5002,4007502500

10.5

Boron (B)Nitrite (NO

2)

Nitrates (NO3)

Silicon (Si)Phosphorous (P)pH

Caterpillar engine

!!! CAUTION !!!

VAN HOOL DOES NOT RECOMMENDTHE USE OF LONG LIFE COOLANTS DUE TO

COMPLAINTS IN THE FIELD.

Water requirements

Distilled or de-ionized water is recommended foruse in cooling systems. Do not use hard tap wateror salt softened tap water. If distilled water or de-ionized water is not available, use water thatmeets the minimum requirements that are listed inthe following table.

Caterpillar recommendedwater quality limits

Parts permillion

40100340170

Grains pergallon

2.45.92010

•••••Chloride•••••Sulfate•••••Total solids•••••Total water hardness•••••Acidity 5.5 pH to 9.0 pH

AP

PE

ND

ICE

S

Update B

_OG

B05A

FU

pdate B_O

GB

05AF

AP

PE

ND

ICE

S



C2045

Antifreeze

Acceptable antifreeze/coolant: Caterpillar DieselEngine Antifreeze/Coolant (DEAC) or acommercial heavy-duty coolant/antifreeze thatmeets "ASTM D4985", or "ASTM D6210"specifications.

Antifreeze must be used in any climate for bothfreeze and boiling point protection. Caterpillarrecommend a 50 % antifreeze / water solution inmost climates.


Supplemental Coolant Additives (SCA) help toprotect the metal surfaces of the cooling system.Many additives are depleted during engineoperation. These additives must be replacedperiodically. This can be done by adding liquidSCA.

Caterpillar DEAC does not require a treatmentwith Caterpillar SCA at the initial fill. When acommercial heavy-duty coolant/antifreeze is used,the system must be treated with Caterpillar SCAto a concentration level that is between 3 percentand 6 percent by volume of the system.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUIDRECOMMENDATIONS

Allison WTB500(R)

Capacity:

• Initial fill ......................... approx. 47 U.S. Qts• Refill after oil change ...... approx. 37 U.S. Qts

DEXRON-III and C-4 fluids are recommended.

NOTE

FROM JANUARY 2002 ONWARDS, THETRANSMISSION IS FACTORY FILLED WITH

"TRANSYND TM SYNTHETIC AUTOMATICTRANSMISSION FLUID". THESE

TRANSMISSIONS HAVE A SMALL PLASTICTAG TO THE FILL TUBE OR DIPSTICK.

ZF Astronic

Capacity: approx. 11 U.S. Qts.

Fluid to ZF lubricant list TE-ML 02. This list can befound on the internet at "www.zf.com".

Antifreeze

Acceptable antifreeze/coolant: Caterpillar DieselEngine Antifreeze/Coolant (DEAC) or acommercial heavy-duty coolant/antifreeze thatmeets "ASTM D4985", or "ASTM D6210"specifications.

Antifreeze must be used in any climate for bothfreeze and boiling point protection. Caterpillarrecommend a 50 % antifreeze / water solution inmost climates.


Supplemental Coolant Additives (SCA) help toprotect the metal surfaces of the cooling system.Many additives are depleted during engineoperation. These additives must be replacedperiodically. This can be done by adding liquidSCA.

Caterpillar DEAC does not require a treatmentwith Caterpillar SCA at the initial fill. When acommercial heavy-duty coolant/antifreeze is used,the system must be treated with Caterpillar SCAto a concentration level that is between 3 percentand 6 percent by volume of the system.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUIDRECOMMENDATIONS

Allison WTB500(R)

Capacity:

• Initial fill ......................... approx. 47 U.S. Qts• Refill after oil change ...... approx. 37 U.S. Qts

DEXRON-III and C-4 fluids are recommended.

NOTE

FROM JANUARY 2002 ONWARDS, THETRANSMISSION IS FACTORY FILLED WITH

"TRANSYND TM SYNTHETIC AUTOMATICTRANSMISSION FLUID". THESE

TRANSMISSIONS HAVE A SMALL PLASTICTAG TO THE FILL TUBE OR DIPSTICK.

ZF Astronic


Fluid to ZF lubricant list TE-ML 02. This list can befound on the internet at "www.zf.com".

AP

PE

ND

ICE

SA

PP

EN

DIC

ES

Upd

ate

B_O

GB

05A

FU

pdat

e B

_OG

B05

AF



C2045

C2045

SAE 85W-140

SAE 80W-140

SAE 80W-90

SAE 75W

1008668503210-4-15-40°F

DRIVE AXLE OIL RECOMMENDATIONS


Multigrade gear lubricants meeting therequirements of military specificationMIL-L-2105D are recommended.

Oil viscosity recommendations

Oil viscosity should be selected on the basis ofthe ambient temperature range the vehiclenormally operates in. See table, for right oilviscosity.

POWER STEERING FLUIDRECOMMENDATIONS

Capacity: approx. 9.3 U.S. Qts.

DEXRON-IID, -IIE, -III fluids are recommended.

SAE 85W-140

SAE 80W-140

SAE 80W-90

SAE 75W

1008668503210-4-15-40°F

DRIVE AXLE OIL RECOMMENDATIONS


Multigrade gear lubricants meeting therequirements of military specificationMIL-L-2105D are recommended.

Oil viscosity recommendations

Oil viscosity should be selected on the basis ofthe ambient temperature range the vehiclenormally operates in. See table, for right oilviscosity.

POWER STEERING FLUIDRECOMMENDATIONS

Capacity: approx. 9.3 U.S. Qts.

DEXRON-IID, -IIE, -III fluids are recommended.

AP

PE

ND

ICE

S

Update B

_OG

B05A

FU

pdate B_O

GB

05AF

AP

PE

ND

ICE

S



C2045

CONVERSION FACTORS

QUANTITY

Area

Force

Length

Power

Pressure

Temperature

FROMU.S.CUSTOMARYTO METRICMULTIPLY BY

FROM METRICTO U.S.CUSTOMARYMULTIPLY BY

U.S. CUSTOMARY

Unit Name

sq. inch

sq. foot

pound force

inch

foot

horsepower(metric)

pounds forceper sq. in

degreeFahrenheit

Abbr.

in2

ft2

lbf

in

ft

hp

psi

° F

METRIC

Unit Name

sq. millimeter

sq. meter

Newton

millimeter

millimeter

kilowatt

bar

centigrade

Abbr.

mm2

m2

N

mm

mm

kw

bar

° C

645.16

0.0929

4.4482

25.40

304.801

0.736

0.06911

(° F -32) ÷1.8

0.001550

10.764

0.224809

0.039370

0.00328

1.360

14.4694

(1.8 x ° C) + 32

CONVERSION FACTORS

QUANTITY

Area

Force

Length

Power

Pressure

Temperature



U.S. CUSTOMARY

Unit Name

sq. inch

sq. foot

pound force

inch

foot

horsepower(metric)

pounds forceper sq. in

degreeFahrenheit

Abbr.

in2

ft2

lbf

in

ft

hp

psi

° F

METRIC

Unit Name

sq. millimeter

sq. meter

Newton

millimeter

millimeter

kilowatt

bar

centigrade

Abbr.

mm2

m2

N

mm

mm

kw

bar

° C

645.16

0.0929

4.4482

25.40

304.801

0.736

0.06911

(° F -32) ÷1.8

0.001550

10.764

0.224809

0.039370

0.00328

1.360

14.4694

(1.8 x ° C) + 32

AP

PE

ND

ICE

SA

PP

EN

DIC

ES

Upd

ate

B_O

GB

05A

FU

pdat

e B

_OG

B05

AF



C2045

C2045

CONVERSION FACTORS (continued)

Newton-meter

Newton-meter

kilometers/hour

liter

liter

cubic centimeter

kilogram

0.737562

8.850756

0.6214

0.264179

61.02545

0.06102

2.204623

1.35582

0.113

1.6093

3.7853

0.01639

16.387

0.4536

Nm

Nm

kph

l

l

cm3

kg

METRIC

Unit Name

QUANTITY U.S. CUSTOMARY

Unit Name Abbr. Abbr.



pound forceper foot

pound forceper inch

miles/hour

gallon (U.S.)

cubic inch

cubic inch

pound(avoir.)

ft.lbf

in.lbf

mph

gal

in3

in3

lb

Torque

Velocity

Volume:liquiddisplace-ment

Weight(mass)

CONVERSION FACTORS (continued)

Newton-meter

Newton-meter

kilometers/hour

liter

liter

cubic centimeter

kilogram

0.737562

8.850756

0.6214

0.264179

61.02545

0.06102

2.204623

1.35582

0.113

1.6093

3.7853

0.01639

16.387

0.4536

Nm

Nm

kph

l

l

cm3

kg

METRIC

Unit Name

QUANTITY U.S. CUSTOMARY

Unit Name Abbr. Abbr.



pound forceper foot

pound forceper inch

miles/hour

gallon (U.S.)

cubic inch

cubic inch

pound(avoir.)

ft.lbf

in.lbf

mph

gal

in3

in3

lb

Torque

Velocity

Volume:liquiddisplace-ment

Weight(mass)

AP

PE

ND

ICE

S

Update B

_OG

B05A

FU

pdate B_O

GB

05AF

AP

PE

ND

ICE

S



C2045

No.

0206

AMP

125 A125 A

DESCRIPTION

Main fuse "HVAC"Main fuse "Main junction box"

FUSES

Mega® fuses

The main circuits areprotected by Mega® fuseslocated in the batteryjunction box.T03785

T03786

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM(NON-MULTIPLEXED VEHICLES)

MAINJUNCTION

BOX

HVACJUNCTION

BOX

T05409

BATTERYJUNCTION BOX

Location of junction boxes

ISM/DDECJUNCTION BOX

MaxifusesThese are located in the mainjunction box and the batteryjunction box.

In main junction box

No.

010151

AMP

30 A30 A

DESCRIPTION

StarterMain fuse "+12 VDC"

C2045

No.

0206

AMP

125 A125 A

DESCRIPTION

Main fuse "HVAC"Main fuse "Main junction box"

FUSES

Mega® fuses

The main circuits areprotected by Mega® fuseslocated in the batteryjunction box.T03785

T03786

MaxifusesThese are located in the mainjunction box and the batteryjunction box.


No.

010151

AMP

30 A30 A

DESCRIPTION

StarterMain fuse "+12 VDC"

JUNCTION BOXOF RHS ROOF

BLOWERS

JUNCTION BOXOF LHS ROOF

BLOWERS

MAINJUNCTION

BOX

HVACJUNCTION

BOX

T05409

BATTERYJUNCTION BOX



C2045


BLOWERS


BLOWERS

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM(NON-MULTIPLEXED VEHICLES)

AP

PE

ND

ICE

SA

PP

EN

DIC

ES

Upd

ate

B_O

GB

05A

FU

pdat

e B

_OG

B05

AF



C2045

C2045

T03788

CIRCUIT BREAKERSMost subcircuits areprotected by circuitbreakers. They are ofthe manual resettype. When a circuitbreaker is overloaded,the reset button popsout, thus opening thecircuit. To reset thecircuit breaker, push

the reset button. If the circuit breaker pops outagain, have the electrical circuit checked.


In battery junction box

No.

1588

89.189.2150201

AMP

30 A30 A30 A30 A50 A50 A

DESCRIPTION

Main fuse "audio/video"Main fuse "B+"

Main fuse "engine supply"Main fuse "transmission supply"

Main fuse "+12 VDC"110V system

AUTOFUSES

These are located in the mainjunction box.

T03786

No.

43154155

156

AMP

3 A10 A10 A

3 A

DESCRIPTION

• DDEC ProDriver• audio/video• Flasher and buzzer at

entrance door indicating thecoach is lowering/raising,audio/video +12VDC

• Amplifier antenna

PROTECTED CIRCUITS

• switched D+signal

• Defroster fan

• Defroster fan

• stop lights

• socket for +24VDC portablelamp, starter switch in enginecompartment

AMP

8 A

15 A

15 A

8 A

8 A

No.

20

22.1

23

23.1

25

RESET BUTTON

MANUAL RELEASE

T03788

CIRCUIT BREAKERSMost subcircuits areprotected by circuitbreakers. They are ofthe manual resettype. When a circuitbreaker is overloaded,the reset button popsout, thus opening thecircuit. To reset thecircuit breaker, push

the reset button. If the circuit breaker pops outagain, have the electrical circuit checked.



No.

1588

89.189.2150201

AMP

30 A30 A30 A30 A50 A50 A

DESCRIPTION

Main fuse "audio/video"Main fuse "B+"


Main fuse "+12 VDC"110V system

AUTOFUSES


T03786

No.

43154155

156

AMP

3 A10 A10 A

3 A

DESCRIPTION

• DDEC ProDriver• audio/video• Flasher and buzzer at

entrance door indicating thecoach is lowering/raising,audio/video +12VDC

• Amplifier antenna

PROTECTED CIRCUITS

• switched D+signal

• Defroster fan

• Defroster fan

• stop lights

• socket for +24VDC portablelamp,starter switch in enginecompartment

AMP

8 A

15 A

15 A

8 A

8 A

No.

20

22.1

23

23.1

25

RESET BUTTON

MANUAL RELEASE

AP

PE

ND

ICE

S

Update B

_OG

B05A

FU

pdate B_O

GB

05AF

AP

PE

ND

ICE

S



C2045

AMP

15 A

15 A

15 A

8 A

8 A

8 A

8 A

8 A

8 A

8 A

8 A

PROTECTED CIRCUITS

• aisle light (white)

• reading lights

• reading lights

• luggage compartment lightscontrol

• Road Relay (Cummins)

• toilet

• +12 VDC main relay control

• ISM diagnostics (Cummins)

• digital clock• speed switch

• exitation alternator D+• engine stop• brake light switches

• tag axle unloading• Flasher and buzzer at entrance

door indicating the coach islowering/raising

• suspension raise/lowersystem

No.

26

28

29

29.2

30

31

32

33

34

35

36.1

PROTECTED CIRCUITS

• luggage compartment lights,cigarette lighter

• entrance light• "Watch your step" light• interior light control

• spotlights wheelchair lift

• amplifier speakers

• marker lights relay• neutral/parking brake relay• ignition switch• DDEC/ISM security

• windshield wipers

• ABS

• ABS

• aisle night lights• hatrack night lights

• map light• driver's light• First aisle light• guide/video light


AMP

8 A

8 A

8 A

8 A

8 A

15 A

10 A

10 A

15 A

8 A

15 A

No.

36.2

37.1

37.2

39

42

46.1

47

49

50

51

52

AMP

15 A

15 A

15 A

8 A

8 A

8 A

8 A

8 A

8 A

8 A

8 A

PROTECTED CIRCUITS


• reading lights

• reading lights

• luggage compartment lightscontrol

• Road Relay (Cummins)

• toilet

• +12 VDC main relay control


• digital clock• speed switch

• exitation alternator D+• engine stop• brake light switches

• tag axle unloading• Flasher and buzzer at entrance



No.

26

28

29

29.2

30

31

32

33

34

35

36.1

PROTECTED CIRCUITS

• luggage compartment lights,cigarette lighter

• entrance light• "Watch your step" light• interior light control

• spotlights wheelchair lift


• marker lights relay• neutral/parking brake relay• ignition switch• DDEC/ISM security

• windshield wipers

• ABS

• ABS

• aisle night lights• hatrack night lights

• map light• driver's light• First aisle light• guide/video light


AMP

8 A

8 A

8 A

8 A

8 A

15 A

10 A

10 A

15 A

8 A

15 A

No.

36.2

37.1

37.2

39

42

46.1

47

49

50

51

52

AP

PE

ND

ICE

SA

PP

EN

DIC

ES

Upd

ate

B_O

GB

05A

FU

pdat

e B

_OG

B05

AF



C2045

C2045

No.

80

81.1

82

83.1

83.2

93

94.1

94.2

95

96

97

98

131

152

153

PROTECTED CIRCUITS

• master switch supply

• turn signals• Road Relay (Cummins)

• digital clock• combustion heater timer

• combustion heater


• marker lights(RHS)

• transmission selector light• dashboard lights

• marker lights(LHS)• lights in switches

• headlights, low beam


• headlights, high beam


• Defroster

• + 12 VDC CB socket

• + 12 VDC audio/video,marker lights

AMP

8 A

10 A

8 A

15 A

15 A

8 A

8 A

8 A

8 A

8 A

8 A

8 A

8 A

8 A

15 A

No.

53

54

55

56

57

58

59

60

61

62

65

66

AMP

8 A

8 A

8 A

8 A

8 A

8 A

8 A

8 A

8 A

8 A

8 A

6 A

PROTECTED CIRCUITS

• windshield wipers/washers• side mirror adjustment• horn

• exterior lights control

• turn signals

• starter override switch in en-gine compartment

• driver's side window

• battery equalizer +15• dashboard supply• Jake Brake

• stepwell lights

• backup lights• Road Relay control (Cummins)

• cooling fan clutch

• air dryer

• Destination sign unit

• Fresh air flap interior

• ABS

No.

80

81.1

82

83.1

83.2

93

94.1

94.2

95

96

97

98

131

152

153

PROTECTED CIRCUITS






• marker lights(RHS)

• transmission selector light• dashboard lights

• marker lights(LHS)• lights in switches





• Defroster


• + 12 VDC audio/video,marker lights

AMP

8 A

10 A

8 A

15 A

15 A

8 A

8 A

8 A

8 A

8 A

8 A

8 A

8 A

8 A

15 A

No.

53

54

55

56

57

58

59

60

61

62

65

66

AMP

8 A

8 A

8 A

8 A

8 A

8 A

8 A

8 A

8 A

8 A

8 A

6 A

PROTECTED CIRCUITS

• windshield wipers/washers• side mirror adjustment• horn

• exterior lights control

• turn signals

• starter override switch in en-gine compartment

• driver's side window

• battery equalizer +15• dashboard supply• Jake Brake

• stepwell lights

• backup lights• Road Relay control (Cummins)

• cooling fan clutch

• air dryer

• Destination sign unit

• Fresh air flap interior

• ABS

AP

PE

ND

ICE

S

Update B

_OG

B05A

FU

pdate B_O

GB

05AF

AP

PE

ND

ICE

S



C2045

No.

185

PROTECTED CIRCUITS

• Entrance door

AMP

8 A

PROTECTED CIRCUITS

• DDEC ignition supply(Detroit Diesel)

• DDEC supply (Detroit Diesel)


• D+ alternator 2

• D+ alternator 1

• "W" terminal of alternator

In ISM/DDEC junction box

No.

F1

F4

F5

70

71

79

AMP

6 A

15 A

15 A

8 A

8 A

6 A

No.

185

PROTECTED CIRCUITS

• Entrance door

AMP

8 A

PROTECTED CIRCUITS

• DDEC ignition supply(Detroit Diesel)



• D+ alternator 2

• D+ alternator 1

• "W" terminal of alternator

In ISM/DDEC junction box

No.

F1

F4

F5

70

71

79

AMP

6 A

15 A

15 A

8 A

8 A

6 A

AP

PE

ND

ICE

SA

PP

EN

DIC

ES

Upd

ate

B_O

GB

05A

FU

pdat

e B

_OG

B05

AF



C2045

C2045

AP

PE

ND

ICE

S

Update B

_OG

B05A

FU

pdate B_O

GB

05AF

AP

PE

ND

ICE

S



C2045

No.

02

05

06

AMP

125 A

100 A

125 A

DESCRIPTION

Main fuse "HVAC"

Wheelchair lift

Main fuse "Main junction box"

FUSES

Mega® fuses

The main circuits are protectedby Mega® fuses located in thebattery junction box and in thetoiletcompartment junction box.

T03785

T03786

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM(MULTIPLEXED VEHICLES)

MaxifusesThese are located in the mainjunction box and the battery junctionbox.


No.

130151

AMP

50 A30 A

DESCRIPTION

Node 1Main fuse "+12 VDC"

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM(MULTIPLEXED VEHICLES)

No.

02

05

06

AMP

125 A

100 A

125 A

DESCRIPTION

Main fuse "HVAC"

Wheelchair lift

Main fuse "Main junction box"

FUSES

Mega® fuses

The main circuits are protectedby Mega® fuses located in thebattery junction box and in thetoiletcompartment junction box.

T03785

T03786

MaxifusesThese are located in the mainjunction box and the battery junctionbox.


No.

130151

AMP

50 A30 A

DESCRIPTION

Node 1Main fuse "+12 VDC"

MAINJUNCTION

BOX

HVACJUNCTION BOX

T06265

BATTERYJUNCTION BOX



C2045


BLOWERS


BLOWERS

FRONTJUNCTION BOX

JUNCTION BOXIN TOILET

COMPARTMENT

MAINJUNCTION

BOX

HVACJUNCTION BOX

T06265

BATTERYJUNCTION BOX



C2045


BLOWERS


BLOWERS

FRONTJUNCTION BOX

JUNCTION BOXIN TOILET

COMPARTMENT

AP

PE

ND

ICE

SA

PP

EN

DIC

ES

Upd

ate

B_O

GB

05A

FU

pdat

e B

_OG

B05

AF



C2045

C2045


No.

1015848588

89.189.2150

AMP

30 A30 A80 A40 A30 A30 A30 A50 A

DESCRIPTION

Starter motorMain fuse "audio/video"

Battery equalizerBattery equalizerMain fuse "B+"


Main fuse "+12 VDC"

AUTOFUSES


T03786

No.

43154

AMP

3 A10 A

DESCRIPTION

• DDEC ProDriver• audio/video

No.

155

156158

AMP

10 A

3 A15 A

DESCRIPTION

• Flasher and buzzer atentrance door indicating thecoach is lowering/raising,audio/video +12VDC

• Amplifier antenna• Front fog lights


Midi® fusesThese are located in thetoilet compartment junctionbox.

No.

F1MF2M

AMP

50 A50 A

DESCRIPTION

• HVAC system• HVAC system

T03785


No.

1015848588

89.189.2150

AMP

30 A30 A80 A40 A30 A30 A30 A50 A

DESCRIPTION

Starter motorMain fuse "audio/video"

Battery equalizerBattery equalizerMain fuse "B+"


Main fuse "+12 VDC"

AUTOFUSES


T03786

No.

43154

AMP

3 A10 A

DESCRIPTION

• DDEC ProDriver• audio/video

No.

155

156158

AMP

10 A

3 A15 A

DESCRIPTION

• Flasher and buzzer atentrance door indicating thecoach is lowering/raising,audio/video +12VDC

• Amplifier antenna• Front fog lights


Midi® fusesThese are located in thetoilet compartment junctionbox.

No.

F1MF2M

AMP

50 A50 A

DESCRIPTION

• HVAC system• HVAC system

T03785

AP

PE

ND

ICE

S

Update B

_OG

B05A

FU

pdate B_O

GB

05AF

AP

PE

ND

ICE

S



C2045


PROTECTED CIRCUITS

• wheelchair lift

• defroster fan

• defroster fan


• luggage compartment lights


• ABS

• ABS

• guide/video light

• side mirror adjustment

• voltage reference, cigarettelighter

• Road Relay (Cummins)• starter• DDEC/ISM security• Jake Brake

AMP

10 A

15 A

15 A

8 A

15 A

8 A

10 A

10 A

8 A

8 A

8 A

8 A

No.

16

22.1

23

25

26

29.2

32

33

35

36

39

42

T03788

CIRCUIT BREAKERS

RESET BUTTON

MANUAL RELEASE

Most subcircuits are protected by circuit breakers.They are of the manual reset type. When a circuitbreaker is overloaded, the reset button pops out,thus opening the circuit. To reset the circuitbreaker, push the reset button. If the circuitbreaker pops out again, have the electrical circuitchecked.


PROTECTED CIRCUITS

• wheelchair lift

• defroster fan

• defroster fan


• luggage compartment lights


• ABS

• ABS

• guide/video light

• side mirror adjustment

• voltage reference, cigarettelighter

• Road Relay (Cummins)• starter• DDEC/ISM security• Jake Brake

AMP

10 A

15 A

15 A

8 A

15 A

8 A

10 A

10 A

8 A

8 A

8 A

8 A

No.

16

22.1

23

25

26

29.2

32

33

35

36

39

42

T03788

CIRCUIT BREAKERS

RESET BUTTON

MANUAL RELEASE

Most subcircuits are protected by circuit breakers.They are of the manual reset type. When a circuitbreaker is overloaded, the reset button pops out,thus opening the circuit. To reset the circuitbreaker, push the reset button. If the circuitbreaker pops out again, have the electrical circuitchecked.

AP

PE

ND

ICE

SA

PP

EN

DIC

ES

Upd

ate

B_O

GB

05A

FU

pdat

e B

_OG

B05

AF



C2045

C2045

No.

95

96

97

98

131

152

153

185

200

201

202

203

204

300

301

302

303

304

PROTECTED CIRCUITS

• headlights RHS, low beam

• headlights LHS, low beam

• headlights RHS, high beam

• headlights LHS, high beam

• Defroster


• + 12 VDC audio/video

• Entrance door

• Node 2

• Node 2

• Node 2

• Node 2

• Node 2

• Node 3

• Node 3

• Node 3

• Node 3

• Node 3

AMP

8 A

8 A

8 A

8 A

8 A

8 A

15 A

8 A

15 A

15 A

15 A

15 A

15 A

15 A

15 A

15 A

15 A

15 A

AMP

8 A

8 A

8 A

8 A

10 A

10

8 A

15 A

8 A

8 A

PROTECTED CIRCUITS

• toilet• flasher and buzzer at entrance



• +12 VDC main relay control• marker lights• exterior lights




• turn signals• ignition switch



• multiplex computermodule(ZR)

• dashboard node

No.

46.1

47

49

80

81.1

81.2

82

83.2

84.1

85

No.

95

96

97

98

131

152

153

185

200

201

202

203

204

300

301

302

303

304

PROTECTED CIRCUITS

• headlights RHS, low beam

• headlights LHS, low beam

• headlights RHS, high beam

• headlights LHS, high beam

• Defroster


• + 12 VDC audio/video

• Entrance door

• Node 2

• Node 2

• Node 2

• Node 2

• Node 2

• Node 3

• Node 3

• Node 3

• Node 3

• Node 3

AMP

8 A

8 A

8 A

8 A

8 A

8 A

15 A

8 A

15 A

15 A

15 A

15 A

15 A

15 A

15 A

15 A

15 A

15 A

AMP

8 A

8 A

8 A

8 A

10 A

10

8 A

15 A

8 A

8 A

PROTECTED CIRCUITS

• toilet• flasher and buzzer at entrance



• +12 VDC main relay control• marker lights• exterior lights




• turn signals• ignition switch



• multiplex computermodule(ZR)

• dashboard node

No.

46.1

47

49

80

81.1

81.2

82

83.2

84.1

85

AP

PE

ND

ICE

S

Update B

_OG

B05A

FU

pdate B_O

GB

05AF

AP

PE

ND

ICE

S



C2045

In front junction box

PROTECTED CIRCUITS

• Windshield wipers

• Node 1

• Node 1

• Node 1

• Node 1

• Node 1

• Diagnostics

AMP

15 A

15 A

15 A

15 A

15 A

15 A

8 A

No.

31

100

101

102

103

104

105

In toilet compartment junction box

PROTECTED CIRCUITS

• Node 4

• Node 4

• Node 4

• Node 4

• Node 4

• Node 5

• Node 5

• Node 5

• Node 5

• Node 5

• Node 6

• Node 6

• Node 6

• Node 6

• Node 6

AMP

15 A

15 A

15 A

15 A

15 A

15 A

15 A

15 A

15 A

15 A

15 A

15 A

15 A

15 A

15 A

No.

400

401

402

403

404

500

501

502

503

504

600

601

602

603

604

In front junction box

PROTECTED CIRCUITS

• Windshield wipers

• Node 1

• Node 1

• Node 1

• Node 1

• Node 1

• Diagnostics

AMP

15 A

15 A

15 A

15 A

15 A

15 A

8 A

No.

31

100

101

102

103

104

105

In toilet compartment junction box

PROTECTED CIRCUITS

• Node 4

• Node 4

• Node 4

• Node 4

• Node 4

• Node 5

• Node 5

• Node 5

• Node 5

• Node 5

• Node 6

• Node 6

• Node 6

• Node 6

• Node 6

AMP

15 A

15 A

15 A

15 A

15 A

15 A

15 A

15 A

15 A

15 A

15 A

15 A

15 A

15 A

15 A

No.

400

401

402

403

404

500

501

502

503

504

600

601

602

603

604

UP

DA

TE

S A

ND

AD

DIT

ION

SU

PD

AT

ES

AN

D A

DD

ITIO

NS

OG

B06

AF

OG

B06

AF



C2045

C2045

UPDATES AND ADDITIONS

ZF ASTRONIC TRANSMISSION

Introduction ........................................................................................................................... page 3Push-button shift selector ..................................................................................................... page 3Automatic mode .................................................................................................................... page 5Manual mode ........................................................................................................................ page 5To operate ............................................................................................................................. page 5

ZF INTARDER

Introduction ......................................................................................................................... page 14Message on multifunction display ....................................................................................... page 14To operate ........................................................................................................................... page 14

MECHANICAL BATTERY ISOLATING SWITCH ....................................................................... page 15

UPDATES AND ADDITIONS


Introduction ........................................................................................................................... page 3Push-button shift selector ..................................................................................................... page 3Automatic mode .................................................................................................................... page 5Manual mode ........................................................................................................................ page 5To operate ............................................................................................................................. page 5

ZF INTARDER

Introduction ......................................................................................................................... page 14Message on multifunction display ....................................................................................... page 14To operate ........................................................................................................................... page 14

MECHANICAL BATTERY ISOLATING SWITCH ....................................................................... page 15

UP

DA

TE

S A

ND

AD

DIT

ION

S

OG

B06A

FO

GB

06AF

UP

DA

TE

S A

ND

AD

DIT

ION

S

C2045PAGE 2 DATE 10/2004 SECTION 6

PAGE 2 SECTION 6DATE 10/2004C2045

UP

DA

TE

S A

ND

AD

DIT

ION

SU

PD

AT

ES

AN

D A

DD

ITIO

NS

OG

B06

AF

OG

B06

AF



C2045

C2045


INTRODUCTION

The ZF ASTRONIC is a 12-speed auto-shiftingelectronically controlled mechanical typetransmission. Because the clutch operation isalso controlled by the gear shift system, there isno need for a clutch pedal.

PUSH-BUTTON SHIFT SELECTOR

The push-button shift selector has six push-buttons and a digital display. The six push-buttonsare identified as "R", "N", "D", "↑" (up arrow), "↓"(down arrow) and "Fn".

• "R": reverse• "N": neutral (no gears selected

in transmission)• "D": forward• "↑": Upshift• "↓": downshift• "Fn": to change between

automatic and manual mode.

The buttons "R", "N" and "D" contain a led. Theled:• flashes when a range change is requested;• illuminates when the range change iscompleted.

The "R", "N" and "D" buttons respond oncereleased. If the buttons are held down for morethan 5 seconds, the shift is ignored.

The ↑ ", "↓" and "Fn" buttons respond immediately.


INTRODUCTION

The ZF ASTRONIC is a 12-speed auto-shiftingelectronically controlled mechanical typetransmission. Because the clutch operation isalso controlled by the gear shift system, there isno need for a clutch pedal.

PUSH-BUTTON SHIFT SELECTOR

The push-button shift selector has six push-buttons and a digital display. The six push-buttonsare identified as "R", "N", "D", "↑" (up arrow), "↓"(down arrow) and "Fn".

• "R": reverse• "N": neutral (no gears selected

in transmission)• "D": forward• "↑": Upshift• "↓": downshift• "Fn": to change between

automatic and manual mode.

The buttons "R", "N" and "D" contain a led. Theled:• flashes when a range change is requested;• illuminates when the range change iscompleted.

The "R", "N" and "D" buttons respond oncereleased. If the buttons are held down for morethan 5 seconds, the shift is ignored.

The ↑ ", "↓" and "Fn" buttons respond immediately.

UP

DA

TE

S A

ND

AD

DIT

ION

S

OG

B06A

FO

GB

06AF

UP

DA

TE

S A

ND

AD

DIT

ION

S



Messages on display

Gear shift system self-check.Comes on when you switch on thevehicle ignition.

Transmission in neutral.

Transmission in reverse.

Gear shift system in automaticmode (indicated by two bars andtwo arrows). In this example: 4thgear selected.

Gear shift system in manualmode (no bars or arrowsdisplayed). In this example: 4thgear selected.

Insufficient compressed-airsupply. Alternates with the normaldisplay.

Throttle pedal error.Remedy: Release the throttlepedal. If the message does notdisappear, there is a systemerror. Vehicle can not be drivenany further.

Clutch overloaded.This message alternates with thenormal display.Remedy: refer to instructionsunder "Clutch protection". furtheron.

Clutch wear.Remedy: visit nearest specializedworkshop to replace the clutch.

Serious failure in gear shiftsystem.Stop vehicle. The vehicle must notbe driven further. Call for technicalassistance.

Messages on display

Gear shift system self-check.Comes on when you switch on thevehicle ignition.

Transmission in neutral.

Transmission in reverse.

Gear shift system in automaticmode (indicated by two bars andtwo arrows). In this example: 4thgear selected.

Gear shift system in manualmode (no bars or arrowsdisplayed). In this example: 4thgear selected.

Insufficient compressed-airsupply. Alternates with the normaldisplay.

Throttle pedal error.Remedy: Release the throttlepedal. If the message does notdisappear, there is a systemerror. Vehicle can not be drivenany further.

Clutch overloaded.This message alternates with thenormal display.Remedy: refer to instructionsunder "Clutch protection". furtheron.

Clutch wear.Remedy: visit nearest specializedworkshop to replace the clutch.

Serious failure in gear shiftsystem.Stop vehicle. The vehicle must notbe driven further. Call for technicalassistance.

UP

DA

TE

S A

ND

AD

DIT

ION

SU

PD

AT

ES

AN

D A

DD

ITIO

NS

OG

B06

AF

OG

B06

AF



C2045

C2045

AUTOMATIC MODE

"D" button pushed. The gear shift system selectsthe proper gear. If the throttle pedal is depressed,the clutch will be engaged automatically and thevehicle will be put in motion. Upshifting anddownshifting will be performed automatically bythe gear shift system.

Gear shifts resulting in engine over-revving orstalling are ignored in the automatic mode.

You can always intervene manually by pushingthe "↑" or "↓ " button (back-off of throttle pedal notnecessary).

MANUAL MODE

The manual mode is selected with the "Fn"button.

If the throttle pedal is depressed, the clutch will beengaged automatically and the vehicle will be putin motion. Upshifting and downshifting is done withthe "↑" and "↓" buttons.

Avoid gear shifts resulting in engine over-revving.

Engine may stall if the throttle pedal is depressedwith the transmission in a too high gear.

TO OPERATE

!!! CAUTION!!!

DO NOT LEAVE YOUR SEAT WITH THEENGINE RUNNING AND TRANSMISSIONIN GEAR. THE ZF ASTRONIC DOES NOT

HAVE A PARK POSITION.

To start engine

1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Switch on ignition. On the display appears themessage "CH".

3. Start the engine. The message "CH" changesinto "N" to indicate that the self test is com-pleted and the transmission is in neutral. TheLED of the "N" button illuminates as soon asthe gear shift system has detected neutral.If the air pressure is low, wait until the "AL"message that alternates with the "N" messagedisappears.

NOTE:

GEAR SHIFTS ARE ONLY POSSIBLEWHEN THE ENGINE IS RUNNING.

AUTOMATIC MODE

"D" button pushed. The gear shift system selectsthe proper gear. If the throttle pedal is depressed,the clutch will be engaged automatically and thevehicle will be put in motion. Upshifting anddownshifting will be performed automatically bythe gear shift system.

Gear shifts resulting in engine over-revving orstalling are ignored in the automatic mode.

You can always intervene manually by pushingthe "↑" or "↓ " button (back-off of throttle pedal notnecessary).

MANUAL MODE

The manual mode is selected with the "Fn"button.

If the throttle pedal is depressed, the clutch will beengaged automatically and the vehicle will be putin motion. Upshifting and downshifting is done withthe "↑" and "↓" buttons.

Avoid gear shifts resulting in engine over-revving.

Engine may stall if the throttle pedal is depressedwith the transmission in a too high gear.

TO OPERATE

!!! CAUTION!!!

DO NOT LEAVE YOUR SEAT WITH THEENGINE RUNNING AND TRANSMISSIONIN GEAR. THE ZF ASTRONIC DOES NOT

HAVE A PARK POSITION.

To start engine

1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Switch on ignition. On the display appears themessage "CH".

3. Start the engine. The message "CH" changesinto "N" to indicate that the self test is com-pleted and the transmission is in neutral. TheLED of the "N" button illuminates as soon asthe gear shift system has detected neutral.If the air pressure is low, wait until the "AL"message that alternates with the "N" messagedisappears.

NOTE:

GEAR SHIFTS ARE ONLY POSSIBLEWHEN THE ENGINE IS RUNNING.

UP

DA

TE

S A

ND

AD

DIT

ION

S

OG

B06A

FO

GB

06AF

UP

DA

TE

S A

ND

AD

DIT

ION

S



To drive off, forward travel

1. Start the engine (refer to "To start the engine")earlier in this chapter.

2. Depress the brake pedal and push the "D"button. The automatic mode is selected.

On the display appears the driving-off gearselected by the gear shift system. The led ofthe "D" button illuminates (clutch still remainsdisengaged at this stage).

3. Release the parking brake.

!!! CAUTION !!!

THE VEHICLE MAY ROLL AWAY EVEN IF THETHROTTLE PEDAL IS NOT DEPRESSED.

4. Release the brake pedal and depress thethrottle pedal.

The clutch will be engaged automatically andthe vehicle starts to move.

"Easy start" system. This system keeps airpressure in the drive axle service brake cham-bers for about 2 seconds after releasing thebrake pedal. This prevents the coach fromrolling away between releasing the brake pedal

and activating the throttle pedal. The systemworks only when vehicle is stopped. Note thatthe pressure in the drive axle service airchambers depends on the position of the brakepedal at release.

To change driving-off gear

To change the driving-off gear: push the "↑" or "↓"button. The display shows the selected driving-offgear.

To manoeuvre

1st gear, 2nd gear, and reverse have been set upas manoeuvring gears for extremely slow travel.Manoeuvring mode is not available in the othergears.The gear shift system detects manoeuvringcondition by the position of the throttle pedal andthe low vehicle speed. In manoeuvring modeengine responds to throttle pedal movement andclutch control differs from the normal driving mode.

!!! CAUTION !!!

CHANGING FROM MANOEUVRING MODE TONORMAL DRIVING MODE IS PERFORMED

To drive off, forward travel

1. Start the engine (refer to "To start the engine")earlier in this chapter.

2. Depress the brake pedal and push the "D"button. The automatic mode is selected.

On the display appears the driving-off gearselected by the gear shift system. The led ofthe "D" button illuminates (clutch still remainsdisengaged at this stage).

3. Release the parking brake.

!!! CAUTION !!!

THE VEHICLE MAY ROLL AWAY EVEN IF THETHROTTLE PEDAL IS NOT DEPRESSED.

4. Release the brake pedal and depress thethrottle pedal.

The clutch will be engaged automatically andthe vehicle starts to move.

"Easy start" system. This system keeps airpressure in the drive axle service brake cham-bers for about 2 seconds after releasing thebrake pedal. This prevents the coach fromrolling away between releasing the brake pedal

and activating the throttle pedal. The systemworks only when the vehicle is stopped. Notethat the pressure in the drive axle service airchambers depends on the position of the brakepedal at release.

To change driving-off gear

To change the driving-off gear: push the "↑" or "↓"button. The display shows the selected driving-offgear.

To manoeuvre

1st gear, 2nd gear, and reverse have been set upas manoeuvring gears for extremely slow travel.Manoeuvring mode is not available in the othergears.The gear shift system detects manoeuvringcondition by the position of the throttle pedal andthe low vehicle speed. In manoeuvring modeengine responds to throttle pedal movement andclutch control differs from the normal driving mode.

!!! CAUTION !!!

CHANGING FROM MANOEUVRING MODE TONORMAL DRIVING MODE IS PERFORMED

UP

DA

TE

S A

ND

AD

DIT

ION

SU

PD

AT

ES

AN

D A

DD

ITIO

NS

OG

B06

AF

OG

B06

AF



C2045

C2045

AUTOMATICALLY AND DEPENDS ONTHROTTLE PEDAL POSITION AND VEHICLE

SPEED. DURING THIS CHANGE THE VEHICLEMAY ACCELERATE SUDDENLY. ACCIDENT

HAZARD.

To roll from up or down grades

Precondition: engine running

!!! CAUTION!!!

DO NOT ALLOW THE VEHICLE TO ROLL INTHE OPPOSITE DIRECTION OF TRAVEL TO

THAT OF THE GEAR SELECTED.

If the vehicle rolls forward and you shift from "N" to"D", the gear shift system selects a gear suitablefor the vehicle speed. Driveline is fully engaged.

To change between operating modes

It is always possible to change from manual toautomatic mode or vice versa, even while thevehicle is in motion.

To change from manual to automatic mode

Press "Fn" button.

To change from automatic to manual mode

Press "Fn" button.

To shift gear

In automatic mode

All upshifts and downshifts are performed auto-matically. Shifting depends on throttle pedalposition, loading, vehicle speed, engine speed.

In manual mode

Push the "↑" or "↓" button once. The gear shiftsystem temporarily exits the automatic mode. Ifno other manual intervension is made within 10 to20 seconds, the gear shift system will return toautomatic mode again.

To jump one gear: push the "↑" or "↓" buttontwice.

To jump two gears: push the "↑" or "↓" buttonthree times.

AUTOMATICALLY AND DEPENDS ONTHROTTLE PEDAL POSITION AND VEHICLE

SPEED. DURING THIS CHANGE THE VEHICLEMAY ACCELERATE SUDDENLY. ACCIDENT

HAZARD.

To roll from up or down grades

Precondition: engine running

!!! CAUTION!!!

DO NOT ALLOW THE VEHICLE TO ROLL INTHE OPPOSITE DIRECTION OF TRAVEL TO

THAT OF THE GEAR SELECTED.

If the vehicle rolls forward and you shift from "N" to"D", the gear shift system selects a gear suitablefor the vehicle speed. Driveline is fully engaged.

To change between operating modes

It is always possible to change from manual toautomatic mode or vice versa, even while thevehicle is in motion.

To change from manual to automatic mode

Press "Fn" button.

To change from automatic to manual mode

Press "Fn" button.

To shift gear

In automatic mode

All upshifts and downshifts are performed auto-matically. Shifting depends on throttle pedalposition, loading, vehicle speed, engine speed.

In manual mode

Push the "↑" or "↓" button once. The gear shiftsystem temporarily exits the automatic mode. Ifno other manual intervension is made within 10 to20 seconds, the gear shift system will return toautomatic mode again.

To jump one gear: push the "↑" or "↓" buttontwice.

To jump two gears: push the "↑" or "↓" buttonthree times.

UP

DA

TE

S A

ND

AD

DIT

ION

S

OG

B06A

FO

GB

06AF

UP

DA

TE

S A

ND

AD

DIT

ION

S



NOTE:

YOU CAN SHIFT TO NEUTRAL FROM ANYGEAR AND AT ANY TIME.

THERE IS NO NEED TO BACK-OFF ORDEPRESS THE THROTTLE PEDAL

DURING THE SHIFT PROCESS. THETHROTTLE IS AUTOMATICALLYCONTROLLED FOR THE SHIFT.

!!! CAUTION!!!

IF YOU SHIFT TO NEUTRAL WHILE VEHICLEIS IN MOTION, ENGINE BRAKE IS NO

LONGER EFFECTIVE.

To reverse

Completely stop the vehicle before shifting toreverse.

1. Depress the brake pedal and push the "R"button.On the display appears "R" and the led in the"R" button illuminates (clutch still remainsdisengaged at this stage).

2. Depress the throttle pedal and, at the sametime, release the brake pedal (clutch will beengaged automatically).The vehicle moves backwards.

!!! CAUTION!!!

THE TRANSMISSION WILL NOT SHIFT TOREVERSE WHILE THE VEHICLE IS IN

MOTION. COMPLETELY STOP THE VEHICLE.

NOTE:

YOU CAN SHIFT TO NEUTRAL FROM ANYGEAR AND AT ANY TIME.

THERE IS NO NEED TO BACK-OFF ORDEPRESS THE THROTTLE PEDAL

DURING THE SHIFT PROCESS. THETHROTTLE IS AUTOMATICALLYCONTROLLED FOR THE SHIFT.

!!! CAUTION!!!

IF YOU SHIFT TO NEUTRAL WHILE VEHICLEIS IN MOTION, ENGINE BRAKE IS NO

LONGER EFFECTIVE.

To reverse

Completely stop the vehicle before shifting toreverse.

1. Depress the brake pedal and push the "R"button.On the display appears "R" and the led in the"R" button illuminates (clutch still remainsdisengaged at this stage).

2. Depress the throttle pedal and, at the sametime, release the brake pedal (clutch will beengaged automatically).The vehicle moves backwards.

!!! CAUTION!!!

THE TRANSMISSION WILL NOT SHIFT TOREVERSE WHILE THE VEHICLE IS IN

MOTION. COMPLETELY STOP THE VEHICLE.

UP

DA

TE

S A

ND

AD

DIT

ION

SU

PD

AT

ES

AN

D A

DD

ITIO

NS

OG

B06

AF

OG

B06

AF



C2045

C2045

To change direction of travel

Completely stop the vehicle before changingdirection of travel.

To change from "R" to "D": push the "D" buttonTo change from "D" to "R": push the "R" button

!!! CAUTION!!!

SHIFTING FROM FORWARD TO REVERSEOR VICE VERSA SHOULD ONLY BE

PERFORMED WHILE THE VEHICLE ISCOMPLETELY STOPPED, OTHERWISE THETRANSMISSION WILL SHIFT TO NEUTRAL.THE LED IN THE BUTTON WILL FLASH TO

INDICATE THAT THE SHIFT IS NOT YETCOMPLETED.

To stop vehicle

Without actuating the throttle pedal, bring thevehicle to a complete stop by using the servicebrakes.The clutch will be disengaged automatically justbefore the vehicle is completely stopped. This willprevent engine stalling.

It is recommended to put the transmission inneutral if the vehicle remains stopped for a longertime.

!!! CAUTION!!!

IF THE VEHICLE IS AT A STANDSTILL WITHTHE ENGINE RUNNING AND A GEAR

SELECTED, THE VEHICLE CAN BE MOVEDBY SIMPLY DEPRESSING THE THROTTLE

PEDAL!

BEFORE LEAVING A VEHICLE WITH THEENGINE RUNNING, THE TRANSMISSION

MUST BE PUT INTO NEUTRAL ANDTHE PARKING BRAKE APPLIED.

APPLYING THE PARKING BRAKE DURINGTRAVEL ON A SMOOTH ROAD SURFACE

MAY RESULT IN ENGINE STALLING.POWER STEERING IS THEN NO LONGER

AVAILABLE!

To change direction of travel

Completely stop the vehicle before changingdirection of travel.

To change from "R" to "D": push the "D" buttonTo change from "D" to "R": push the "R" button

!!! CAUTION!!!

SHIFTING FROM FORWARD TO REVERSEOR VICE VERSA SHOULD ONLY BE

PERFORMED WHILE THE VEHICLE ISCOMPLETELY STOPPED, OTHERWISE THETRANSMISSION WILL SHIFT TO NEUTRAL.THE LED IN THE BUTTON WILL FLASH TO

INDICATE THAT THE SHIFT IS NOT YETCOMPLETED.

To stop vehicle

Without actuating the throttle pedal, bring thevehicle to a complete stop by using the servicebrakes.The clutch will be disengaged automatically justbefore the vehicle is completely stopped. This willprevent engine stalling.

It is recommended to put the transmission inneutral if the vehicle remains stopped for a longertime.

!!! CAUTION!!!

IF THE VEHICLE IS AT A STANDSTILL WITHTHE ENGINE RUNNING AND A GEAR

SELECTED, THE VEHICLE CAN BE MOVEDBY SIMPLY DEPRESSING THE THROTTLE

PEDAL!

BEFORE LEAVING A VEHICLE WITH THEENGINE RUNNING, THE TRANSMISSION

MUST BE PUT INTO NEUTRAL ANDTHE PARKING BRAKE APPLIED.

APPLYING THE PARKING BRAKE DURINGTRAVEL ON A SMOOTH ROAD SURFACE

MAY RESULT IN ENGINE STALLING.POWER STEERING IS THEN NO LONGER

AVAILABLE!

UP

DA

TE

S A

ND

AD

DIT

ION

S

OG

B06A

FO

GB

06AF

UP

DA

TE

S A

ND

AD

DIT

ION

S



To switch off engine and park thevehicle

1. Bring vehicle to a complete stop.

2. Apply parking brake

3. Push "N" button. On the display appears "N"and the led of the "N" button illuminates.

4. Switch off ignition to stop the engine.

NOTE:

THE GEAR SHIFT SYSTEM WILLAUTOMATICALLY PUT THE TRANSMISSION

IN NEUTRAL WHEN THE IGNITION ISSWITCHED OFF WITH THE TRANSMISSION

NOT IN NEUTRAL .

!!! CAUTION!!!

BECAUSE THE TRANSMISSIONAUTOMATICALLY SHIFTS

TO NEUTRAL WHEN THE IGNITION ISSWITCHED OFF, THE VEHICLE MAY ROLL

AWAY IF PARKING BRAKE IS NOTAPPLIED.

Clutch protection

"CL" is displayed if there is a risk that the clutchwill be overloaded as a result of several startingattempts in a short time or creeping in a too highdriving-off gear.

Remedy:

1. Depress the throttle pedal to engage theclutch.

2. Stop the vehicle.

3. Quickly shift to a lower gear.

To protect the mechanical components of theclutch release device, shift the transmission toneutral if the vehicle remains stopped for a longertime (for more than approx. 1 to 2 minutes, forexample, in traffic jams, at railway crossings etc).This will engage the clutch and relieves the clutchrelease device.

Although the clutch operation is automaticallycontrolled, you still have considerable influence onclutch service life. So it is recommended to putthe vehicle in motion in the lowest possible gear toincrease the clutch service life.

To switch off engine and park thevehicle

1. Bring vehicle to a complete stop.

2. Apply parking brake

3. Push "N" button. On the display appears "N"and the led of the "N" button illuminates.

4. Switch off ignition to stop the engine.

NOTE:

THE GEAR SHIFT SYSTEM WILLAUTOMATICALLY PUT THE TRANSMISSION

IN NEUTRAL WHEN THE IGNITION ISSWITCHED OFF WITH THE TRANSMISSION

NOT IN NEUTRAL .

!!! CAUTION!!!

BECAUSE THE TRANSMISSIONAUTOMATICALLY SHIFTS

TO NEUTRAL WHEN THE IGNITION ISSWITCHED OFF, THE VEHICLE MAY ROLL

AWAY IF PARKING BRAKE IS NOTAPPLIED.

Clutch protection

"CL" is displayed if there is a risk that the clutchwill be overloaded as a result of several startingattempts in a short time or creeping in a too highdriving-off gear.

Remedy:

1. Depress the throttle pedal to engage theclutch.

2. Stop the vehicle.

3. Quickly shift to a lower gear.

To protect the mechanical components of theclutch release device, shift the transmission toneutral if the vehicle remains stopped for a longertime (for more than approx. 1 to 2 minutes, forexample, in traffic jams, at railway crossings etc).This will engage the clutch and relieves the clutchrelease device.

Although the clutch operation is automaticallycontrolled, you still have considerable influence onclutch service life. So it is recommended to putthe vehicle in motion in the lowest possible gear toincrease the clutch service life.

UP

DA

TE

S A

ND

AD

DIT

ION

SU

PD

AT

ES

AN

D A

DD

ITIO

NS

OG

B06

AF

OG

B06

AF



C2045

C2045

Engine overspeed protection

The electronics protect the engine againstoverspeed and stalling.

Manual mode

An automatic upshift is not made if the vehicle isgoing downhill. Under these circumstances, it isup to you to keep engine revs under control byreducing vehicle speed.

!!! CAUTION!!!

ENGINE OVERSPEED MAY LEAD TOSERIOUS ENGINE DAMAGE.

Automatic mode

!!! CAUTION!!!

TO PROTECT THE ENGINE AGAINSTOVERSPEED, THE GEAR SHIFT SYSTEM

WILL UPSHIFT AUTOMATICALLY WHEN THEVEHICLE SPEED INCREASES.

Vehicle on roller dynamometer

1. Drive the vehicle on the roller dynamometer.

2. Push the "N" button. The transmission is inneutral.

If the dynamometer is started, the gear shiftsystem detects the "driving vehicle" status. If youpush the "D" button with the dynamometer acti-vated, the gear shift system will select a gear thatis appropriate for the speed and close the clutch.Automatic shifts are not undertaken because thefront wheels are not rotating.

Reverse can not be selected when thedynamometer is activated.

!!! CAUTION!!!

VEHICLE MAY DRIVE OFF THEDYNAMOMETER, EVEN IF THE THROTTLE

PEDAL IS NOT DEPRESSED.

Engine overspeed protection

The electronics protect the engine againstoverspeed and stalling.

Manual mode

An automatic upshift is not made if the vehicle isgoing downhill. Under these circumstances, it isup to you to keep engine revs under control byreducing vehicle speed.

!!! CAUTION!!!

ENGINE OVERSPEED MAY LEAD TOSERIOUS ENGINE DAMAGE.

Automatic mode

!!! CAUTION!!!

TO PROTECT THE ENGINE AGAINSTOVERSPEED, THE GEAR SHIFT SYSTEM

WILL UPSHIFT AUTOMATICALLY WHEN THEVEHICLE SPEED INCREASES.

Vehicle on roller dynamometer

1. Drive the vehicle on the roller dynamometer.

2. Push the "N" button. The transmission is inneutral.

If the dynamometer is started, the gear shiftsystem detects the "driving vehicle" status. If youpush the "D" button with the dynamometer acti-vated, the gear shift system will select a gear thatis appropriate for the speed and close the clutch.Automatic shifts are not undertaken because thefront wheels are not rotating.

Reverse can not be selected when thedynamometer is activated.

!!! CAUTION!!!

VEHICLE MAY DRIVE OFF THEDYNAMOMETER, EVEN IF THE THROTTLE

PEDAL IS NOT DEPRESSED.

UP

DA

TE

S A

ND

AD

DIT

ION

S

OG

B06A

FO

GB

06AF

UP

DA

TE

S A

ND

AD

DIT

ION

S



Error messages

This warning message appears on themultifunction display and a buzzersounds if a system fault is present.

This means:

• increased vigilance• restricted drive comfort, e.g. when driving-off

and shifting or automatic mode is no longeravailable

• the vehicle can not be driven any further• take vehicle to a specialized workshop as soon

as possible

A serious system fault is present ifthis warning message appears on themultifunction display together with themessage "SM" on the push-buttonshift selector display and a buzzersounds.

This means:

• the vehicle must not be driven any further• stop vehicle

How should you respond to a system fault?

With the vehicle stationary, proceed as follows:

1. Switch off the ignition and wait until the displayextinguishes.

If the display does not extinguish, switch offmaster switch.

2. Switch ignition back on.

If the fault message is still present, you have tobring the vehicle to a specialized workshop.Read fault codes before calling for assistance.

To display active fault code

1. Switch on the ignition.

2. Start to push the "N" button.

3. Hold down the "↑" button.

The fault code appears on the display.

Error messages

This warning message appears on themultifunction display and a buzzersounds if a system fault is present.

This means:

• increased vigilance• restricted drive comfort, e.g. when driving-off

and shifting or automatic mode is no longeravailable

• the vehicle can not be driven any further• take vehicle to a specialized workshop as soon

as possible

A serious system fault is present ifthis warning message appears on themultifunction display together with themessage "SM" on the push-buttonshift selector display and a buzzersounds.

This means:

• the vehicle must not be driven any further• stop vehicle

How should you respond to a system fault?

With the vehicle stationary, proceed as follows:

1. Switch off the ignition and wait until the displayextinguishes.

If the display does not extinguish, switch offmaster switch.

2. Switch ignition back on.

If the fault message is still present, you have tobring the vehicle to a specialized workshop.Read fault codes before calling for assistance.

To display active fault code


2. Start to push the "N" button.

3. Hold down the "↑" button.

The fault code appears on the display.

UP

DA

TE

S A

ND

AD

DIT

ION

SU

PD

AT

ES

AN

D A

DD

ITIO

NS

OG

B06

AF

OG

B06

AF



C2045

C2045

To display fault codes from the fault memory


2. Start to push the "N" button and, at the sametime, depress the brake pedal.

3. While holding down the brake pedal, push andhold down the "↑" button.

The faults saved appear on the display, oneafter another.

Fault code reproduction

Fault codes 1 to 99 (example: faultcode 19)

Fault codes 100 to 199 (example:fault code 122)

Fault codes 200 to 299 (exam-ple: fault code 227)

To start the vehicle at low ambienttemperatures

Ambient temperature between -4 and -22 °F

With the vehicle at a standstill, operate the enginefor at least 10 minutes until the transmission oilhas warmed up.

Ambient temperature below -22 °F

Use warm air to bring the transmission tempera-ture above -22 °F before starting the engine.

To display fault codes from the fault memory


2. Start to push the "N" button and, at the sametime, depress the brake pedal.

3. While holding down the brake pedal, push andhold down the "↑" button.

The faults saved appear on the display, oneafter another.

Fault code reproduction

Fault codes 1 to 99 (example: faultcode 19)

Fault codes 100 to 199 (example:fault code 122)

Fault codes 200 to 299 (exam-ple: fault code 227)

To start the vehicle at low ambienttemperatures

Ambient temperature between -4 and -22 °F

With the vehicle at a standstill, operate the enginefor at least 10 minutes until the transmission oilhas warmed up.

Ambient temperature below -22 °F

Use warm air to bring the transmission tempera-ture above -22 °F before starting the engine.

UP

DA

TE

S A

ND

AD

DIT

ION

S

OG

B06A

FO

GB

06AF

UP

DA

TE

S A

ND

AD

DIT

ION

S



ZF INTARDER

INTRODUCTION

The ZF Intarder is a hydraulic retarder integrated inthe ZF Astronic.

MESSAGE ON MULTIFUNCTIONDISPLAY

This message appears when the retarderis in operation. The message alsoappears for 3 seconds, when the ignition

is switched on. The message flashes in case ofan electric failure. Drive to the nearest specializedrepair shop.

TO OPERATE

The ZF Intarder is operated with the service brakepedal or with a hand lever at the steering column.It contains also an automatic braking feature (seefurther on).

Foot operation

The ZF Intarder will become operative as soon asyou depress the brake pedal.

To disconnect foot operation

The purpose of this dashswitch is todisconnect the ZF Intarder from thebrake pedal.Leaf this switch in the non-pushedposition except when the use of theIntarder could create a safety hazard,such as on slippery roads or when thecoach is empty.

Hand operation

The hand lever has fivestages: 0,1,2,3,4.

• The hand lever allows retardation in fourstages.

T03801

ZF INTARDER

INTRODUCTION

The ZF Intarder is a hydraulic retarder integrated inthe ZF Astronic.

MESSAGE ON MULTIFUNCTIONDISPLAY

This message appears when the retarderis in operation. The message alsoappears for 3 seconds, when the ignition

is switched on. The message flashes in case ofan electric failure. Drive to the nearest specializedrepair shop.

TO OPERATE

The ZF Intarder is operated with the service brakepedal or with a hand lever at the steering column.It contains also an automatic braking feature (seefurther on).

Foot operation

The ZF Intarder will become operative as soon asyou depress the brake pedal.

To disconnect foot operation

The purpose of this dashswitch is todisconnect the ZF Intarder from thebrake pedal.Leaf this switch in the "ON" positionexcept when the use of the Intardercould create a safety hazard, such ason slippery roads or when the coach isempty.

Hand operation

The hand lever has fivestages: 0,1,2,3,4.

• The hand lever allows retardation in fourstages.

T03801

UP

DA

TE

S A

ND

AD

DIT

ION

SU

PD

AT

ES

AN

D A

DD

ITIO

NS

OG

B06

AF

OG

B06

AF



C2045

C2045

• Never pull hand lever backwards in onemovement, but leave it in each position for amoment.

• When returning to the "0" position, however,you can move the handle in one movement

!!! CAUTION!!!

THE INTARDER CANNOT HOLD THE VEHICLESTATIONARY. DO NOT USE IT AS A

PARKING BRAKE.

Automatic braking

The automatic braking feature holds the vehicle atthe same speed throughout a changing downhillgradient.

It operates only when the hand lever is in the "0"position and the vehicle speed is above 15 mph.The system will be engaged automatically assoon as you:

• release the throttle pedal;• release the brake pedal;• switch off the cruise control;• bring back the hand lever to the "0" position.

• Never pull hand lever backwards in onemovement, but leave it in each position for amoment.

• When returning to the "0" position, however,you can move the handle in one movement

!!! CAUTION!!!

THE INTARDER CANNOT HOLD THE VEHICLESTATIONARY. DO NOT USE IT AS A

PARKING BRAKE.

Automatic braking

The automatic braking feature holds the vehicle atthe same speed throughout a changing downhillgradient.

It operates only when the hand lever is in the "0"position and the vehicle speed is above 15 mph.The system will be engaged automatically assoon as you:

• release the throttle pedal;• release the brake pedal;• switch off the cruise control;• bring back the hand lever to the "0" position.

MECHANICAL BATTERYISOLATING SWITCH

Current vehicles are equipped with a mechanicalbattery isolating switch in the batteriescompartment.

!!! CAUTION!!!

NEVER DISCONNECT THE BATTERIES WHENTHE ENGINE IS RUNNING UNLESS IN

EMERGENCY SITUATIONS SUCH AS FIRE.BATTERY DISCONNECT SHOULD NOT BE

PERFORMED PRIOR TO 30 SECONDSFOLLOWING IGNITION OFF; OTHERWISE

THE ECM OF THE ENGINE WILL NOT STORETHE ENGINE INFORMATION AND WILL

RESULT IN CORRUPTED AND INCOMPLETEDATA BEING STORED.

The purpose of the switch is to allow servicetechnicians to shutt off the entire electricalsystem with the exception of the batteryequalizer. It also prevents battery drainage whenthe vehicle is parked for an extented period oftime. Be aware that some electronic equipment(such as combution heater timer, digital clock,radio,...) must be set again.

MECHANICAL BATTERYISOLATING SWITCH

Current vehicles are equipped with a mechanicalbattery isolating switch in the batteriescompartment.

!!! CAUTION!!!

NEVER DISCONNECT THE BATTERIES WHENTHE ENGINE IS RUNNING UNLESS IN

EMERGENCY SITUATIONS SUCH AS FIRE.BATTERY DISCONNECT SHOULD NOT BE

PERFORMED PRIOR TO 30 SECONDSFOLLOWING IGNITION OFF; OTHERWISE

THE ECM OF THE ENGINE WILL NOT STORETHE ENGINE INFORMATION AND WILL

RESULT IN CORRUPTED AND INCOMPLETEDATA BEING STORED.

The purpose of the switch is to allow servicetechnicians to shutt off the entire electricalsystem with the exception of the batteryequalizer. It also prevents battery drainage whenthe vehicle is parked for an extented period oftime. Be aware that some electronic equipment(such as combution heater timer, digital clock,radio,...) must be set again.

UP

DA

TE

S A

ND

AD

DIT

ION

S

OG

B06A

FO

GB

06AF

UP

DA

TE

S A

ND

AD

DIT

ION

S



1. Batteries disconnected2. Batteries connected

• To disconnect the batteries: turn the switchlever to the left. There is no need to remove thelever from the switch.

• To connect the batteries: turn the switch leverto the right.

1. Batteries disconnected2. Batteries connected

• To disconnect the batteries: turn the switchlever to the left. There is no need to remove thelever from the switch.

• To connect the batteries: turn the switch leverto the right.

UP

DA

TE

S A

ND

AD

DIT

ION

SU

PD

AT

ES

AN

D A

DD

ITIO

NS

OG

B06

AF

OG

B06

AF



C2045

C2045

!!! REPAIR INSTRUCTION !!!

Only for vehicles with Caterpillar/ZF Astronic drive train.

Before installing the transmission to the engine, measure the transmission input shaft to enginecrankshaft clearance.

Procedure:

1. Position a straight-edge against the head of thetransmission input shaft (as shown). Makesure that the straight-edge keeps in positionduring measurement! Let an assistant measurethe distance between the engine-to-transmission mounting surface and thestraight-edge by using the caliper tail formeasuring depths. Record this distance.

2. With the straight-edge still against the head ofthe transmission input shaft, let an assistantmeasure at the other side of the transmission.

3. Repeat measurements of step 1 and 2.

4. Calculate average (X) of the fourmeasurements.

!!! REPAIR INSTRUCTION !!!

Only for vehicles with Caterpillar/ZF Astronic drive train.

Before installing the transmission to the engine, measure the transmission input shaft to enginecrankshaft clearance.

Procedure:

1. Position a straight-edge against the head of thetransmission input shaft (as shown). Makesure that the straight-edge keeps in positionduring measurement! Let an assistant measurethe distance between the engine-to-transmission mounting surface and thestraight-edge by using the caliper tail formeasuring depths. Record this distance.

2. With the straight-edge still against the head ofthe transmission input shaft, let an assistantmeasure at the other side of the transmission.

3. Repeat measurements of step 1 and 2.

4. Calculate average (X) of the fourmeasurements.

UP

DA

TE

S A

ND

AD

DIT

ION

S

OG

B06A

FO

GB

06AF

UP

DA

TE

S A

ND

AD

DIT

ION

S



5. Place the straight-edge on the engine-to-transmission mounting surface of the engine.Place the caliper on the straight-edge, in linewith the crankshaft, and measure the distance(Y) to the crankshaft face.

Calculate clearance (Y-X).

If clearance is less than 0.02 inch, you have tocut back the transmission input shaft bygrinding.

5. Place the straight-edge on the engine-to-transmission mounting surface of the engine.Place the caliper on the straight-edge, in linewith the crankshaft, and measure the distance(Y) to the crankshaft face.

Calculate clearance (Y-X).

If clearance is less than 0.02 inch, you have tocut back the transmission input shaft bygrinding.

IND

EX

IND

EX

Upd

ate

B_O

GB

07A

FU

pdat

e B

_OG

B07

AF


SECTION 7 PAGE 1DATE 10/2004C2045

C2045

Section/page

A

Air cleaner...................................................................................................................................... 4/12Air system emergency fill .......................................................................................................... 2/2C-14Anti-lock braking system (ABS) ................................................................................................ 2/2B-22

Trouble code reading .......................................................................................................... 2/2C-14Assistance ..................................................................................................................................... 1/10Astronic (ZF) .................................................................................................................................... 6/3Automatic traction control (ASR) ............................................................................................... 2/2B-22

B

Batteries ........................................................................................................................................ 4/24Body ground clearance................................................................................................................... 4/23Brakes

Anti-lock braking system ................................................................................................... 2/2B-22Jake brake ......................................................................................................................... 2/2B-19Parking brake ..................................................................................................................... 2/2B-21Parking brake emergency release ........................................................................................ 2/2C-1Service brake ..................................................................................................................... 2/2B-20ZF Intarder .............................................................................................................................. 6/14

INDEX

Section/page

A

Air cleaner...................................................................................................................................... 4/12Air system emergency fill .......................................................................................................... 2/2C-14Anti-lock braking system (ABS) ................................................................................................ 2/2B-22

Trouble code reading .......................................................................................................... 2/2C-14Assistance ..................................................................................................................................... 1/10Astronic (ZF) .................................................................................................................................... 6/3Automatic traction control (ASR) ............................................................................................... 2/2B-22

B

Batteries ........................................................................................................................................ 4/24Body ground clearance................................................................................................................... 4/23Brakes

Anti-lock braking system ................................................................................................... 2/2B-22Jake brake ......................................................................................................................... 2/2B-19Parking brake ..................................................................................................................... 2/2B-21Parking brake emergency release ........................................................................................ 2/2C-1Service brake ..................................................................................................................... 2/2B-20ZF Intarder .............................................................................................................................. 6/14

INDEX

Update B

_OG

B07A

FU

pdate B_O

GB

07AF

IND

EX



IND

EX

C2045

C2045

Section/page

C

Chassis frame jacking points .................................................................................................... 2/2C-22Circuit breakers ......................................................................................................................5/17, 5/24Climate control

Driver's compartment ................................................................................................................. 3/3Override ............................................................................................................................. 2/2C-24Passengers' compartment ......................................................................................................... 3/4

Combustion heater ........................................................................................................................... 3/7Compartments

Driver's compartment and controls ........................................................................................ 2/2A-9Exterior compartments ............................................................................................................ 1/15

CoolantLevel ......................................................................................................................................... 4/8Recommendations .................................................................................................................... 5/9

Cooling fanMechanical locking device .................................................................................................... 2/2C-5

Cruise control/fast idleCruise control ..................................................................................................................... 2/2B-16Fast idle ............................................................................................................................. 2/2B-17

D

Dimensions and data ..................................................................................................................... 1/12Drive belts ...................................................................................................................................... 4/10Driver's seat ................................................................................................................................ 2/2A-9

Section/page

C

Chassis frame jacking points .................................................................................................... 2/2C-22Circuit breakers ......................................................................................................................5/17, 5/24Climate control

Driver's compartment ................................................................................................................. 3/3Override ............................................................................................................................. 2/2C-24Passengers' compartment ......................................................................................................... 3/4

Combustion heater ........................................................................................................................... 3/7Compartments

Driver's compartment and controls ........................................................................................ 2/2A-9Exterior compartments ............................................................................................................ 1/15

CoolantLevel ......................................................................................................................................... 4/8Recommendations .................................................................................................................... 5/9

Cooling fanMechanical locking device .................................................................................................... 2/2C-5

Cruise control/fast idleCruise control ..................................................................................................................... 2/2B-16Fast idle ............................................................................................................................. 2/2B-17

D

Dimensions and data ..................................................................................................................... 1/12Drive belts ...................................................................................................................................... 4/10Driver's seat ................................................................................................................................ 2/2A-9

IND

EX

IND

EX

Upd

ate

B_O

GB

07A

FU

pdat

e B

_OG

B07

AF



C2045

Section/page

E

Electrical system ...................................................................................................................5/16, 5/22Emergency exits ......................................................................................................................... 2/2C-6Engine

Trouble code reading ............................................................................................................ 2/2C-8Oil level ..................................................................................................................................... 4/5To drive off ............................................................................................................................ 2/2B-4To start ................................................................................................................................. 2/2B-2To stop ................................................................................................................................. 2/2B-1To warm-up .......................................................................................................................... 2/2B-5

Entrance doorControl ............................................................................................................................... 2/2B-26Emergency operation ........................................................................................................... 2/2C-3

F

Fast idle .................................................................................................................................... 2/2B-17Front lower system ................................................................................................................... 2/2B-24Fuel recommendations ..................................................................................................................... 5/7Fuses ....................................................................................................................................5/16, 5/22

HHazard warning flasher ................................................................................................................ 2/2C-2

Section/page

E

Electrical system ...................................................................................................................5/16, 5/22Emergency exits ......................................................................................................................... 2/2C-6Engine

Trouble code reading ............................................................................................................ 2/2C-8Oil level ..................................................................................................................................... 4/5To drive off ............................................................................................................................ 2/2B-4To start ................................................................................................................................. 2/2B-2To stop ................................................................................................................................. 2/2B-1To warm-up .......................................................................................................................... 2/2B-5

Entrance doorControl ............................................................................................................................... 2/2B-26Emergency operation ........................................................................................................... 2/2C-3

F

Fast idle .................................................................................................................................... 2/2B-17Front lower system ................................................................................................................... 2/2B-24Fuel recommendations ..................................................................................................................... 5/7Fuses ....................................................................................................................................5/16, 5/22

HHazard warning flasher ................................................................................................................ 2/2C-2

Update B

_OG

B07A

FU

pdate B_O

GB

07AF

IND

EX



IND

EX

C2045

C2045

IIdentification

Engine identification .................................................................................................................. 1/8Vehicle identification number ..................................................................................................... 1/8Vehicle identification plate ......................................................................................................... 1/7

Ignition switch ........................................................................................................................... 2/2A-13Instrument panel ........................................................................................... 2/2A-15, 2/2A-17, 2/2A-19

Instrument panel switches .................................................................................................. 2/2A-20

JJump starting ............................................................................................................................ 2/2C-24

LLavatory ......................................................................................................................................... 3/14Lifting and towing ...................................................................................................................... 2/2C-15Lights

Warning and indicator lights ................................................................................. 2/2A-26, 2/2A-34

MMaster switch ........................................................................................................................... 2/2A-13Mechanical battery isolating switch ................................................................................................ 6/15

PPower steering system

Failure ................................................................................................................................ 2/2B-19Fluid level ................................................................................................................................ 4/20Fluid recommendations ........................................................................................................... 5/13

Section/page

IIdentification

Engine identification .................................................................................................................. 1/8Vehicle identification number ..................................................................................................... 1/8Vehicle identification plate ......................................................................................................... 1/7

Ignition switch ........................................................................................................................... 2/2A-13Instrument panel ........................................................................................... 2/2A-15, 2/2A-17, 2/2A-19

Instrument panel switches .................................................................................................. 2/2A-20

JJump starting ............................................................................................................................ 2/2C-24

LLavatory ......................................................................................................................................... 3/14Lifting and towing ...................................................................................................................... 2/2C-15Lights

Warning and indicator lights ................................................................................. 2/2A-26, 2/2A-34

MMaster switch ........................................................................................................................... 2/2A-13Mechanical battery isolating switch ................................................................................................ 6/15

PPower steering system

Failure ................................................................................................................................ 2/2B-19Fluid level ................................................................................................................................ 4/20Fluid recommendations ........................................................................................................... 5/13

Section/page

IND

EX

IND

EX

Upd

ate

B_O

GB

07A

FU

pdat

e B

_OG

B07

AF



C2045

RRaise/lower system................................................................................................................... 2/2B-23Rear rise system ....................................................................................................................... 2/2B-24Rear view mirrors ....................................................................................................................... 2/2A-11

SSafety instructions ........................................................................................................................... 1/3Seat belt ................................................................................................................................... 2/2A-11Shock absorbers ............................................................................................................................ 4/23Spare wheel & tire ..................................................................................................................... 2/2C-16Speedometer ............................................................................................................... 2/2A-40, 2/2A-44Steering column ........................................................................................................................ 2/2A-12Steering column combination switch ......................................................................................... 2/2A-13

TTachometer ................................................................................................................. 2/2A-40, 2/2A-44Tag axle unloading .................................................................................................................... 2/2B-25Tires ............................................................................................................................................... 4/22

Emergency tire inflation ...................................................................................................... 2/2C-16To check tire inflation pressure ................................................................................................ 4/21To inspect tires ....................................................................................................................... 4/22

Toilet .............................................................................................................................................. 4/26Transmission

To check fluid level (Allison WTB500) ...................................................................................... 4/15Trouble code reading (Allison WTB500) .............................................................................. 2/2C-12Fluid recommendations (Allison WTB500 and ZF Astronic) ..................................................... 5/12

Turbo boost gauge .................................................................................................................... 2/2A-42

Section/page

RRaise/lower system................................................................................................................... 2/2B-23Rear rise system ....................................................................................................................... 2/2B-24Rear view mirrors ....................................................................................................................... 2/2A-11

SSafety instructions ........................................................................................................................... 1/3Seat belt ................................................................................................................................... 2/2A-11Shock absorbers ............................................................................................................................ 4/23Spare wheel & tire ..................................................................................................................... 2/2C-16Speedometer ............................................................................................................... 2/2A-40, 2/2A-44Steering column ........................................................................................................................ 2/2A-12Steering column combination switch ......................................................................................... 2/2A-13

TTachometer ................................................................................................................. 2/2A-40, 2/2A-44Tag axle unloading .................................................................................................................... 2/2B-25Tires ............................................................................................................................................... 4/22

Emergency tire inflation ...................................................................................................... 2/2C-16To check tire inflation pressure ................................................................................................ 4/21To inspect tires ....................................................................................................................... 4/22

Toilet .............................................................................................................................................. 4/26Transmission

To check fluid level (Allison WTB500) ...................................................................................... 4/15Trouble code reading (Allison WTB500) .............................................................................. 2/2C-12Fluid recommendations (Allison WTB500 and ZF Astronic) ..................................................... 5/12

Turbo boost gauge .................................................................................................................... 2/2A-42

Section/page

Update B

_OG

B07A

FU

pdate B_O

GB

07AF

IND

EX



IND

EX

C2045

C2045

WWheelchair

Lift .......................................................................................................................................... 3/10Restraint system..................................................................................................................... 3/12

WheelsSpare wheel & tire .............................................................................................................. 2/2C-16To change a road wheel ...................................................................................................... 2/2C-17To check wheel nuts torque ..................................................................................................... 4/22

Windshield washer tank ................................................................................................................. 4/25Windshield wipers/washer ......................................................................................................... 2/2A-13

ZZF Astronic ...................................................................................................................................... 6/3ZF Intarder...................................................................................................................................... 6/14

Section/page

WWheelchair

Lift .......................................................................................................................................... 3/10Restraint system..................................................................................................................... 3/12

WheelsSpare wheel & tire .............................................................................................................. 2/2C-16To change a road wheel ...................................................................................................... 2/2C-17To check wheel nuts torque ..................................................................................................... 4/22

Windshield washer tank ................................................................................................................. 4/25Windshield wipers/washer ......................................................................................................... 2/2A-13

ZZF Astronic ...................................................................................................................................... 6/3ZF Intarder...................................................................................................................................... 6/14

Section/page

For vehicles with Caterpillar/ZF Astronic drive train only

Documents